Home

DATA BOOK

1. lt Sampling monitoring examples gt Sample 7 QD75D4 Sampling monitor Buffer 1 0 0 Sampling Sampling interval Normal Buffer area data 50000 800 DWORD 0 804 DWORD 0 Not setting Not setting PES amp Sample 7 QD75D4 Sampling monitor Signal 170 0 BE E3 Samping Sampinginterval Nomai al Signal 1 QD75 Ready 2 Axis 1 Error detection 3 Axis 1 Positioning start 4 Axis 1 Drive unit ready 5 Axis 3Zero phase signal 6 Not setting ee eel Donc Ease of checking error and warning causes The online help function ensures ease of checking the cause and corrective action of the error or warning code displayed by positioning system operation monitoring or error history monitoring 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for Error code List Error Number 509 T ravel outside stroke limit 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Error Number 508 Start outside stroke limit Error Number 509 T ravel outside stroke limit Error Number 510 T ravel outside stroke limit Error Number 511 Travel outside stroke limit amp Eror code List File Edit Bookmark Options Help Contents Index Print lt Error code List Error code 509 Type QD75 Error code 503 Error Name Travel outside stroke limit Detection timing At operation start Operation Sta
2. Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O MELSECNET MINI S3 Remote I O Remote I O The master module of the MELSECNET MINI S3 can be used with QAS1S3 _ B or QAS1S6 _ B Remote I O E Connectable remote modules The modules which may be connected are all conventional remote I O modules that may be connected to MELSECNET MINI S3 such as the remote I O of MELSECNET MINI S3 and A2C series For full information on the usable modules refer to the MELSEC AnS catalog Please note that the following software is necessary for remote I O modules other than digital remote I O modules SWOIVD MINIP E W Twisted pair cable specifications Item Cable type Number of pairs Specifications Shielded twisted pair cable 2P or more 88 0 82 km max 20 C Average 60nF km max 1kHz 110 10 Conductor resistance Capacitance Characteristic impedance E Optical cable specifications Item Specifications Type Plastic fiber cable Transmission loss 260dB km max Fiber OD 1000 um Connector 1 core connector Permissible flexing radius 25mm 0 99inch Optical fiber cables are available from Mitsubishi Electric System Service E Restrictions on use with Q mode The following MELSECNET MINI S3 dedicated instructions compatible with the A QnA cannot be used with the Q mode Programming must be performed using the FROM TO and similar instructions Unusable instructions INPUT PRN PR MINI MI
3. Communication path supplied by CSKP Specifications E Operating environment Item Description OS Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Note 1 CPU Pentium 100MHz or more multiprocessor incompatible Display Resolution 800 X 600 pixels or more recommended 1024 X 768 pixels Required memory 32MB or more capacity Hard disk free space 15MB or more Disk drive 3 5 inch 1 44MB floppy disk drive needed for installation Programming Visual Basic 4 0 Note 2 language Visual Basic 5 0 6 0 Visual C 4 2 Note 2 Visual C 5 0 6 0 Note 1 Service Pack 3 or higher is required for use of Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Note 2 Cannot be used for CC Link communication 4 7 SOFTWARE PACKAGES Basic Communication Support Tool SW3D5F CSKP E Accessible CPU Device Ranges CPU Q Series Q Mode input xf xotoxtrre XotoxtFrF XOtoXIFFF XO to XT FFF Output yf YotovirFe VotovirFr Yovir YO to VA FFF Latch relay Lf LtoootoL2o47_ Lototst91 Lt000toL2047 Loto L8191 Internal relay MO to M999 MO to M8191 MO to M999 MO to M8191 M2048 to M8191 M2048 to M8191 Annunciator FO to F2047 Timer TO to T2047 Retentive timer st J SC soto st20g7 J CC STO S207 Counter CO to C1023 Data register D boto pater oto D12287 oto D8191 Doto D12287 Accumulator a aom fv e Index register ZZ1 to Z15 Index register v vvitves J vve Edge relay pv JC otoveng7 J Svoo
4. POWER SUPPLY For AC POWER SUPPLY For AC DC TRANSFORMER 000 TRANSFORMER j FUSE Y AFUSE Input switched when power supply r established POWER SUPPLY A FUSE Set time for DC power supply to be established RUN STOP circuit interlocked with RA1 L START SW R At eo L MCISTOP SW START SW bots RAD INPUT MODULE _MC stop sw Le ee toro INPUT MODULE OUTPUT MODULE O Low battery alarm l ihs LO XM j Ym a gal or buzzer E 5 1 O o On when run y ees n by SM403 Low battery alarm T Ej Ga OUTPUT MODULE Lamp or buzzer L Ym OUTPUT MODULE AMC power to output I NZ ON when run by M9039 a equipment switched aa Power to output equipment oer when Ine STOR ii Hi switched Ore a i signal is given STOP si lis ai In the case of an TA ree a l signal Is given emergency stop or a stop OUTPUT MODULE In the case of an caused by a limit switch FMC FMC emergency stop or i 2 Ni sf a stop caused by Interlock circuits as necessary a2 a limit switch Provide external interlock H O 4 circuits for conflicting Voltage relay operations such as forward l MC2 recommended rotation and reverse rotation ic 7 and for parts that could damage the machine or cause accidents if no interlo
5. AWG 28 AWG 30 e Pressure displacement tool for AGCON3 FCN 367T T012 H locator plate FCN 707T T001 H cable cutter FCN 707T T101 H hand press A6CON2E A6CON3E Connector type Soldering type Crimp contact Pressure type displacement type 1 O module type Applicable wire size Negative common source type input module source type output module e Crimp contact tool for AGCON2E AWG 28 AWG 30 e Pressure displacement tool for AGCON3E 91257 1 die set 91220 1 cable cutter 91085 2 hand mini press 3 22 MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Connectors Terminal Block Convertor Modules Connector Terminal Block Convertor 2 Cables _Modules A6TB gt 3 RIR Weight kg Applicable ype escription b Model The connector terminal block converter module is ACO5TB 0 5m 1 64ft for sink 0 17 A6TBXY36 designed to convert the connector of a connector type I O modules 0 37 ABTBXY54 k AC10TB 1m 3 28ft for sink 0 23 A6TBX70 module into a terminal block to ensure ease of external mod les 0 51 wiring AC20TB 2m 6 56ft for sink 0 37 To use this module plug a dedicated cable to the modules 0 81 AC30TB 3m 9 84ft for sink 0 51 connector of an I O module and plug the opposite side of iod les 1 12 that cable to the connector terminal block convertor AC50TB 5m 16 39ft for sink 0 76 module Perform external wiring at t
6. Monitoring Tool Custom Control List Function File Name Description Parts display Graphic display XMPICTUR OCX Shows a graphic file with set values Blink display XMBLINK OCX Provides a blink display when the specified bit __i deviceis ON Comment display XMCMNT OCX Shows a comment with the set device value Graph Level display XMLEVEL OCX Shows a level display Line graph display XMLINGRF OCX Shows a line graph Trend graph display XMTREND OCX Shows a trend graph Bar graph display XMBARGRF OCX Shows a bar graph Pareto chart display XMPALLET OCX Shows a Pareto chart Historical trend graph display XMHSTTRD OCX Shows a historical trend graph Block Numeric block data display input XMNUMBLK OCX Shows enters numeric values in block display input Character string block data display input XMSTRBLK OCX Shows enters character strings in block Display input Numeric data display input XMNUMDAT OCX Shows enters numeric value data Character string data display input XMSTRDAT OCX Shows enters character string data Bit device operation bit input XMBITOPR OCX Performs bit device operation Input Word write XMWRWORD OCX Writes data to a word device Bit write XMWRBIT OCX Writes data to a bit device Others Event occurrence XMEVENT OCX Causes an event at the specified timing Snap shot XMSNPSHT OCX Provides output etc to a printer Alarm display XMCATION OCX Shows an alarm on the screen on the basis of the
7. om oe St A06 A05 Coincidence mote output point No 1 eet ss PESE ae B06 B05 Coincidence ya output point No 2 To fuse blow Ei 12 24V detection circuit Fuse A02 A01 OV Terminal numbers A03 A04 B03 and B04 are not used 2 109 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D QD62E external I O terminals QD62D external I O terminals Terminal Terminal Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name cHi_ Che A phase pulse A20 A13 input 24V A20 AA A phase pulse A phase pulse input B20 B13 amp input 12V Aaa A phase pulse VY Aig a2 peel input 5V B20 B14 A phase pulse input B19 B12 ABCOM B phase pulse B ph l A18 A11 A19 A13 phase pulse input 24V input B ph pies B11 ie puise Saad input 12V a B phase pulse VY H a47 ago Brphase pulse Big B13 a p input 5V npu A12 Preset input 24V B17 B10 Preset input 24V B12 Preset input 12V A16 A09 Preset input 12V A11 Preset input 5V va 7 R B16 B09 Preset input 5V BLD PRSTCOM A10 Function start A15 A08 CTRLCOM input 24V Function start B10 Function start B15 B08 i input 24V input 12V A Function start Function start A14 A07 A03 i input 12V input 5V Wok B14 B07 Function start Bog FUNCCOM ae input 5V EQU1 a
8. GOT A900 operates as remote device or intelligent device station A985GOT A97LIGOT A960GOT A956GOT e Intelligent device station A8GT J61BT13 e Remote device station A8GT J61BT15 Shielded twisted cable Usable GOT A900 Necessary interface module Connection cable Max cable length Conforms to network specifications About Options E Extended memory A985 A97_ A960GOT Using the memory board can expand the internal memory It is also needed to perform the optional functions e g recipe function voice output function GOT rear face zl Type Remarks A9GT FNB For optional function only A9GT FNB1M For optional function built in memory of 1M bytes A9GT FNB2M For optional function built in memory of 2M bytes A9GT FNB4M For optional function built in memory of 4M bytes A9GT FNB8M For optional function built in memory of 8M bytes A9GT QFNB For optional function only AQGT For optional function built in memory of 4M bytes QFNB4M AQGT For optional function built in memory of 8M bytes QFNB8M 5 10 System Configuration E Backlight The GOT A900 series allows the user to change the backlight easily On the spot replacement can be made easily The EL does not have a backlight and needs no replacement Type Remarks A9GT 80LTT For 12 inch high intensity TFT color liqu
9. CPU COM utility CPU COM utility Bm E Target iagnosis Version r M por COMT z FF Logican Staion Nof e a aaa Network VELSECNETZIO fh Connect CPU Name arACPU Z Relay CPU Name OracPO 4 10 skies H ih S Shared device utility Used to make settings required to provide a personal computer with shared device memories EM which is equivalent to the internal relay of the PLC and ED which is equivalent to the data register E Shared device server utility Used to make settings necessary to share devices between personal computers or between personal computer and PLC Device monitor utility The set communication system is used to perform batch monitoring and data change test of the device memories in the PLC When debugging an application program created in Visual Basic Visual C this utility can be used to check the device data in the PLC Offline Debugging The ladder logic test function LLT starts a virtual PLC on a personal computer Debugging can be made on the personal computer without connection of the PLC Debugging can be made by making access to the logic test function LLT on the same personal computer CSKP e a O 0 n L 0 il O Personal compu PLC PLC CPU need not be connected 4 6 SOF
10. Output specifications QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 i Rated Load Max Inrush ON Time Max OFF Time 5 24VDC i For open collector rise fall time and duty ratio are as given in the following table x Response Time Pulse output CW PULSE A phase ON i Pulse sign 1 1 CCW SIGN B OFF phase re ie toe ee if Note 1 See the following table for rise fall time Deviation counter 5 24VDC 0 1A point 1VDC TYP 2ms max clear CLEAR 5 25 2 5VDC MAX resistive load Load current 2 tf tr tf tr oo oso 47 0 08 to tf tr tf tr oa 203 66 008 020 146 oo 242 s7 oro a44 126 0 09 244 a7 oio as2 ar77 oo 1o s98 om 177 25 o0 1o 453 010 1 76 403 Output specifications QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Rated Load Max Inrush ON Time Max OFF Time Voltage Meh Wester Cuer Voltage Drop Leakage Current Signal Name Response Time Pulse output CW PULSE A phase Am26LS31 or equivalent differential driver Pulse sign ON OFF level ON 1 8V or more OFF 0 6V or less CCW SIGN B phase Deviation counter clear CLEAR 2ms max resistive load 5 24VDC 1VDC TYP 5 25 0 1A point 0 4A 10ms max 2 5VDC MAX 2 121 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Positioning Module QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4
11. Instr at Target Station y Description ction RIRD Reads data from buffer memory Master station or CPU device of target station Local station Writes data to buffer memory or RIWT CPU device of target station R fi ffer memor RIRD eads data rom buffer memory of target station Wri ff mory of RIWT rites data to buffer memory o target station Intelligent device station 7 RIFR Reads contents of automatic updating buffer of target station Wri mati RITO mites data to automatic updating buffer of target station Program Compatibility The existing program can be utilized by using A to Q Station 3 T number setting program conversion or QnA to Q program conversion of s vitches GPPW Note 1 The RLPA network parameter setting instruction and RRPA automatic refresh parameter setting instruction are not supported After deleting the RLPA RRPA instruction set the CC Link parameters using the network parameters of GPPW LED indicators Description RUN ON Module s normal OFF Module is abnormal ON All stations in communications error Lit at occurrence of any of the following errors e Switch or control setting is abnormal e There is more than one master station ERR on the same line e Parameter setting error e Data link watchdog timer activated e Cable broken or transmission path affected by noise etc Flicker There is a station with communications error MST ON Master station operation S MST O
12. it will be important to smoothly carry out on the spot maintenance The Q series has functions to minimize this maintenance related problem Remote Programming The Q series compatible GPPW function software allows online programming and monitoring and testing operations to be performed with the Q series PLCs installed at remote locations Connections to the Q series PLCs connected to Ethernet can be made via Ethernet and connections to the PLCs connected with modems can be made via telephone line ISDN line and modems s Ethernet LZ a Telephone line RS 232 RS 232 Modem Modem Built In ROM To reduce the possibility of program data erasure due to battery failure built in flash ROMs are included in all CPU types so there is no need to add a memory card to store programs onto ROM System Monitoring System monitoring gives you an at a glance error detection condition of each module in a PLC system It supports restoration at occurrence of trouble Base Information Jj Overall Information Base Name Main Base Number of Slot 5 Number of Base 1 Base Type Q Number of Installed Module 4 Number of Modules pietekas Jf Product infomation ofifets as 0108100000000000 A naaa Base QI 1QI71 QI71 0771 Urmoj i C24 271 cz4 c24 funea Base Module 2ptlazpt nz r2 ng
13. 1 Overview and Features cccceeeee 5 2 2 System Configuration 5 6 3 General Specifications ccccccceees 5 12 4 Performance Specifications 2 5 13 5i Funet Listi shri eeeiiols 5 17 6 External Dimensions sessssesseeeeee eee 5 19 This chapter explains the features and functions of the GOT A900 connected for use with the Q series PLC For further information on the features functions etc of the GOT A900 connected for use with the A QnA series PLC refer to the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT A900 Series catalog L NA 74108142 5 1 Q fl gt OPERATION PANEL GOT A900 Overview and Features E GOT A900 series small operation panel can be achieved independently of the number of display and operation points The GOT A900 graphic operation terminal is graphic The GOT A900 series has a high degree of affinity for each operation panel which has been achieved by a display device MELSEC PLC series and has realized fast communication provided with a touch screen instead of the conventional with other PLCs unachievable by ordinary display devices and pushbuttons select switches lamps and other controls a great variety of functions which are needed for maintenance Since display data switch operations etc are set by software From a wide selection of models choose the most adequate operation and display data can be changed added easily Also GOT A9
14. Indicates program run Main routine f program Pa Returns to step 0 when EEEE TTN i only one program is run END FEND END FEND f END processing Wait type program oe PSTOP POFF Initial execution type program Subroutine Program A subroutine program is run when it is called by CALL P and starts at a pointer P _ and ends at the RET instruction The number of steps can be reduced if a program executed several times during one scan or a program executed only when a condition holds is written as a subroutine program Create a subroutine program after any of the main routine programs such as initial execution scan wait and cyclic programs after FEND or create them together as wait programs Pointers used in subroutine programs are local and common pointers For use in a wait program the common pointers must be assigned When creating a subroutine in any of the initial execution scan wait cyclic and other programs assign the common or local pointers The subroutine program having local pointers described in any of the initial execution scan wait cyclic and other programs cannot be called from the other initial execution scan wait and cyclic programs 2 147 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Program A Memory card Built in RAM Main routine program Write File of program A FEND pH ce H c fre H Subroutine program pet _ l
15. ca tsissery OSIIN IHSIENSLIN 165 6 50 151 9 5 98 142 9 5 63 197 4 7 78 188 4 7 42 H as q alr 2 4 5 mounting hole 2 451 5 mounting hole E Connector terminal block convertor modules AGTB36 AGTB54 AGTBX70 2 4 5 mounting hole 2 4 5 mounting hole 2 4 5 mounting hole M4 x 25 M4 x 25 2 SHEE sh Sc fo fe LB of Ty 2 N ko A 2 S Q 8 3 fa SIS re ors fo BEES sk 3 1s re i o Q l Q a 17 3 0 68 44 1 73 S GL 78 5 3 09 os x 17 3 0 68 44 1 73 a BS 78 5 3 09 8 ey 2 alo 2 136 MODEL SELECTION External Dimensions E Terminal block convertor modules FA TB161 162AC FA TB161ACC1 2 TB162ACC 90 3 55 148 5 83 32 1 26 6020 7 80 3 15 5 9 20 6020 138 5 44 mu Chas Mosi o 0 63 i 6 0 63 50 3
16. ii B or more 30mm 1 18inch or more 30mm 1 18inch or more Duct Height 50mm 1 97inch max i 30mm 1 18inch or more Series mounting 30mm 1 18inch or more Panel etc Door Contactor relay etc 7 100mm 3 94inch or more PLC front clearance from equipment Vertical mounting Not allowed Horizontal mounting Not allowed Loading and Installation Wiring E Wiring instructions This section gives the instructions for wiring the power supply and I O cables Power supply wiring 1 Wire the PLC power supply I O equipment and other equipment in separate lines as shown below Connect an insulating transformer if there is noise Main PLC k Insulating power power transformer K z supply supply 200vac lt gt eR E P 1 1 VO power ae supply s p O devices Mai circull supply AERA A Main circuit devices 2 The 100VAC 200VAC and 24VDC cables should be twisted as tightly as possible in the shortest possible length Use the largest possible gauge max 2mm to minimize any voltage drop 3 As a measure against surges due to lightning use a surge absorber as shown below PLC I O equipment es Surge absorber for E lightening prote
17. 155 6 11 OQOOOOOOOOOOO fe 52 2 05 J 17 3 0 68 44 1 73 5S 78 5 3 09 2 4 5 mounting hole M4 x 25 M4 x 25 00099900808 1 89 48 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Software To create the sequence programs for the A mode CPU you can continue to use the GPP function software package hereafter referred to as GPP and programming unit hereafter referred to as the PU which could be used with the AnS conventionally GPP permits sequence programming in ladder list and SFC sequential function chart languages entry of comments to the I O CPU module internal relays registers and others network parameter setting sequence program operating status monitoring network operating status monitoring forced data changes I O signal ON OFF and others The PU allows sequence programming in list sequence program operating status monitoring forced data changes I O signal ON OFF and others They can execute the functions which could be performed with the conventional AnS series E Usable GPP and CPU types The following table lists the usable software and the CPU types selected for use GPP Function Software Peripheral Device CPU Type Package A6PHP SW3 GPPAEE A3H SW4GP GPPAEE A38A SW5GP GPPAEE A38A A6GPP SW3 GPPA
18. Chassis Note 2 Do not make connection to PLC side pin 4 Note 3 5V power supply is needed for use of portable peripheral device such as A8PUJ Current Capacity 0 4A or more Note 4 Operation of the RS 232 RS 422 conversion circuit manufactured by the user should be confirmed by the user Other Connection Systems When using SW5D5C GPPW you can use the following connection systems in addition to the RS 232 port connection of the CPU module A Mode PLC Side Communication Personal Computer Side Port System Module COM RS 232 A1SJ71UC24 R2 Note 5 A70BDE J71QLP23 GE A1SJ71LP21 A70BDE J71QBR13 GE A1SJ71BR11 A80BDE J61BT13 A1SJ61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 Note 5 RS 232 422 converter is needed Note that CC Link connections are made between AJ65BT G4 and A mode PLC Note 6 Connections via Ethernet cannot be made for the A mode PLC 3 27 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS Sequence Program Simulation Software The SW5D5C LLT E ladder logic test tool hereafter reffered to as LLT is software designed to add simulation functions to the MELSEC PLC programming function software package SW5D5C GPPW E GPP function software package for Windows hereafter referred to as GPPW This comprehensive software is compatible with the A series QnA series FX series and motion controller in addition to the Q series to allow GPPW created sequence programs to be simulated on a personal
19. Overview The A1SJ71PB96F is a Profibus FMS network interface module to connect MELSEC PLC to a Profibus FMS network Profibus FMS is used to connect various kinds of controllers such as PLC CNC robot controllers etc produced by different manufacturers The A1SJ71PB92D is a Profibus DP network interface module to connect various field sensors and actuators to a MELSEC PLC Because Profibus DP is an open network sensors and actuators of various manufacturers can be connected to the network Features WE System configuration j Main base Q30B A1SJ71PB92D of 871 PROF WE Network configuration software The following software is necessary to configure parameters in A1SJ71PB96F and A1SJ71PB92D MELSEC PROFIMAP Ver 2 0 or later Restrictions on use with Q mode The ranges of devices in the PLC available as Local Object Dictionary for A1SJ71PB96F are limited as indicated below Device Type Range x 0 7FF Y 0 7FF M L S 0 8191 B 0 FFF T 0 2047 0 2047 0 2047 0 2047 C 0 1023 0 1023 0 1023 0 1023 Extension base QA1S6 OB D 0 6143 Ww 0 FFF Profibus FMS F 0 2047 Profibus DP rn ees eee Remote O Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O A1SJ71PB96F and A1SJ71PB92D can be used with QA1S6_ B Performance Specifications Item A1SJ71PB96F A1SJ71PB92D Compatible network Profibus FMS Profibus DP Function Master Transmission speed a
20. O O simplex bus duplex loop 255 O x JO x Note 1 No Remarks Total of LY LB and LW Note 2 Check the details of the dedicated instructions in the relevant programming manual Note 1 Accessible to the PLC on the network located beyond seven relay gateway PLCs which connect two MELSECNET 10H MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet networks Note that the A mode does not have the Ethernet relay function Note 2 Some cables are not compatible with some CPU types Check details in the corresponding catalog Connection with the Existing Network System This section describes the compatibility of the Q mode PLC for additional connection to the existing MELSECNET network Note 1 The compatibility specifications of the A mode PLC with the existing network are different from those of the Q mode PLC The A mode PLC has the same network E Connecting the Q mode PLC to the existing MELSECNET 10 inter PLC network connectability as that of the AnS and can be connected to all networks to which the AnS can be connected 2 46 QnA Q2AS Existing MELSECNET 10 QnA Q2AS Q mode PLC p New 4 l l l l l l l l l l J MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 Modules required for Q mode PLC Modules required for relay PLC QJ71LP21 For optical SI QSI cable Module 1 existing module QJ71BR11 For coax
21. 24VDC 16 input points terminal block for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 32 input points connector sink 24VDC 32 input points connector for high speed input sink 24VDC 32 input points connector for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 64 input points connector sink 24VDC 64 input points connector for high speed input sink 24VDC 64 input points connector for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC dynamic 64 input points connector sink 5 12VDC 32 input points connector sink Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 16 16pt X 32 32pt X 32 32pt X 32 32pt X 64 64pt X 64 64pt X 64 64pt X 64 64pt X 32 32pt X Current Consumption A 5VDC 0 600 0 640 0 640 0 150 0 107 0 117 0 118 0 117 0 118 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 080 0 120 0 080 0 090 0 160 0 090 0 080 0 075 24VDC Symbol examples in Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation field X input Y output F special S vacant Remarks 3 5 MODEL SELECTION Product DC input module Contact output module Triac output module Transistor output module I O composite module DC input contact output High speed counter Type A1SX80 A1SX80 S1 A1SX80
22. 297 288 208 46 A960GOT 140 5 52 or more B 11 70 11 35 8 20 7 84 1 58 1 81 A950 951 953GOT 130 5 12 or more A960GOT 268 192 182 fas 49 30 15 12 or more 10 56 10 13 7 56 7 17 1 69 1 93 a 165mm 6 50inch or more AQSIGOT 164 5 155 5 136 123 51 57 for use of optical fiber cable in M3 6 48 6 13 6 36 4 85 __ 2 01 2 25 MELSECNET connection Unit mm inch Unit mm inch i B area dimension Panel cutting dimension To use the memory card or voice output device 100mm SS EEE 3 94inch or more space is needed in consideration of le A 1 0 0 gt Type A B f i a Pee cable pulling out or memory card loading unloading A985GOT 302 228 i Panel opening 11 90 8 98 50mm 1 97inch or more when they are not used A97 GOT 289 200 C area dimension B 11 39 7 88 To ensure good ventilation provide 80mm 3 15inch or A960GOT 258 183 more distance from structure or other devices at top of Values in are tolerances 10 17 7 21 the unit in mm unit AQ5_IGOT 156 123 5 Darsa dimension M3 6 15 4 87 When a device which generates radiated noise etc Unit mm inch such as a contactor and or a device which generates heat is placed around the GOT leave a 100mm 3 94inch or more clearance at the back and Q zA gt 50mm 1 97inch or more clearances on the right and left hand sides to
23. 5 to 95 RH non condensing Note 4 Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z No corrosive gases Specifications Under intermittent vibration Frequency 10 to 57Hz 57 to 150Hz Acceleration 9 8m s Under continuous vibration Frequency 10 to 57Hz 57 to 150Hz 2000m 6557 38ft max Note 3 Inside control panel ll or less 2 or less Acceleration 4 9m s Amplitude Amplitude 0 035mm 0 001inch Sweep count 10 times each in X Y Z directions for 80 min Note 1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V Note 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution level 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Note 3 The PLC cannot be used under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Doing so may cause a failure Note 4 When used with the AnS series modules the Q series PLC should be operated within 10 t
24. Appearance A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 1290000000000000000 GBOGGBG0000000000 1I0990000000000900000 0000000000000000 20000000000000000 fq 299000000000000000 Gi g Model list A6CON3 Pressure A6CON1 A6CON2 displacement Soldering type Crimp contact type type Positive common sink type input module sink type output module Connector type Applicable module Applicable wire size AWG 28 AWG 30 2 130 e Crimp contact tool for AGCON2 FCN 363T T005 H e Pressure displacement tool for AGCON3 FCN 367T T012 H locator plate FCN 707T T001 H cable cutter FCN 707T T101 H hand press e Contact for crimp contact and pressure displacement tools A6CON3E Pressure A6CON2E displacement Soldering type Crimp contact type type Negative common source type input module source type output module e Crimp contact tool for AGCON2E Connector type Applicable module Applicable wire size AWG 28 AWG 30 e Pressure displacement tool for A6CON3E 91257 1 die set 91220 1 cable cutter 91085 2 hand mini press e Contact for crimp contact and pressure displacement tools MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors Connector Terminal Block Convertor Modules Cables Overview The connector terminal block converter module is designed to
25. Data display in tabulated form function Regards data stored consecutively in word devices as a character code ASCII code shift JIS code and shows a character string Clock display function Shows clock data of PLC CPU Comment display bit function Shows comment associated with ON OFF of bit device Comment display word function Shows comment associated with value of word device ASCII display function Comment display function Shows as history data the ON states of specified bit devices and the Alarm history display function occurrence times comments and others when word device value condition Message display holds function e System alarm function Checks for GOT PLC CPU MELSECNET communication error at intervals of 3 seconds and shows error code and error message at occurrence of Alarm list display function error e User alarm function Associates multiple bit devices with comments and shows ON bit devices in order of specified priority e Part display bit function Shows part associated with ON OFF of bit device e Part display word function Shows part associated with value of word device saad Sa toton denang Shows in motion or in path the part figure associated with bit device ON OFF Moving image pay or word device value in the specified moving method display function e Lamp display bit function Lights extinguishes lamp according to ON OFF of bit device e Lamp display word function Changes lamp li
26. E called an initial step Its operation is the same as that of a step Dummy zn As the name indicates this step is a step dummy and does not include a ladder program Block start Starts another block and waits for the step started block to reach its end step With end oa check Block start Starts another block Transits to the step ns next step when the transition condition Without Ed holds independently of whether the end check started block has reached its end step or not Name Symbol Function Optional functions Coil holding Providing the SC option transits execution to the next step with a coil described in the OUT instruction being kept ON Operation Providing the SE option holds the holding current step active to continue program Without processing if the transition condition transition check holds and the next step is activated Note that if the transition condition holds again the next step is not activated again Operation Providing the ST option holds the holding current step active to continue program With processing if the transition condition transition holds and the next step is activated check Note that if the transition condition holds again the next step is activated again Providing the R step allows the coil held by the SC option to be reset or the step kept activated by the SE or ST option to be deactivated in addition to the operation in
27. FA CBL20TD Dedicated cable 2m 6 56ft FA CBL25TD Dedicated cable 2 5m 8 20ft FA CBL30TD Dedicated cable 3m 9 84ft Connection diagrams 1 16 point 1 common module FA TB161AC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CONt B 1 B 5 A7 9 Lott _0 13 _0 19 o 17 Connector A rtf ono i oaa ouj O16 o 3 side l 1 Max current l o 6 l 6 6 TB1 0 2446648 GAACHE CO 3 5 7 9 B D F cove Terminal block side FA TB161ACC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 c t a onnector con 2 P 5 0 cra Al A ig side TB1 041 Terminal block RCS GOR COW COMICON COMICON COM COM COR COMCORCOMGEMcoMIcEM SIDE 2 16 point 2 common module FA TB161ACC2 3 4 5 6 F Connector s CON1 ide Max current OLTOTOTOTOFOFTOLOTOFIOFLOLOFTOFLOLOIO TB1 041424344454647 48 49 AA AB ACAD AE AF E O 0 070 07O 0 O OO O 0 OO 0 O id coNacomacoMacoMacOMacOMacoMacoMasoMacomzsomzcoMscoMacomzcomecom2 SIAE FA TB162AC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CE RRS Coe ee eee Max current 8mA 5464 Terminal block 8 A E COM2 sjde TB1 Connector side CON1 TB1 coMacoMacoMacoMscoMacoMacoMacoMacoMacoMcoMacoMacoMacoMacoMacoacoM2 S 2 134 MODEL S
28. iscan RUN OFF Stop status contact CHG instruction OFF Not during stop ON During stop OFF Enabled ON Disabled execution disable STEP RUN flag OFF Not during step run ON During step run Instruction error OFF No error flag ON Error 1 Derived from the constant scan setting 3 29 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS 11 For the A mode CPU function the following special registers are supported by LLT Number Name Description D9008 Self diagnostic Self diagnostic error number error D9009 F number at which external detection failure occurred D9010 Step number at which operation error occurred D9011 Step number at which operation error occurred D9015 CPU operating status status D9016 Sequence program being run is number stored in BIN value D9017 Minimum scan time Note 2 10ms increments D9018 Scan time Note 2 10ms increments D9019 Maximum scan time Note 2 time 10ms increments D9020 Constant scan time Note 3 user set in 10ms increments D9021 Scan time 1ms increments Note 2 D9022 Count value in 1s increments Note 2 D9025 Clock data year month D9026 Clock data day hour D9027 Clock data minute second D9028 Clock data day of week D9035 Extended file Used block number register D9036 For specifying Device number used to directly extended file access each device of extended D9037 register device file register number
29. zIi lt lx File register R RO to R32767 Link relay B BO to B1FFF Link register WO to W1FFF WO to W1FFF Special link relay Ci Soto SB7FF gt CSCCdSSBOtO SBF Special link register Cid SWoto Sw CCCs SW to SW7FF Step relay S0 to 8191 Special relay SM M Mg000 to M9255 SMO to SM2047 Mg000 to M9255 SMO to SM2047 Special register SD D D9000 to D9255 SDO to SD2047 D9000 to D9255 SDO to SD2047 Note 1 The above table lists accessible device ranges of each series Access cannot be made to the device ranges not supported by the CPU Confirm the device ranges of the individual CPUs in the corresponding catalogs Note 2 There may be restrictions on the accessible device ranges depending on the combination of communication interface and CPU Example Accessible device ranges are restricted when the QnACPU and A series Ethernet module are used together Accessories Description Manuals CSKP Operating Manual CSKP Programming Manual Describes how to use each utility how to make communication setting and other information Shows how to use the library SOFTWARE PACKAGES EXCEL Communication Support Tool SW3D5F OLEX E SW3D5F OLEX E Excel Communication Support Tool The SW3D5F OLEX E Excel communication support tool is software used by adding it in Microsoft Corporation s spreadsheet software Excel You can read PC data into Excel and write data from Excel to the PLC without worrying abo
30. 0 analog to digital conversion enable 1 analog to digital conversion disable Defaults to analog to digital conversion enable of all channels Defaults to sampling CHL average time average count For count based averaging set within the range 4 to Rte resets tate a Ne eth atet eed ee 1 3 bi 1 10 9 1 62500 times EEEN H BEERE EET For time based averaging set within the range 2 to 5000ms Conversion completion flag 1 analog to digital conversion completion 0 analog to digital conversion incompletion Offset gain setting mode designation Specify the channels where offset gain selection will be set by the user CHL digital output value CH_ maximum value CH_ minimum value 16 bit signed binary values are stored b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH Address 22 Setting range check e R a i Area used to check the setting ranges set from GPPW Specify the channels to which offset setting is made b15 b14 bi3 b12 bii bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Soa CH CH CH CH cH jcn CH cH Ble Per Blas lea U3 Address 23 OH 4 20mA 1H 0 20mA 2H 1 5V 3H O 5V 4H 10 10V 5H 0 10V Fu user setting range Specify the channels to which gain setting is made 2 102 MODEL SELECTION p 7 INTELLIGENT Utility Package for Analog to Digital Conversion FUNCTION MODULES Module
31. 12 24VDC 0 5A 1 wire type transistor output OFF time leakage current 0 1mA terminal block type 32 points 12 24VDC 0 5A 1 wire type transistor output OFF time leakage current 0 1mA AJ65SBTB1 32T1 terminal block type AJ65SBTB1 8TE 8 points 12 24VDC 0 1A 1 wire type transistor output Source terminal block type AJ65SBTB1 16TE 16 points 12 24VDC 0 1A 1 wire type transistor output source terminal block type AJ65SBTB2 8A 8 points 2 wire type 100VAC input terminal block type AJ65SBTB2 16A16 points 2 wire type 100VAC input terminal block type AJ65SBTB2 8R 8 points 24VDC 100 to 240VAC 2 wire type relay output terminal block type AJ65SBTB2 16R_ 16 points 24VDC 100 to 240VAC 2 wire type relay output terminal block type 16 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms AJ65SBTB1 32DT 16 points 24VDC 0 5A 1 wire type transistor output terminal block type 16 input points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms plug optional 16 output points 24VDC 0 1A transistor output 1 wire type one touch connector type 16 input points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 0 2ms plug optional 16 output points 24VDC 0 1A transistor output 1 wire type one touch connector type 8 input points 24VDC 5mA 2 3 4 wire type response time 1 5ms for 8 sensors plug AJ65SBTC4 16DT optional 8 output points 24VDC 0 1A transistor output 1 2 3 wire type one touch connector type 16 points
32. 13 2m 43 28ft 3 21 MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Batteries Connectors Batteries Q6BAT E Overview The Q6BAT battery is loaded into a CPU module and used to back up the built in RAM memory of the CPU module during power failure The Q2MEM BAT battery is used to back up the Q2MEM 1MBS memory card at a power failure E Appearance Q6BAT Q2MEM BAT E Specifications Type Q6BAT Q2MEM BAT Nominal voltage 3VDC 3VDC Battery type Manganese dioxide Graphite fluoride lithium battery lithium battery Current capacity 1800mAh 48mAh Storage life normal 10 years 4 years temp Applicable model Q02 Q02H Q2MEM 1MBS QO6HCPU A E Connectors AGCON The A6CON is an external wiring connector for connector type I O module These connectors are classified into six different types according to the soldering crimp contact and pressure displacement types and I O module types E Appearance A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 9 33 88 199 83 39 99 99 83 o 9 9 99 83 23 1090000000000000000 1290000000000000000 pH 20000000000000000 Cree B000000600000000 g A6CON1E A6CON2E A6CON3E A6CON3 Pressure A6CON1 A6CON2 displacement Soldering type Crimp contact type type Positive common sink type input module sink type output module e Crimp contact tool for AGCON2 Connector type V O module type Applicable wire size
33. 300m Be 3278 69feet 1639 34feet 500kbps When using QSI cable between 500m between between 400m 131 48feet 1km 3278 69feet stations between stations stations 1Mbps between stations stations 200m 655 74feet Weight g Ib 350 0 77 290 0 64 300 0 66 300 0 66 Performance specifications of CC Link communication modules Item A8GT J61BT13 A8GT J61BT15 CC Link station type Intelligent device station Remote device station Communication speed 156k 625k 2 5M 5M 10Mbps Depends on transmission speed Independently of transmission speed setting at least 2m 6 56feet is required as inter station cable length between master local station and preceding or subsequent station Overall distance At transmission speed of 5Mbps or 10Mbps note that max transmission distance differs according to inter station cable length between remote O remote device stations 156kbps 1200m 3934 43feet 625kbps 600m 1967 21 feet 2 5Mbps 200m 655 74feet SMbps 110m to 150m 360 66 to 491 80feet 10Mbps 50m to 100m 163 93 to 327 87feet Max number of modules connected Weight g Ib 210 0 46 200 0 44 26 when 1 station is occupied 32 when 2 stations are occupied 5 16 FUNCTION LIST Function List E Function list Function Outline Numeric display function Shows values stored in PLC devices tak Collects states of multiple word devices at given intervals and shows values Data list display function
34. 5 12 24 48VDC 2A 8 output points 16 16pt Y 0 11 e No independent common terminal block 5 12VDC 32 output points 16mA 32 32pt Y eee No connector with fuse 12 24VDC 0 8A 16 output points 16 16pt Y No terminal block with fuse source 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 output points 32 32pt Y No connector with fuse source 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 output points 32 32pt Y No connector with short circuit protection 12 24VDC 64 output points connector 64 64pt Y No source I O composite module A1SH42 12 24VDC 32 input points transistor 32 32pt Y No oie 0 1A 32 output points 0 1A 32 output points eee 8 output points terminal block eee i output points terminal block High speed counter 035 Yes 014 Yes Differential input sink output type 32 32pt F KARA Yes preset DC input A1SD62D S1 Differential input sink output type 32 32pt F 0 25 FE Yes pee preset differential input 014 Yes Analog to digital converter 040 No module 040 No Digital to analog converter ogo No module 32 32ptF 065 No 32 82ptF 0o85 No MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List E When using QA1S6 _ B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to the next section System Configuration Number of Points Current Product Type Description Occupied Consumption Restrictions A VO Allocation Temperature digital A1S62RD3 Pt100 3
35. A tE o l 9 oJ i Ti fo f r ma f an A a A n a e fn G o oc 9 oc E Instructions for system configuration 1 The total number of I O special function and network modules that may be loaded into the main and extension bases is up to 64 2 Up to 7 extension bases may be connected Up to 8 bases including the main 3 The overall distance of extension cables is within 13 2m 43 28ft 4 Modules having restrictions on the number of modules loaded Module Modules Loaded MELSECNET 10 network module Up to 4 Up to a total of A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 MELSECNET II B data link Up to 2 module A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B Interrupt module A1S161 1 AnS series special function Up to a total of 6 module Note 1 JEMA network JPCN 1 master JEMA network JPCN 1 master Note 1 In the AnS series the following modules have restrictions on the number of modules loaded The other modules have no restrictions on the number of modules loaded AnS modules having restrictions on the number of modules loaded Product Type Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71 B2 B5 S3 Computer link module A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF CC Link module in intelligent A1SJ61BT11 mode Intelligent communication module A1SD51S A1SJ71ID1 R4 A1SJ71ID2 R4 A1SJ71PB96F A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 A1SJ71J92 S3 ID interface module Profibus module Modbus modu
36. A7GT J71AT23B MELSECNET B twisted pair bus CC Link connection A8GT J61BT13_ CC Link intelligent device station twisted pair module A8GT J61BT15 CC Link remote device station twisted pair Backlight AQGT 80LTT A985GOT TFT color LCD display section replacement backlight 1 pc AQGT 7OLTT A975 975GOT TFT color LCD display replacement backlight 1 pc A9GT 70LTT B_ A975 975GOT B TFT color LCD display replacement backlight 1 pc AQGT 70LTS A975 975GOT STN color LCD display replacement backlight 2 piece set AQGT 50LT A950OGOT STN color monochrome LCD display replacement backlight Extension memory A9GT FNB For optional OS board A9GT FNB1M _ For optional OS extension memory 1MB A9GT FNB2M _ For optional OS extension memory 2MB A9GT FNB4M _ For optional OS extension memory 4MB A9GT QFNB For optional OS for MELSEC QnA A FX ladder monitoring A9GT QFNB4M For optional OS extension memory 4MB for MELSEC QnA A FX ladder monitoring Protective sheet A9YGT 80PSC Protective sheet for A985GOT without logo 5 piece set Any of these needed A9GT 80PSCL _ Protective sheet for A985GOT logo removable 5 piece set A9GT 70PSC Protective sheet for A975 970GOT without logo 5 piece set A9GT 70PSCL _ Protective sheet for A975 970GOT logo removable 5 piece set A9YGT 60PSC Protective sheet for A960GOT without logo 5 piece set A9GT 60PSCL_ Protective sheet for A960GOT logo removable 5 piece set A9GT 50PSC Protective sheet for A950GO
37. ASCII BIN conversion designation other settings and status monitoring On demand transmission data storage first address and data length user registered frame number designation for on demand message waiting time Number of receiving end data receiving end code receiving user registered other settings and status monitoring frame use yes no designation receiving user registered frame number sending user registered frame number CR LF output designation output first pointer designation output quantity designation No protocol communications when No protocol communications are used reer Performs necessary condition and Bidirectional ae other settings and status monitoring protocol communications when bidirectional protocol communications are used Supervises PLC CPU periodically Data enable disable designation for simultaneous transmission Cyclic time unit selection cyclic time supervising function designation sending means designation cyclic transmission pointer output quantity connecting data number designation registered word block quantity designation registered bit block quantity designation abnormality supervising PLC CPU and monitors status of function supervisory notifies external system by function message when given condition Performs condition settings and Modem status monitoring necessary to make communications with remote equipment using modems holds designation superv
38. Automatic leap year judgment Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 12 sec day at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25 TYP 1 90 sec day at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53 TYP 3 67 sec day at 55 C 5VDC internal current consumption A 0 69 mee Weight kg Ib 0 20 0 44 External dimensions mm inch 98 3 86 x 27 4 1 08 x 90 3 55 MODEL SELECTION CPU CPU Modules QO02CPU A QOD2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Battery The battery built in the CPU module is used to back up the programs and various data stored in the RAM memory of the CPU module during a power failure and to back up the clock element continuously during a power failure The battery is not used while 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module The battery life depends on the total power failure time when 5VDC is not supplied from the power supply module Note that the SRAM card contains a battery in itself and is independent of the consumption of the battery Battery life Total Power Failure Time Hours Backup Time CPU Type Guaranteed value after Battery Actual value Error ON Hours QO02CPU A 5433 13120 120 QO2HCPU A 2341 6435 120 QO6HCPU A Note 1 If the total power failure time is less than the above value the battery must be changed every 10 years as a guideline Manuals The following manuals are related to the A mode CPU Name Remarks QCPU A A Mode User s Manual Packed with QA1S3 __ B Hardwar
39. COMRD No operation DATEWR P No operation WDT P No operation In addition to the above the following instructions are not operated 1 PID control instructions 2 Special function module dedicated instructions 3 CC Link dedicated instructions 4 PERSONAL COMPUTER RELATED PRODUCTS CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW QVODWVIOW eekan eie aa aie i a ianea 4 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e System Required for Use of Personal Computer Related Products sees 4 3 3 SOFTWARE PACKAGES Basic Communication Support Tool SWSD5F GSKP E estes a r es 4 4 EXCEL Communication Support Tool PSWSD5F OLEXCE ccc hee heteiiiecnheiseieeRlaes 4 9 e Monitoring Tool SW3D5F XMOP E ceee 4 12 Graphic Data Package SWOD5G PIG B 2 2 acicetianin neni 4 15 4 NETWORK BOARDS e MELSECNET 10 Boards A7OBDE J71QLP23 A70BDE J71QLP23GE A70BDE J71QBR13 4 17 e CC Link Boards A80BDE J61BT11 A80BDE J61BT13 sada Tevtewav E E E ea tees 4 20 4 1 OVERVIEW Overview Overview In production locations there are increasing demands for using personal computers for production control quality control and energy control To meet these demands MELSEC offers a wide variety of methods for communication with PLCs for choice according to the facility scale and data volumes to be controlled and the software tools designed for ease of personal computer program creation This chapter provides personal computer
40. CPU USB port connection Serial communication RS 232 422 MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II MELSECNET B CC Link GOT A900 SW2D5C GOTRE PACK version C or later Allowed Allowed ladder monitor will be supported soon Allowed Allowed ladder monitor will be supported soon owed ladder monitor will be supported soon isallowed isallowed lowed ladder monitor will be supported soon A D D A A Mode QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Programs for the current AnS series Basically there are only functions that are usable with the AnS series though some specifications have been expanded in performance For expanded specifications refer to the Chapter for the A mode For AnS series A6SIM X64Y64 cannot be used For loading AnS series modules QA1S3 B QA1S6 _ B QC B A1S6 P Allowed isallowed g Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed without automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed with automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed Same as the networks compatible with AnS series SW2D5C F GPPW E or later Note 1 SW2IVD GPPA E or later Note 1 SW3GP GPPAEE or later Note 1 GOT A900 800 SW1D5C GOTRE PACK or later SWONIW A8GOTP or later Disallowed Allowed ladder monitor possible g isallowed lowed ladder monitor possible gt O lowed ladder monitor possib lowed ladder monitor possib lowed ladder monitor possible lowed ladder monitor p
41. Close project Save Save as praa Alar al aji B Cop E nl w E 2 7 ela lel l El Edit Data Change PLC type Import from GPPQ format file Expott file Macro Printer setup et Import from Melsec Medoc format file printout from Mels format file LA Sample e 2AA GPPW Sample SAALLT Sample 4 C My Documents hirano ad Start new GPPW session Exit GPPW Import from TEXT CSV format fie AStart MELSEC series GPP _ imi Device comment COMMENT Device Fa Display Device Comment Guard equip on Guard door shut Init seq ok Hydr motor run part A ready Host station 2 160 PROGRAMMING Peripheral Devices Overview The Q mode PLC is programmed on a Windows personal computer and connected to the CPU module via the COM port RS 232 or USB port of the personal computer The Q mode CPU module is equipped with an RS 232 interface operable at up to 115 2kbps and a USB interface operating at 12MBps Note The USB interface is not provided for the QO2CPU RS 232 Connection Connection configuration diagram The following diagram shows a configuration for connection with a personal computer by an RS 232 interface ocooo QO6HCPU n w P RS 232 Interface RS 232 cable QC30R2 E RS 232 cable Type Length Connector shape QC30R2 3m 9 84ft Pers
42. Diagnoses the CALL RET instruction loop Diagnoses the interrupt program construction Diagnoses the instruction data Diagnoses the SFC program running status Diagnoses the program running status Diagnoses the program running time The Q mode CPU allows the results of detection by the self diagnostic function with additional detection time data to be stored in memory as a failure history Failure confirmation can be made after restoration from error 2 19 MODEL SELECTION CPU Q Mode CPU Modules QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU E System protective functions The Q mode CPU has several protective functions system protections against program changes from the third party System protections have different means for different objects to be protected Protecting the whole CPU Use the CPU module DIP switches You can batch inhibit external write to all files This is the simplest way of protection However a third party can easily clear the protection Protecting the memory card Use the write protect switch of the memory card You can batch inhibit external write to all files This is also a simple way of protection However a third party can also easily clear the protection Protection on a file basis Register passwords file by file You can inhibit either or both external read and write from to the specified file Proper management of passwords achieves high protec
43. F 0 E Ranges accessible by MELSEC communication protocol of Ethernet module Request Source Access Range PLC of type on path up to target station 1 GPPW or CSKP Accessible to connected PLC only m III or IV The ranges accessible using the MELSEC communication protocol of the Ethernet module are given below Refer to the following table for the PLC types given in the description MELSECNET 10 Module Type CPU Type Ethernet Module Type T CC Link Module Type l Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H QJ71E71 QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 QJ61BT11 Q25H QJ71E71 B2 ll Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A AJ71QE71 AJ71QLP21 AJ61QBT11 Q2AS S1 Q2ASH S1 AJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QBR11 Ill A2U S1 A3U A4U AJ71E71 S3 AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 AJ61BT11 Q02 A Q02H A A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ61BT11 QO6H A A2AS S1 A2USH S1 Other than above A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A1SJ71BR11 If the combination of CPU module and communication module on a type basis is other than that shown in the above list the accessible range may differ from the one given The levels of the MELSEC communication protocol supported by the Ethernet modules are as listed below Ethernet Module Type QJ71E71 QU71E71 B2 AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 Protocol Level 2 31 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview Protocol level
44. In the MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET 10H network systems the network status can be diagnosed easily by GPPW If a fault occurs in the network a fast search for a faulty portion can be made for ease of troubleshooting Here are the following ways to diagnose 1 Network diagnosis own station information Checks the status of the network of the connected host station 2 Other station information Checks the status of the network of the other specified station 3 Network test Makes link start stop of the host station specified station or all stations 4 Setting confirmation test Checks the station number network number and group number set for each station 5 Station sequence confirmation test For optical loop system checks the station sequence of forward reverse loop on the network 6 Loop test Checks the loop status of the optical loop system 7 Communications test Checks whether communications can be made between the host station and specified station E MELSECNET 10H mode system When a network is made up of the Q mode PLCs only choose the MELSECNET 10H mode It can achieve fast large capacity communication compared to MELSECNET 10 mode When using the QCPU A mode you cannot use the MELSECNET 10H modules Use the AnS series MELSECNET 10 modules Optical or coaxial cables are used in the MELSECNET 10 network system 2 44 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 App
45. Inter station cable Max nication length ae sation length overal 156kbps 30cm im 200m 156kbps 30cm im 1200m 11 82 39 4 3934 43 11 82 39 4 3934 43 inch or inch or ft inch or inch or ft 625kbps more more 600m 625kbps more more 600m 1967 21 1967 21 ft ft 2 5Mbps 200m 2 5Mbps 200m 655 74 655 74 ft ft 5Mbps 30cm 10m 5Mbps 30cm 110m o 11 82 360 66 11 82 360 66 5 inch to ft inch to ft 59cm 59cm 2 23 25 23 25 8 inch gt inch gt 2 60cm 50m 60cm 150m c 23 64 491 8ft 23 64 491 8ft O inch or inch or 8 more more i 3 5 O 10Mbps 30cm 50m 10Mbps 70cm 50m 11 82 163 93 27 58 163 93 inch to ft inch to ft 59cm 99cm 23 25 39 01 inch gt inch gt 60cm 80m im 80m 23 64 262 3ft 39 4 262 3ft inch to inch or 99cm more 39 01 inch gt 1m 100m 39 4 327 87 inch or ft more If wiring is run at even one location within this range of the inter station cable length between remote I O or remote device station and remote I O or remote device station the max overall cable length is as indicated above Connection cable CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Number of I O points occupied 32 points I O assignment 32 intelligent points Internal current consumption 5VDC A 0 46 f External dimensions mm inch 27 4 1 08 W x 98 3 86 H x 90 3 55 D Weight kg lb 0 12 0 26 Note 1 CC Link dedicated cables and CC Link de
46. K5 20 points 0 to 1048575 K6 24 points 0 to 167772165 K7 28 points 0 to 268435455 K8 32 points 2147483648 to 2147483647 Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points Note 3 For 32 bit data a real number uses two consecutive registers Note 4 A character string is stored in multiple consecutive registers and NULL 00 is used as a code to indicate the end of the character string There are no restrictions on the number of characters handled Note that the character string that may be handled as a constant in a program is up to 32 characters long Note 5 Numerical values cannot be handled in an unsigned format example 0 to 65535 numerical range for word represented by designating them in 4 bit increments 2 16 MODEL SELECTION Q Mode CPU Modules CPU QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU E Timers timing performance capabilities The internal timers of the Q mode CPU modules are all on delay timers and available in four types low speed timer high speed timer low speed retentive timer and high speed retentive timer The timing increments and timing errors of the timers are indicated below Timing Increments Timing Error Low speed timer Variable between 1 1 scan time Low speed retentive and 1000ms timer High speed timer Variable between 0 1 1 scan time High speed retentive and 100ms timer Note that the timing range is up to the preset timing increments x 32767 Timi
47. Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms increments default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms increments default 10ms Counter C points Normal counters Default 1024 CO to 1023 Interrupt counters Max 256 Default 0 points parameter setting Continued on next page 2 21 MODEL SELECTION CPU Q Mode CPU Modules Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Continued from preceding page Item aozcpu ao2zHcpu QosHcPU Q25HCPU Number Default 12288 DO to 12287 ce Link register W points Default 8192 W0 to 1FFF Annunciator F points Default 2048 FO to 2047 Edge relay V points Default 2048 VO to 2047 File register R points 517 120 points ZRO to 517 119 or RO to 32767 block switch over Refer to Memory on the following pages for the maximum number of file register points Special link relay SB points 2048 SBO to 7FF Special link register SW points 2048 SWO to 7FF Step relay S points 8192 SO to 8191 Index register Z points 16 ZO to 15 Pointer P points 4096 PO to 4095 set in parameters the range in which the pointers common pointers are used Interrupt pointer I points 256 I0 to 255 In parameters set the cyclic intervals of the system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 5 to 1000ms 5ms increments Special relay SM points 2048 SMO to 2047 Special register SD points 2048 SDO to
48. Personal computer interface board Digital I O Display operation terminal Analog I O Solenoid valve various sensors converter Temperature input ID Conveyor drive robot etc FREQROL inverter MELSERVO AC servo Personal computer PCI bus board MELSEC PLC GOT display etc High speed counter etc Note 1 Usable in MELSECNET 10 mode Unusable in MELSECNET 10H mode Driver of version SW3DNF MNET10 or later is required 2 35 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Ethernet QJ71E71 QU71E71 B2 Overview The Ethernet interface module hereafter referred to as the QJ71E71 is used on the PLC side to connect a host system e g personal computer or work station and Q mode PLC via Ethernet 10BASE5 10BASE2 10BASE T to collect change PLC data monitor CPU module operation control the status and transfer any data by TCP IP or UDP IP communication Currently Ethernet is the most widespread network for connection of information processors such as personal computers and work stations By using an Ethernet interface with the PLC production related management information can be transmitted rapidly to personal computers or work stations Features E 10BASE5 10BASE2 10BASE T You can choose from three different network types of 10BASE5 10BASE2 and 10BASE T E Communications with personal computer For access from a personal computer to the PLC CPU there is a communications function Note 1 using the MELSEC communication p
49. The A mode CPU module is equipped with an RS 232 interface The following diagram shows a configuration for connection with a personal computer by an RS 232 interface Peripheral Device Connection Method Precaution Windows personal computer DOS personal computer Since the personal computer side connector of the QC30R2 is 9 pin D sub a conversion connector is needed for the personal computer whose COM port is different in shape Using SW5D5C GPPW E permits communications at communication speed of max 115 2kbps NdOH900 RS 232 interface RS 232 cable QC30R2 A6GPP As the interfaces to these peripheral devices are A6PHP 5s RS 422 the RS 232 RS 422 conversion cable is A6HGP gE needed for connection to the A mode CPU module A7PU A7PUS RS 232 RS 422 Cor conversion cable AC30R4 Mi see a MARMARA LLTO Note 1 In the A mode the USB port cannot be used 3 26 PROGRAMMING Peripheral Devices E RS 232 cable Type Length Connector shape QC30R2 3m 9 84ft Personal computer side 9 pin D Sub PLC side 6 pin Mini DIN E RS 232 cable connection example For connection of Windows and DOS V personal computer Personal PLC side computer pin number pin number 1 CD 2 SD 2 RD 3 SG 3 SD Reserved 4 ER DR 5 SG ER 6 DR 7 RS 8 CS 9 RI Note Do not make connection to the PLC side pin number 4 H Instru
50. The max inter station distance changes with the twisted pair cable diameter used It is 50m 163 93ft for cables of not less than 0 2mm to less than 0 5mm and 100m 327 87ft for cables of not less than 0 5mm 2 67 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSEC I O LINK A1SJ51T64 Overview The MELSEC I O LINK is a simple wiring saving remote I O network that does not need network parameter setting and can be programmed as if you are using ordinary I O modules It can control 64 points of input or output up to 128 points when 8 or 16 point composite modules are used per network This network uses a multidrop bus wiring system and is flexible enough to permit T branching In addition it does not require termination resistors Features WE System configuration i Main base Q3OB a ae SJ51T64 Extension base QA1S6 0B 1 0 LINK Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O The A1SJ51T64 can be used with QA1S6_B E Connectable remote I O The I O which may be connected are all conventional remote I O modules that may be connected to the MELSEC I O LINK For full information on the usable modules refer to the MELSEC A small mid scale compatible types catalog W Twisted pair cable specifications Item Cable type Shielded twisted Specifications Cabtyre cable pair cable Wire diameter number of pairs 0 75mm x 1P 0 75mm x2C Conductor 29 Q
51. XMOP is a kind of control custom control OCX of Visual Basic and is operated in the same way as Visual Basic In addition a wide variety of commercially available graphic tools for Windows can be utilized to draw a monitor screen User friendly development environment is achieved by utilization of the tool you are accustomed to use Device data monitored User application ff of VN Program less Run XMOP offers 23 different custom controls which are needed to exercise Factory Automation equipment monitoring control e g graphic display numeric display level display and trend graph Without any specific expertise you can use them like the other standard controls to make communication with the PLC by merely pasting the necessary custom controls to a form and executing them Note that property page setting is required Communication with PLC Numeric block data display entry XMNUBLK OCX Trend graph display XMTREND OCX Open the property page and make setting 4 12 SOFTWARE PACKAGES Monitoring Tool SW3D5F XMOP E Expansion of Programmed Processing Since the drawing functions and custom controls have one for one correspondence monitor applications can be created without program For functions with which the custom control functions are not compatible programmed processing can be easily added later and mo
52. f setvalue Alarm sound output XMALARM OCX Provides an alarm sound on the basis of the set value Alarm summary display XMALMSMR OCX Shows an alarm summary Error XMERROR OCX Causes an error event Clock display XMCLOCK OCX Shows a clock on the screen Specifications Accessories E Operating environment Accessory Description Operating environment required to use SW3D5F XMOP E SW3D5F XMOP E Manual XMOP Operating Describes custom control functions of XMOP and how Item Description to set control properties OS Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Note 1 CPU Pentium 100MHz or more multiprocessor incompatible Display Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or more recommended 1024 x 768 pixels Required memory 32MB or more capacity Hard disk free space Disk drive needed for installation Corresponding container application Required application 40MB or more 3 5 inch 1 44MB floppy disk drive Visual Basic Ver 5 0 6 0 Visual Basic Ver 5 0 or 6 0 SW3D5F CSKP E Note 1 Service Pack 3 or higher is required for use of Windows NT Workstation 4 0 4 14 SOFTWARE PACKAGES Graphic Data Package SWOD5C PIC B Overview The SWOD5C PIC B graphic data package is a collection of graphic parts bitmap data which can be utilized for monitor screen development for Factory Automation They can be used in Visual Basic Excel and other software reducing the number of graphic p
53. modules are designed to increase an overall distance in the coaxial bus system of the MELSECNET 10 or MELSECNET 10H network system respective networks In the following example data link is made between 1 and 2 and between 3 and 4 when the A6BR10 becomes faulty Functions 1 One module can increase the distance by 500m 1639 34ft 6C 2V or 300m 983 61ft 3C 2V 500m 1639 34ft 5C 2V Max 300m 983 61 ft 3C 2V station HL JL all Q Bees pe h QJ71BR11 eas TT Sub control station R Termination resistor Max 500m 1639 34ft 5C 2V 300m 983 61ft 3C 2V 2 Up to four modules can be used in one network The overall distance can be increased to 2 5km 8196 72ft five networks 500m 1639 34ft Max 2 5km 8196 72ft 2 53 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H A6BR10 A6BR10 DC Performance Specifications Equipment Item A6BR10 A6BR10 DC Communication 1T0Mbps lt A6BR10 A6BR10 DC accessories gt speed D ae Number of modules Max 4 modules escription connected network Manual A6BR10 A6BR10 DC User s Manual Extension 300m 983 61 ft 83C 2V Connector distance unit Overall distance Number of stations 500m 1639 34ft 6C 2V 300m 983 61 ft x5 1 5km 4918 03ft 3C 2V 500m 1639 34ft x5 2 5km 8196 72ft 5C 2V Max 32 stations T type BNC connector 2 pcs lt Separately prepared product
54. needing to be aware of the network Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration unit 1 Target station 1 x j OIN INCREASED PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY OF FACILITIES The Q series has significantly improved CPU operation processing speeds e g achieved a scan time of 0 5ms in programs of approx 4k steps and 1ms in programs of approx 12k steps Note 2 Also with the addition of a cyclic execution program run system and a program start interrupt function from network intelligent function module the Q series has opened up possibilities for shortened machinery equipment tact time and increased machining accuracy soinyeo4 Operation Processing Speeds The Q series high speed type CPU has realized speeds as high as 34ns for basic instruction processing time of and a PC MIX value of 10 3 Note 3 It is about 5 times faster in performance than the conventional model AAUSHCPU S1 and about 2 7 times faster than the Q2ASHCPU In addition it has dramatically increased floating point operation speeds for PID and other arithmetic functions WE PC MIX values and LD instruction processing times E CPU operation processing speeds Hi Q2sHCPU ESS 10 3 E Q2ASHCPU E 3 8 Instruction Q02CPU Q12HCPU x A2USHCPU S1 O 2 0 Q25HCPU y E G 0 0 L LD LDXO0 79ns 34ns PC MIX value instructio
55. passive Receive m Procedure crist m No pais Send Te Noprocedwe m na m Receive m Procedure exist m No pairs S Confim 200010 99 25 170 3000 Fixed buffer Dest communication Board No 1000 MN Oe OY COMPUTERIZATION In the Q series Ethernet MELSECNET 10 H and CC Link are placed as open networks having performance capabilities and functions required for information network controller network and field network respectively to meet the needs requested for facility control and production control networks mless Communication The Q series Ethernet MELSECNET 10 H and CC Link allow communication in which the differences in network type and network hierarchy are not perceivable Data can be transferred from any PLC to any PLC and GPPW connected to the PLC can monitor the program of any PLC Note 1 Note 1 Accessible to a PLC on a network located beyond max 7 PLCs serving as gateways connected to two networks 5 CC Link MELSECNET 10H The Q series MELSECNET 10H module has a choice of two operation modes the MELSECNET 10H mode high in speed and large in capacity and the MELSECNET 10 mode which maintains compatibility with the conventional A QnA series Increased Communication Data Capacities Increased Data Communication Speed To respond to increasing infor
56. shift function Specified control station return mode selection Automatic return function Loopback function Station separation function Network duplexing Network diagnostics Outline Refreshes link relays and link registers assigned in network common parameters periodically to all stations in the same network Using this system to communicate data which does not require high speed communication reduces ordinary cyclic communication data volumes and increases speed Uses network instructions in sequence program to transfer data to from stations specified in instructions Several different instructions give choice of data transfer methods You can specify multiple stations on the same network as a certain group By specifying a group for data transmission in transient communication data can be broadcasted to specific stations only In duplex loop system data can be transmitted using each loop of duplex loop This enables faster communication than 10Mbps Prevents data from being transmitted 16 bits by 16 bits during 32 bit data transmission When adding PLC to existing network data transmission from that station is shut off and only data receiving is performed until its program debugging is completed Can cause some station to interrupt CPU module of another station to start sequence program When there are multiple networks some of data communicated cyclically in one network is automatically transferred to another netwo
57. 0 25 0 35 0 45 possible flexing of the printed circuit boards 0 51 0 55 0 77 0 99 Accessories 4 M4 x 14 base unit mounting screws Accessories Extension base unit The Q3 _ B main base unit is provided with Type Q63B Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU User s Manual Number of I O 3 Hardware modules loaded Applicable O O modules for Q DIN Rail Mounting Adaptors modules Mounting hole 5 pear shaped hole for M4 screw When mounting the Q3 _ B or Q6 _ B onto a DIN rail size j 3 Edere ike Bas on 185 the optional DIN rail mounting adaptor is needed dimensions 7 44 9 65 12 92 17 30 Applicable Base inch one 28 3 86 Q6DIN1 Q38B Q312B Q68B Q612B Weight kg Ib 0 23 0 25 0 35 0 45 0 51 0 55 0 77 0 99 Q6DIN2 Q35B Q65B Accessories 4 M4 x 14 base unit mounting screws Q6DIN3 Q33B Q63B Type QA1S65B QA1S68B T 738 Wiaber erie Note that the QA1S6 B can be mounted onto a DIN rail as it umber of I O 5 8 modules Is loaded Applicable 1 O O modules for AnS modules Mounting hole 6 pear shaped hole for M5 screw size External 315 12 41 W x 420 16 55 W x dimensions 130 5 12 H 130 5 12 H mm inch Weight kg Ib 0 75 1 65 1 0 2 2 Accessories 4 M5 x 25 base unit mounting screws 2 129 MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors Batteries E Overview The Q6BAT battery is loaded into a CPU module and used
58. 0 to 10V analog output 8 channels 4 20mA analog output 8 channels Pt100 3 wire type 2 channels Pt100 4 wire type 2 channels Thermocouple input 8 channels Analog input 2 channels analog output 1 channel Analog input 4 channels analog output 2 channels Thermocouple input transistor output 4 channels Thermocouple input transistor output 4 channels with heater wire breakage detection function Pt100 input transistor output 4 channels Pt100 input transistor output 4 channels with heater wire breakage detection function Thermocouple input transistor output heating cooling 2 channels Thermocouple input transistor output heating cooling 2 channels with heater wire breakage detection function Pt100 input transistor output heating cooling 2 channels Pt100 input transistor output heating cooling 2 channels with heater wire breakage detection function Pulse catch function 16 point input 8 timer points Interrupt input 16 points RS 232 1 channel RS 422 RS 485 1 channel Computer link printer function RS 232C 1 channel Analog output 1 axis Pulse train output 2 axes Pulse train output 2 axes manual pulse generator usable SSC network l1 axis _ 2 axes linear circular interpolation compatible 2 axes_ Absolute system incremental system speed position switching control 2 axes linear circular interpolation 2 axes Pulse train gutput 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulses 4 axes motion c
59. 1 and level 2 Request source Network 1 Personal Ethernet Computer Target station Request Source Type of relay Type of Access Range Personal computer PLC on path up to target station 10 Protocol level 3 Network 2 to 7 Request source Network 1 Personal Ethernet Computer Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Request Source x Access Range Type of relay station 1 Type of networks 2 to 8 Type of relay stations 2 to 7 Personal computer MELSECNET 10 I Hor Ill PLC on path up to target station Il or IV es Protocol level 3 is unusable Protocol level 4 Network 2 to 7 Request source Network 1 Personal Ethernet Computer Target station CC Link Ea Condition 4 Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Type of relay station Type of networks Type of relay Type of target Access Range 1 2to8 stations 2 to 7 station 1 l MELSECNET 10 1 Hor Il ee og l MELSECNET 10 I Hor Ill IL or Ill oN Request source Personal computer PLC on path up to target station 2 PLC on path up to target station 1 Protocol level 4 is unusable Network Overview MODEL SELECTION NETWORK E Ranges accessible by MELSEC communication protocol of serial communication module The ranges accessible using the MELSEC communication protocol of the serial communication module are given below Refer to the following table for the PLC types given in the
60. 10 A1SJ71UC24 PRF RS 232 1 channel 32 32pt F 0 10 A1SD70 Analog output 1 axis 48 first half 16pt S 0 30 A1SD71 S2 Pulse train output 2 axes latter half 32pt F 0 80 A1SD71 S7 Pulse output 2 axes manual pulse 0 80 generator usable A1SD75M1 SSC network compatible 1 axis 32 32pt F 0 70 A1SD75M2 SSC network compatible 2 axes A1SD75M3 SSC network compatible 3 axes A1SD75P1 S3 Pulse train output 1 axis 32 32pt F 0 70 A1SD75P2 S3 Pulse train output 2 axes A1SD75P3 S3 Pulse train output 3 axes A1SD774M 4 axes motion control module 32 32pt F 0 90 A1SJ71PT32 S3 Master module for optical twisted pair 32 48 0 35 cables 32 48pt F A1S71T32 S3 Master module for twisted pair cables only 0 30 A1SJ71AP21 For master local optical SI QSI cable 32 32pt F 0 33 A1SJ71AP21 S3 For master local optical GI cable 32 32pt F 0 33 A1SJ71AR21 For master and local coaxial cable 32 32pt F 0 33 A1SJ71AT21B For master local twisted pair cable 32 32pt F 0 66 A1SJ71LP21 SI QSI Optical Loop For 32 32pt F 0 65 Control Normal Master A1SJ71LP21GE GI62 5 Optical Loop For 32 32pt F 0 65 Control Normal Master A1SJ71BR11 Coaxial bus For Control Normal Master 32 32pt F 080 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3__ 10BASE2 32 32pt F 0 52 A18J71E71 B5 S3 10BASE5 32 32pt F 0 35 3 7 MODEL SELECTION Product CC Link module Intelligent communication Position detection module PLC simple monitoring module Me
61. 12 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms 16 points 12 24VDC 0 1A 1 wire type transistor output FCN connector type 8 input points 24VDC 5mA response time 1 5ms for 8 sensors 8 output points 12 24VDC 0 5A transistor output cap optional waterproof type Analog to digital AJ65BT 64AD 4 channel input analog input 10V to 10V 20mA to 20mA conversion module Digital output 2000 to 2000 0 to 4000 AJ65SBTB1 16T1 Small I O composite module AJ65SBTC1 32DT AJ65SBTC1 32DT1 AJ65SBTCF1 32DT AJ65SBTW4 16DT gt xe ne D Q O D 12 6 19 MODEL LIST CC Link Remote Devices Product Digital to analog conversion module High speed counter module Positioning Temperature input Temperature input RS 232C GPP connection ID module Plug for one touch connector 20 piece set Protective cover Dustproof cap Waterproof cap Type AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI AJ65BT D62 AJ65BT D62D AJ65BT D62D S1 AJ65BT D75P2 S3 AJ65BT 68TD AJ65BT 64RD3 AJ65BT 64RD4 AJ65BT R2 AJ65BT G4 AJ65BT D32ID2 A6CON P214 A6CON P220 A6CON P514 A6CON P520 A6CVR 8 A6CVR 16 A6CVR 32 A6CAP DC1 A6CAP WP1 Outline 4 channel voltage output digital input 2000 to 2000 Analog output 10V to 10V 4 channel current output digital input 2000 to 2000 Analog output 4mA to 20mA DC input preset DC input counting range 0 to 16777215 24 bit binary
62. 122 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Positioning Module Software SWOD5C QD75P E Overview SWOD5C QD75P E is a software package for QD75 positioning module which allows various parameters and positioning data to be set to the QD75 the control status of the QD75 to be monitored and the QD75 to be test operated Simple operation in Windows permits you to fully utilize a wide range of functions of the QD75 Features Windows compatibility ensures outstanding operability You can cut copy and paste positioning data and start block data efficiently You can also copy Microsoft Excel or Word created data for use as positioning data Ease of checking wiring connections In the software you can check the status of I O wiring connected to the QD75 You can also start the system efficiently by initializing the QD75 or performing jog operation Full line of functions assists debugging and maintenance The module has a full line up of functions e g function to perform offline simulation based on the preset positioning data and monitoring functions useful for debugging and maintenance such as sampling monitoring which shows the positioning module I O signals external I O signals and buffer memory status in the form of a timing chart lt Offline simulation example gt t Simulation Wave 1Axis Bel Posi aI Close 1Asisl pls Avis pls See Scaling avis x D Fivied ratio 2Asis x
63. 144k bytes Extended comment Extended file register Memory card RAM memory capacity max 304k bytes Note 1 Subprogram may be used by QO6HCPU A only File register Comment Extended file register use of subprogram Extended comment Extended file register File register Comment Extended file register Extended file register 3 16 CPU Built in Memories Memory Cards Memory Capacity Calculation Use the user memory after determining the stored data types and memory capacities by parameter setting Use the following table to calculate the memory capacities lt For Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A gt MODEL SELECTION MEMORY Item eens Capacity pene Monog Max Setting Capacity Bytes Parameter 3k 3k Total 144k Main program 1k 1k 1k steps Number of steps x 2 56k Total 1k bytes Set number of bytes 54k 60k program MELSECNET 10 parameter Note 1 16k Extended comment 1k bytes Set number of bytes 1k bytes 63k 64 points Extended file register built in 8k points Number of file register points x 2 128k File register 1k points Number of file register points x 2 16k Comment 1k bytes Set number of bytes 1k bytes 64k 64 points Extended file register memory card 8k points Number of file register points x 2 302k lt For QO6HCPU A gt Item pine Capacity ee Wisina Max Setting Capacity Bytes Parameter 3k 3k Total 144k Main program 1k 1k 1k steps N
64. 15 K o s Z a Ls N alfereza ee W aea C OOOO DO OOQOQDQOOHQOHHOOOO IN oa 8OOOOOOS Q QQQHQQQOQQOHOSDOOOQOO Til aeh a 6 S 29 5 1 16 losa 0 13 12 0 47 se 12 0 47 ES 41 5 1 64 E Extension base cable B10 A10 0 20 1 0 0 39 E Connectors A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 AGCON1E A6CON2E A6CON3E A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 72 72 2 87 14 0 55 or amp A6CON1E A6CON2E A6CONSE 20 3 0 80 96 5 3 80 2 137 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Programming Software SW5D5C GPPW E Q mode sequence programs use SW5D5C GPPW E GPP function software package for Windows hereafter referred to as GPPW GPPW permits sequence programming in ladder list and SFC sequential function chart languages entry of comments to the I O CPU module internal relays registers and others network parameter setting sequence program operating status monitoring network operating status monitoring forced data changes I O signal ON OFF and others Note 1 The product of the above type is allowed to be installed into a personal computer only once As there are also versions which allow 5 or 10 installations on different personal computers confirm their types in the m
65. 2048 points SMO to SM2047 Fixed Internal system device Function register FDO to FD4 Word device 7 A 5 Special register 2048 points SDO to SD2047 M 3 w ae i ata argument Index register Index register 16 points Z0 to Z15 0 to 1018K points File register Word device File register 0 points a a oe 1k point increments Nesting 15 points NO to N14 4096 points PO to P4095 Pointer Interrupt pointer 256 points 10 to 1255 1 SFC block 320 points BLO to BL319 Fixed Bit device 7 Cher SFC transition device 512 points TRO to TR511 Network No setting T sd it to 255 VO No setting I sf U0 to UF Decimal constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Hexadecimal constant HO to HFFFFFFFF Constant Real number constant E 1 17549 38 to E 3 40282 38 Note 1 The contacts and coils of the timers retentive timers and counters are bit devices and their current values are word devices Note 2 The inputs outputs step relays link special relays and link special registers cannot be changed from their default values 2 149 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs E Device explanations Inputs X Inputs are designed to give commands and data from external devices such as pushbuttons select switches limit switches and digital switches to the PLC Inputs are available as refresh inputs and direct access inputs 1 Refresh inputs Input signals batch imported from all input modules at the refresh of END processing These inputs ar
66. 20HC D 20HC E D 20HC RW D 232RW D 232IF D 20HC PS D 422CAB10 D 422CAB30 D 422CAB50 D 422CAB100 D 422CAB200 D 232CAB10 FX2N CNV IF 10m 32 79ft for reader writer D NS422RW D 422RWS extension 20m 65 57ft for reader writer D NS422RW D 422RWS extension 40m 131 15ft for reader writer D NS422RW D 422RWS extension 100m 327 87ft for reader writer D DNS422RW D 422RWS extension Plate type memory capacity 8k bytes compact Plate type memory capacity 8k bytes battery replacement Plate type memory capacity 8k bytes long distance Plate type memory capacity 320k bytes compact Card type memory capacity 320k bytes compact card For D 03CS screwing Long distance max communications distance 260mm 10 24inch Standard max communications distance 90mm 3 55inch Handy controller Japanese display Handy controller English display Reader writer for D 20HC Reader writer for RS 232 combination with SW1IVW AIDP and D 20HC or D422RW Power supply adapter for D232 interface 10m 32 79ft for reader writer D 422RW D 422RWL extension 30m 65 57ft for reader writer D 422RW D 422RWL extension 50m 131 15ft for reader writer D 422RW D 422RWL extension 100m 327 87ft for reader writer D 422RW D 422RWL extension 200m 655 74ft for reader writer D 422RW D 422RWL extension 10m 32 79ft for reader writer D 232RW extension Cable for FX 1DIF conversion cable for connection with FX2N A1FX Note 1 Please co
67. 32 point connector Crimp contact connection 32 point connector 31 pin D sub connector Flat cable pressure displacement 32 point connector 6 18 MODEL LIST CC Link Remote Devices Product Type Outline Input module AJ65BTB1 16D_ 16 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type terminal block type AJ65BTB2 16D 16 points 24VDC 7mA 2 wire type terminal block type AJ65BTC1 32D 32 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type connector type Output module AJ65BTB1 16T 16 points 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type terminal block type AJ65BTB2 16T 16 points 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 2 wire type terminal block type AJ65BTC1 32T 32 points 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type connector type AJ65BTB2 16DR_ 16 points 24VDC 240VAC 2A relay contact output 2 wire type terminal block type 8 input points 24VDC 7mA 8 output points 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type AJ65BTB1 16DT input pointe 7MA 8 output p 8 input points 24VDC 7mA 8 output points 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 2 wire type terminal block 8 input points 24VDC 7mA 8 output points 24VDC 240VAC 2A relay contact output 2 AOSB TA ODR Wiebe terminal eee Pae z d Small input module AJ65SBTB1 8D 8 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms terminal block type AJ65SBT1 16D 16 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms terminal block type AJ65SBTB1 16D1 16 points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 0 2ms ter
68. 5mA OFF 5V max 0 1mA max OFF gt ON 0 5ms max ON OFF ms max Coincidence 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 output Set value lt count value set value count value set value gt count value Number of points 2 points channel 2 points channel 2 points channel Output rating Transistor sink Transistor source Transistor sink 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common 12 24VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common Max Max voltage drop E 5V OFF gt ON _ 0 1ms max time ON gt OFF 7 1ms max 3ms max 0 1ms max rated load resistive load rated load resistive load rated load resistive load External External supply power power Voltage range 10 2 to 30V current consumption 8mA typ 24VDC External wiring protection Fuse protection Number of I O points occupied 16 points I O assignment 16 intelligent points 5VDC internal current consumption A 0 38 Weight kg Ib 0 12 0 26 External dimensions mm inch 27 4 1 08 W x 98 3 86 H x 90 3 55 D Note 1 Japan Texas Instruments make Am216LS31 or equivalent Note 2 EIA Standard RS 422 A differential line driver may also be used Separate list counting speeds Counting Speed Setting 10kPPS 100kPPS 200kPPS 500kPPS For 1 phase 10k max 10k to 100k 100k to 200k 200k to 500k input tH tL For 2 phase 10k max 10k to 100k 100k to 200k 200k to 500k input Minimum input pulse width t tH 150 1 us Minimum input phase
69. 640 x 400 640 x 480 800 x 600 246x184 5 11 19x7 27 211 x 158 8 31x6 23 2 2 eooo e ia Cold cathode backlight backlight OFF screen save time can be set 192 x 120 7 56x4 73 2 yellow orange black 1900 1200 1000 38 rows x 50 columns 30 rows x 40 columns 25 rows x 40 columns Minimum 16 x 16 per key 8 x 16 on bottom row only No Minimum 16 x 16 per key Flash ROM For storing monitor screen data for storing OS Built in 1M bytes user area max 9M bytes can be increased 1 slot for communication board loading 1 channel for communication module loading 1 channel for option module loading e g A9GT 70KBF 1 channel for PC card loading 1 slot for memory board loading 1 channel for personal computer connection bar code reader connection SVGA 1 channel for CRT connection 1 channel for parallel printer connection For external speaker connection stereo mini jack 1 channel each for right and left 2Vp p 0 4mW under rated load 10 2 playable voice file Windows WAV format 8000KHz 16 bit monaural 8 sec voice file Single tone sound length adjustable 30 000 initial brightness 70 operating ambient tempereture 25 C 50 000 operating ambient 41 000 operating ambient temperature 25 C temperature 25 C 40 000 10 000 Period when display brightness becomes 50 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Touch key 1 million times or more operating f
70. 74it 625Mbps 600m 1967 2 1ft 156Mbps 1200m 3934 43it E Cyclic communication system The CC Link cyclic communication system is shown below In CC Link the cyclic data areas of the master and local stations are assigned to respective remote I O remote device and intelligent device stations and remote I O and remote register data are refreshed automatically Also since information from the master station to the remote I O remote device and intelligent device stations are transmitted to other local stations the operating statuses of the remote stations can also be acquired by the local stations PLC CPU Remote I O Remote Device i station station i k Master station station 1 station 2 Local station station 3 Local station station 4 SET Yno H SET Yng FROM FRom FROM H FROM H Cyclic communication L To TO To FRoM H FROM H FROM H _J Dedicated cc L Instruction Dedicated ce Instruction Data link start by i EEPROM parameter Area for receiving data from remote I O station 1 Remote input RY Area for receiving data from remote I O station 1 Area for receiving data from remote device station 2 Area for receiving m local Area for receiving ata from local station 4 Remote output RY rea tor sen op data to remote I O station 1 Area for receiving data fr
71. A troubleshooting The following data can be monitored and CH1 Time number of times specifying Number of times X CH1 Average time average number of times setting 4 tested Setting range Time 2 to 5000 ms Number of times 4 to 62500 times CH2A D conversion enable disable setting Enable z Target CH2 Sampling process averaging process seting Samping Analog to digital Item Module ready Analog to digital conversion completion flag Analog to digital converted value of each channel Temperature drift compensation status flag Maximum minimum value of each channel Maximum minimum value reset request converted value Details Select input Error Error code _Moke tet fe_ __Endsetip ca Error occurrence flag Error clear request Operating Analog to digital conversion enable disable setting condition Sampling averaging setting Averaging condition Input range Input range setting status Offset gain setting 2 103 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Digital to Analog Conversion Modules Q62DA Q64DA Overview Digital data given by the CPU module are converted into analog signals and output to an external device With the CPU module processed data converted into analog data information can be sent to equipment which handles analog data e g an inverter Features Model selection according to applications 1 Q62DA 2 channels Voltage or current output can b
72. A1S68AD Analog input 8 channels 32 32pt F 0 40 A1S62DA Analog output 2 channels 32 32pt F 0 80 A1S68DAV 0 to 10V analog output 8 channels 32 32pt F 0 65 A1S68DAI 0 to 20mA analog output 8 channels 32 32pt F 0 85 A1S62RD3 Pt100 3 wire type input 2 channels 32 32pt F 0 54 A1S62RD4 Pt100 4 wire type input 2 channels 32 32pt F 0 44 A1S68TD Thermocouple input 8 channels 32 32pt F 0 32 A1S63ADA Analog input 2 channels analog output 1 32 32pt F 0 80 channel A1S66ADA Analog input 4 channels analog output 2 64 64pt F 0 16 channels A1S64TCTT S1 Thermocouple input 4 channels 32 32pt F 0 42 A1S64TCTTBW S1 Thermocouple input 4 channels with 32 32pt F 0 42 heater wire breakage detection function A1S64TCRT S1 Pt100 input 4 channels 32 32pt F 0 42 A1S64TCRTBW S1 Pt100 input 4 channels with heater wire 32 32pt F 0 42 breakage detection function A1S64TCTT S2 Thermocouple input 2 channels 32 32pt F 0 28 A1S64TCTTBW S2 Thermocouple input 2 channels with 32 32pt F 0 28 heater wire breakage detection function A1S64TCRT S2 Pt100 input 2 channels 32 32pt F 0 28 A1S64TCRTBW S2 Pt100 input 2 channels with heater wire 32 32pt F 0 28 breakage detection function A1SP60 Pulse catch input 16 16pt Y 0 055 A1ST60 8 timer points 16 16pt Y 0 055 A1Sl61 Interrupt input 16 points 32 32pt F 0 057 A1SJ71UC24 R2 RS 232 1 channel 32 32pt F 0 10 A1SJ71UC24 R4 RS 422 RS 485 1 channel 32 32pt F 0
73. Access Range Personal computer PLC on path up to target station Protocol level 3 is unusable 2 33 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview Protocol level 4 Network 1 to 7 Serial communication module Relay Network 8 Tar get station 8 station 1 CC Link Target station 2 Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Request source Type of relay station Type of networks 1 Type of relay Access Range to 8 stations 2 to 8 station 1 Personal computer MELSECNET 10 I Hor Ill fo PLC on path up to target station 2 MELSECNET 10 I Hor Ill PLC on path up to target station 1 Se Relay station 1 Request source Personal Computer Protocol level 4 is unusable Il Ill or IV 2 34 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview E Whole network system configuration Programming software SW5D5C GPPW E Communication support software SW3D5F CSKP E Ethernet module For 10BASE5 10BASE T QU71E71 For 10BASE2 QJ71E71 B2 Communication support software SW3D5F CSKP E MELSECNET 10 ISA bus board Note 1 For optical cable AYOBDE J71QLP23 GE For coaxial cable A7OBDE J71QBR13 MELSECNET 10 H MELSECNET 10 H module For optical cable QU71LP21 For coaxial cable QU71BR11 CC Link CC Link module QU61BT11 000000000 000000000 Partner maker product groups
74. D2 0 15kg QD75P4 D4 0 16kg External I O Specifications Input specifications Signal Name Drive unit ready READY Stop signal STOP Upper limit signal FLS Lower limit signal RLS Zero signal Z24 Z5 Manual pulse generator A phase PULSER A Manual pulse generator B phase PULSER B Near point dog signal DOG External command signal CHG 2 120 Rated Input Rated Input ON OFF r Input Resistance Response Time Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current 17 5VDC or 7VDC or 24VDC 20 10 5mA more 3 5mA or Approx 4 7k Q 4ms max less 1 7mA or less more 2VDC ore 0 5VDC or less 5VDC 10 22 5mA an Approx 0 3k Q 1ms max 2mA or more 0 5mA or less 10VDC or more 3VDC or less S Of Approx 4 7k 24VDC 50 10 5mA SMA orm re 0 2mA or less pprox Q 1ms max 2 5VDC or more 1VDC or less 5VDC 10 22 5mA SIG Of Approx 1 5k Q 1ms max 2mA or more 1mA or less V 1 Pulse width 2ms or more i ee ee ee ee ee ims or more ims or more Duty ratio 50 2 Phase difference ti te i eE A phase B phase When A phase leads B phase positioning address current value increases 0 5ms or more Lal L 17 5VDC or more 7VDC or less Approx 4 3k 1 7mA or less PE S 1ms max 24VDC 10 22 3 EmA or viore MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT Positioning Module FUNCTION MODULES QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4
75. Differential input preset DC input counting range 0 to 16777215 24 bit binary Differential input preset differential input counting range 0 to 16777215 24 bit binary 2 axes independent with linear circular interpolation simultaneous 8 channel thermocouple input 4 channel Pt100 3 wire type input 4 channel Pt100 4 wire type input RS 232C 1 channel with 2 DC input points 2 transistor output points PLC read write monitor test for master station local station and other stations on MELSECNET Reader writer 2 channel connection Plug color Applicable cable core size mm Transparent 0 14 to 0 2 Yellow AWG 26 to 24 0 3 to 0 5 AWG 22 to 20 Applies to AJ65SBTB1 8D AJ65SBTB1 8T 10 piece set Applies to AJ65SBTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D1 AJ65SBTB1 16T AJ65SBTC1 32D AJ65SBTC1 32D1 AJ65SBTC1 32T AJ65SBTC1 32DT AJ65SBTC1 32DT1 AJ65SBTC4 16D AJ65SBTC4 16DT 10 piece set Applies to AJ65SBTB1 32D AJ65SBTB1 32D1 AJ65SBTB1 32T 10 piece set Unused connector protection cap dustproof only not compliant with IP67 20 piece set Unused connector protection cap waterproof structure IP67 compliant 20 piece set Accessible to A mode CPU only Applicable cable outline size mm 1 0 to 1 4 1 4 to 2 0 1 0 to 1 4 1 4 to 2 0 6 20 Product System software Simulation software Data conversion software Intelligent function module software Monitoring control system software tool Type SW1D
76. Do not use a CJ instruction or the like to jump the coil processing of a timer while the coil of the timer is on 3 Do not use timers in an initial execution wait cyclic and interrupt programs Specifying methods and timing ranges of timers Timing Range Setting range OUTT ims to Setting 1000ms increments 1ms on the left increments x 32767 High speed OoUTHT _ 0 1ms to timer 100ms 0 1ms increments Low speed OUT ST 1ms to retentive 1000ms timer 1ms increments High speed OUTH ST 0 1ms to retentive 100ms timer 0 1ms increments Specifying Method Default Timing Range Low speed timer Counters C Counters are up counting type they count out and the contact turns on when its current value reaches its set value A counter turns on off its coil updates its current value and turns on its contact when the OUT C instruction is executed Use RST C to reset the count value of a counter Interrupt counters An interrupt counter is designed to count the number of interrupts that occurred and updates its current value when an interrupt factor is generated Set in the parameters the first counter number used with interrupt counters 256 points are occupied starting with the first counter number An interrupt counter does not count out Therefore when using it for control read the current value of the interrupt counter usin
77. El IMASK IRET RFS RFRDB RFRDW RFRDDB RFRDDW COM PR PRC CHKST CHK CHKCIR CHKEND TRACE TRACER DATERD P DATEWR P MSG PKEY PIDINIT PIDINITP PIDCONT PIDCONTP PIDSTOP PIDSTOPP PIDRUN PIDRUNP PIDRMW PIDPRMWP Processing No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No link refresh No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Personal computer clock data used No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Class Data link instruction Serial communication comp uter link module control instruction CC LINK control instruction Other instructions Instruction Symbol ZCOM READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE SEND RECV REQ ZNFR ZNTO ZNRD ZNWR RFRP RTDP RTREAD RTWRITE PRR INPUT SPBUSY CANCEL PUTE GATE ONDEMAND UTPUT PRR INPUT BIDOUT BIDIN SPBUSY RIRD RIWT RIFR RITO RDGET RDPUT RDMON NOPLF PAGE UDCNT1 UDCNT2 TIMR STMR ROTC SPD PLSY PWM UNIRD S FWRITE S FREAD PLOAD PUNLOAD PSWAP RBMOV WDT P KEY Processing No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No
78. Fle teed Make text fie eoo Stop monitor Select test Close Note 2 An intelligent function module is a generic term for special modules other than digital I O such as analog to digital converter and high speed counter Note 3 The utility package corresponding to the intelligent function module is needed 1 4 l J Lr ME EU COMPUTERIZATION With the increase of demands for production control quality control and resources energy control to say nothing of control data there is a demand for rapid transmission of production information data between PLCs and between PLC and host monitoring controlling system The Q series has increased network data transmission speed and reinforced its tools to configure a network system more easily Communication Support Software Package eoeerecccceccccce The communication support software package is a software tool for Windows for easy connection of a host monitoring controlling Windows personal computer to the Q series connection to QnA A or FX series also possible You can easily create a monitoring control application in Visual Basic Visual C or Excel serial communication or CPU programming port RS 232 or USB Utilization of the Internet The Q series Ethernet module has an e mail communication function which utilizes the Internet You can transfer production control information to from anywhere in the world and configure a
79. I O Signals to from PLC CPU Equipment QD75 to PLC CPU PLC CPU to QD75 lt Accessories gt X0 QD75 ready PLC ready x Product Description Manual QD75P QD75D User s Manual Hardware X2 Must not be used Must not be used aS lt Separately prepared products gt x4 7 roduct escription x5 Axis stop Manual QD75P QD75D User s Manual Details x6 7 Connector External wiring connector X7 A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 Forward External wiring cable Cables having external wiring connectors X8 Axis 1 Axis 1 rotation A6CON1 AGCON2 A6CON3 with wiring jog start for specific servo amplifiers and stepping Reverse motors are also available X9 Axis 2 Axis 1 rotation Refer to MODEL SELECTION Error jog start ACCESSORIES detection Forward XA Axis 3 Axis 2 rotation Note 1 As the external wiring connector is not packed with the jog start module always prepare it separately Reverse i ys prep P y XB Axis 4 Axis 2 rotation lt Software gt jog start Forward Product Remarks XC Axis 1 Axis 3 rotation SW4D5C GPPW E For sequence jog start or later programming Reverse SWOD5C QD75P E Software for QD75 XD Axis 2 Axis 3 rotation Jog stari Must b d Prepared ired Forward Must be prepared Prepared as required XE Axis 3 Axis 4 rotation Note 2 The software of the above products or later version are E9 aa usable everse XF Axis 4 Axis 4 rotation jog start x10 In x13 7 ing X16 completion x19 7 Must not be used xIC oie 2
80. ON Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 60Hz noise frequency Common terminal arrangement Short circuit protection Yes thermal protection short circuit protection e Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point e Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point Operation indicator ON indication LED 32 point switch over using switch External connections Applicable wire size External wiring connector block conversion module consumption Weight kg Ib Number Name Number Name Number Name Number Name Left side first nan selector circuit Internal a Right side latter hall The above diagram shows the first half of 32 points F The latter half of 32 points L are similar 2 96 MODEL SELECTION I O MODULES Output Modules E QY50 transistor output module sink type aa liars Opa Modul Sn Type o Specifications 12 24VDC 20 15 Yh 34567 SoA P Eisen 0 2VDC TYP 0 5A 0 3VDC MAX 0 5A Response time ims or less ims or less rated load resistive load Fuse 4A x 2pcs connected in parallel 6 7A equivalent unchangeable fuse blow capacity 50A External 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supply power 20mA at 24VDC Max all points ON 560VAC
81. Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Environmentally resistant protective structure Operating atmosphere Operating altitude Installation location Overvoltage category 1 Pollution level 2 Display section Other than display section 20 to 60 C General Specifications Specifications 0 to 40 C 0 to 55 C for A975 A970GOT TBA B TBD B 0 to 55 C 10 to 90 RH non condensing 10 to 90 RH non condensing Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 1131 2 vibration Under intermittent vibration Under continuous 10 to 57Hz 57 to 150Hz_ 9 8m S e 57 to 150Hz_ 4 8m S i 0 075mm 0 003 inch 0 035mm 0 001 inch Sweep count 10 times each in X Y Z directions for 80 min Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 1131 2 147 m s 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z IP65F or equivalent front section No corrosive gases 2000m max 6557 38 feet Inside control panel TI or less 2 or less 1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level
82. PLC CPU devices and special function module buffer memory can be monitored and tested A device checking maintenance screen need not be created as different PLC devices can be shown changed at the same time on a four window display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BATCH MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF NETWKNo 0 STATION FF 15 2147483648 DW 10 32767 001 e 25 O e 200 43 50 68378428 DW 300 30000 10 32767 18 500 19 3234 0 opvs lt zxo0 x 3 lp0000000 a oowo ioo lp0000000 TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BM MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF NETWKNof 0 STATION FF VO NOJ 1 T OPV OSV o0 FHA BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 0 Production line A BM 1111 64 BM 1119 0 Ty 1 PN 0 sv oO IROA BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 Production line B BM 1113 1111 BM 1121 131 T 2PV 150 SV 150 e BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 Production line C BM 1115 160 BM 1123 555 T 3 PV 0 SV 0 IEOH BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 Production line D VJ BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 The alarm history function supports the failure occurrence counting function cumulative failure time totalization function history printing function and so on Q gt OPERATION PANEL GOT A900 Overview and Features E Security function You can set a 16 step password This function can prot
83. Q O D n COMPATIBILITY WITH THE Y2K PROBLEM Compatibility of MELSEC Q Series CPU Modules with the Y2K Problem Both the Q and A mode CPUs of the Q series will operate properly in and after the year 2000 Compatibility with the year 2000 Y2K problem will be described below It should be noted that there are differences in compatibility between the Q and A mode CPUs Qmode CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Amode CPU _ Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A Q Mode CPU W Clock timing range The timing range of the Q mode CPU clock function is from January 1 1980 to December 31 2079 i Leap year date compensation The Q mode CPU automatically compensates for a leap day within the above timing range E Recognition of years in and after 2000 The Q mode CPU has four digit year data It will not mistake the year 2000 for 1900 if you create a sequence program which will handle the year data in four digits A Mode CPU W Clock timing range The A mode CPU clock function has only two digit year data Namely it times from January 1 00 to December 31 99 in every century and cannot recognize differences between 1900 2000 and 2100 i Leap year date compensation The A mode CPU makes automatic leap year compensation correctly until February 28 2100 Though there is no leap day of February 29 2100 the CPU times as if there is a leap day so the clock data must be re set on March 1 2100 E Recogni
84. QD62 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type High speed counter module Setting item Curent value Setting value CHT Present value a CHI Overflow detection flag No detection CH1 Down count instr OFF OFF x CH1 Count enable instr Disable Disable x CH2 Present value a CH2 Overflow detection flag No detection CH2 Down count instr OFF OFF x CH2 Count enable instr Disable Disable x MAY monitor test XA monitor test Preset function Preset Coincidence output function Coincidence output Counter selection function Counter selection Bing counter function Bina counter ee p Flash ROM setting Details mb Te Curent value Monitoring A File save _ display Read from fie module kr Make text fie tart moritor Stop monitor Select test Close 2 114 Positioning Module MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Overview The QD71P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 and QD75D4 hereafter referred to as the QD75 are modules used with stepping motors or servo amplifiers to exercise machine position or speed control Features Two different output systems Two different output systems open collector and differential driver systems are available as command signals to a stepping motor or servo amplifier QD71P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 Open collector system QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Differential driver system The differential driver system can increase the distance from the
85. QD75 to the servo amplifier and exercise fast precision control Max 1Mpps high speed command The differential driver system can give a max 1Mpps high speed command achieving fast precision control The command pulse for the open collector system is max 200kpps Assortment of 1 2 and 4 axis products 1 2 and 4 axis models are available in terms of the number of axes per module QD75P1 QD75D1 1 axis QD75P2 QD75D2 2 axes QD75P4 QD75D4 4 axes Also since there are no restrictions on the number of modules loaded multiple modules can be loaded and used if more than four control axes are needed Fast start The QD75 can be started as fast as approx 6ms after the CPU module has given it a start command reducing the machine tact time 4 axis linear interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation You can exercise 2 3 or 4 axis linear interpolation control and 2 axis circular interpolation control Note 1 Interpolation control can be performed when multiple axes are used on the same QD75 module Wide selection of control systems You have a choice of control systems such as PTP Point to Point control fixed feed control equal speed control and speed position switching control Function List Zeroing control Major positioning control High level positioning control Main Function Machine zero return control Fast zeroing control Linear control Linear interpolation control Fixe
86. QD75D2 QD75D4 Wir Signal Name Internal Circuit na Deviation counter Deviation counter clear clear O Common Common CW A phase pulse CW A phase pulse O CCW B phase sign CCW B phase sign Wiring wiring required wiring as required Performance Specifications QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 Item QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Number of control axes 4 axes 3 2 axis linear interpolation 2 3 4 axis linear interpolation interpolation Tnction 2 axis circular interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation PTP Point To Point control path control can be set for both linear and circular speed control speed position switching control position speed switching control Control unit mm inch degree pulse 600 pieces of data positioning data No 1 to 600 axis Can be set using peripheral device or sequence program Control system Positioning data Backup Parameters and positioning data can be saved in flash ROM without battery Positioning PTP control 7 roe Incremental absolute system system Speed position position speed switching control Incremental system Path control Incremental absolute system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree e 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree e 2147483648 to 2147483647 pul
87. QO6HCPU A H Built in RAM The A mode CPU module has 144k byte user memory RAM where user data such as programs are stored W Built in ROM The A mode CPU module has 144k byte user memory ROM to ensure ease of storing programs into ROM Note that the program stored in ROM is transferred to the built in RAM at power on or key reset and run in RAM E RAM memory card optional Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU By loading the memory card the memory capacity can be increased to 448k bytes The RAM card can be used as extended file registers Memory Capacity of Standard RAM Usable Memory T Ane Capacity Bytes Memory Memory Card Bytes Q2MEM 1MBS 448k 3 15 MODEL SELECTION MEMORY CPU Built in Memories Memory Cards E User memory area makeup example in A mode RAM operation Boot operation from ROM a Parameter T C set value main Main program MELSECNET 10 network parameter T C set value sub Built in ROM memory capacity Subprogram max 144k bytes Unusable Boot operation Not used from ROM Parameter Stored into Parameter T C set value main ROM T C set value main Main program Main program MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 network parameter network parameter T C set value Sub T C set value sub Subprogram Subprogram For internal system For internal system for Built in RAM for use of subprogram memory capacity max
88. Restrictions on use with Q mode The following QnA compatible instructions dedicated to ID interfaces cannot be used with the Q mode The FROM TO instruction etc must be used for programming Unusable IDINT1 IDINT2 IDRD1 IDRD2 IDWD1 instructions IDWD2 IDARD1 IDARD2 IDAWD1 IDAWD2 IDCMP1 IDCMP2 IDFILL1 IDFILL2 IDCOPY1 IDCOPY2 IMPORTANT These ID products are radio transmitting devices Please confirm these products comply with local laws and regurations for radio transmitting devices before use Specifications A1SD32ID2 D NS422RW D NS422CAB10 10 32 79 D NS422CAB20 20 65 57 D NS422CAB40 40 131 15 D NS422CAB100 100 327 87 D 03C D 03CS D 03P D 8P D 8PS D 8PX D NSO3P D NSO3PS D NSO3PM 0 26 57 20 0 27 59 40 2 76 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71024 QU71024 R2 Overview The serial communication module hereafter referred to as the QJ71C24 can connect an external device and Q series PLCs by a serial communication line RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 to achieve the following functions Also connection of an external modem terminal adaptor permits data communications to be made with a remote external device via a dialup line ISDN line 1 An external device e g personal computer display performs the collection changing of PLC data and the operation monitoring and status control of the CPU module to manage and monitor the PLC side facilitie
89. Weight kg Ib 0 38 0 84 1km 3278 69feet overall CSMA CS survival system 2 69 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK JPCN 1 Field Network A1SJ71J92 S3 A1SJ72J95 Overview The AnS series special network and I O composite modules cannot be loaded JPCN 1 is a field network for PLC standardized by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association and can control JPCN 1 compatible slave stations such as remote W Twisted pair cable specifications er It Specificati I O solenoid valves robots and indicators from the Em p pec SaL Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable master PLC Number of pairs 2P or more Feat Conductor resistance 88 0 Q km max 20 C eatures Capacitance Average 60nF km max 1kHz 3 3 Characteristic 110 10 E System configuration impedance Main base Q3 OB poy z E Restrictions on use with Q mode y 1SJ71392 S3 3 When device memory data in the master PLC are Extension base QA1S60B accessed by slave stations by the GET PUT service the JPCN accessible ranges are limited as indicated below Device Type Range P Main base Robot solenoid z X 0 7FF A1S30B valve indicator o Y 0 7FF etc R M L S 0 8191 A1SJ72J95 B 0 FEF The A1SJ71J92 S3 can be used with QA1S6_ B T 0 2047 The A1SJ72J95 can be used with A1S3_B 0 2047 0 2047 E Modules
90. Windows comprehensive environment allows various optional user friendly software programs to be added to GPPW Data setting monitoring software for various intelligent function modules Initial setting ES Module irfanaton el Module nedelname GE4AD Star VD No 0300 Module type A D Convesen Moduls GPP function software package BBE Seting vave j Era 1 0 SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS RUN B Sangra E E ares of ee Erie z 4 Senna etal Seest input la vate wito_ EE cara Make ientfie End setup ance Make ientfio End setup Batch Monitoring of CPU and Intelligent Function Modules Data converting software r Data Preview Data Conversion Wizard Step 3 of 4 This screen lets you select each column and set the Data Format Column Data Format Device Number Label Safety eouibment x COVER Safety cover x2 READY Operation ready Oil pressure Sequence program monitoring T T wan t NI Intelligent function module monitoring The Q series has utility packages available for intelligent function modules such as analog to digital conversion units Using the utility packages allows you to make function setting nee
91. Z W oeg ADO A 20 OO lt L Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors 24VDC Jeol can corr ec ca xt cofec cofec ejeren ec loaleu feafialer ie a Jeo aeo enl len 6 A6TBX54 E 3 A6TBXY70 4 A6TBX36 E 7 A6TBY54 E 24VDC len lt co ceo lop olou lel I ala cole 24VDC The tightening torque of the terminal screws M3 5 screws of the terminal blocks is 78 4Necm Directions for use 24v 1F ov iE ry J1Df 1B iC iA 18 15 117 8 19 16 i4 fia 12 11 5 A6TBY36 E jaou e9 cul lt t c gt 10 lt t ohoj co 00 m aoo o cuele 9 L0 xt c Lo sco cols af fou fou foul fou feu feu foul aao e n oele oele 10 2 133 MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors Terminal Block Convertor Modules The terminal block convertor module available is designed to facilitate wiring by drawing the wiring to the
92. aoe AJA 83 7 n jd s ASI 3s n J 98 aa n J 35 B ul ot Sr Bo u 71 aca van el gt P jog 8clog g T EN Eg EN B cL u 35 a cyl amp 38 C B ala P P 3 2 P P abe ze D A U ttt U 21 U 21 l G C Network No 1 Network No 2 Termination resistor MELSECNET 10 Termination resistor A J 71 L P P p 21 21 23 Station 6 Station 5 Station 4 Station 6 Station 5 Station 4 ordinary station ordinary station ordinary station ordinary station ordinary station ordinary station 71 Le aandwoo feuosied 1W Od Ione mows gt A A n n U U Cc Cc P P U U 21 Multi level system Coaxial bus system The MELSECNET 10 board can be loaded into an ISA bus slot as the optional board of a personal computer Note 1 to connect the personal computer to the MELSECNET 10 Note 2 network system Note 1 IBM PC AT and its compatibles Note 2 Not compatible with MELSECNET 10H mode Features Availability of user programming functions The functions designed for Microsoft Visual C and Personal computer incorporated into MELSECNET 10 network system You can load the interface board into a personal computer Microsoft Visual Basic allow you to easily create user applications e g those for remote control of PLC and read write of data from to devices to use the personal computer as an ordi
93. avoid the influence of noise and heat The ambient temperature of the unit should not be higher than 55 C 5 19 6 APPENDICES 1 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS e Safety Precautions cccccsceceessceeeeeseeesesneeeeseneeess 6 2 2 LOADING AND INSTALLATION e Loading and Installation 0 0 eeeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeneeees 6 3 3 COMPATIBILITY WITH THE Y2K PROBLEM Compatibility of MELSEC Q Series CPU Modules with the Y2K Problem stierne eeneioe iania eaS 6 10 4 INTRODUCTION TO MELFANSweb MELFANS WED E 6 11 5 MODEL LIST e Q Mode Model List csccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeessteeeeseaes 6 12 e A Mode Model List ccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeesenteeeeeees 6 14 Q A Mode Common Model List cceeeeeeeees 6 15 e Accessories Shared Among Q AnS Series I O 6 18 e CC Link Remote Devices c ccceesceeeessteeeeeeees 6 19 e Software Peripheral Devices cceesseeeeeees 6 21 e Personal Computer Network Boards 00 6 23 GOT A900 Graphic Operation Terminal 0 6 24 MID SYSTEMS esc eerste cs ca let in aascrether T 6 27 6 SERVICE NETWORK Service NEMO E aar ee iene 6 28 CONTENTS 6 1 gt xe ne D 2 2 D n SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Always read these precautions When using the Q series products thoroughly read the manuals packed with the individual products and the associate
94. channels 500kpps differential input sink transistor output QD62E 2 channels 200kpps 5 12 24VDC input source transistor output SWOD5C QCTU E High speed counter utility software 13JL95 QD62 QD62D QD62E User s Manual Details optional Note 1 13JQ69 QD62 QD62D QD62E User s Manual Hardware packed with product Positioning module QD75P1 1 axis open collector output QD75P2 2 axes open collector output QD75P4 4 axes open collector output QD75D1 1 axis differential output QD75D2 2 axes differential output QD75D4 4 axes differential output SWOD5C QD75P E QD75 positioning module software 13JR09 QD75P QD75D User s Manual Details optional 13J973 QD75P QD75D User s Manual Hardware packed with product 13JN62 SW0D5C QD75P E Operating Manual optional Note 3 MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 SI QSI optical cable dual loop module QJ71BR11 Coaxial 75 cable single bus 13JF92 MELSECNET 10H Reference Manual optional 13JQ48 QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 User s Manual packed with product CC Link module QJ61BT11 For master local 13JL91 QJ61BT11 User s Manual Details optional 13JQ41 QJ61BT11 User s Manual Hardware packed with product Ethernet module QJ71E71 For 10BASE 5 10BASE T QJ71E71 B2 For 10BASE 2 13JL88 Ethernet Module User s Manual Basic optional 13JL89 Ethernet Module User s Manual Applications optional 13JF89 MC Protocol Reference Manual optional 13JQ35 QJ71E71 QU71E71 B2 User s Manual Hardware packed with product Serial comm
95. computer without writing them to the PLC Features Program run can be checked on a personal computer making debugging efficient 1 Without connection of a PLC program run can be checked on the personal computer where that program was created 2 The target PLC type MELSEC A QnA FX Q motion controller of the program created is judged automatically and the corresponding virtual CPU is started 3 Simple setting allows the machine side I O to be operated simulatively Example XO turns on 10 seconds after Y10 has turned on 4 Debugging is enabled in the stage of program design 5 PLC basic and application instructions are supported I O System Setting Function The I O system setting function allows external input generated for the PLC output to be given simulatively by simple setting The following No 1 indicates the setting that X2 and X3 are turned on 5 seconds after X0 has turned on and X2 turned off No Condition Timer Input Simulation Device Status 1 1 eD E 00 x10ms P23 eLO Enable C OFF x2 0FF COR v70 0FF AND ke 2 00 xim P ON I Enia CoR C OFF Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to monitor the status of the device memory and buffer memory in a virtual CPU and also permits forced ON OFF and current value changing as well as device ON OFF state and value monitoring like the devi
96. confirmed on the programming software screen making it very useful for maintenance E Energy saving 1 Reduction in input current of DC input modules Type Input Current QX40 A1SX40 Approx 4mA Approx 7mA 2 Reduction in 5VDC current consumption of transistor output modules Input Current Approx 95mA Approx 500mA A1SY81EP E Safety 1 The 100 200VAC rated modules are enhanced in insulation between the external hazardous voltage and internal circuit E Compatibility 1 Since the connector shape and pin layout of the 32 and 64 point modules are the same as those of the A AnS series the connector terminal block conversion modules of the A AnS series and the connectors wired for the AnS series I O modules can be used Instructions 1 Note that the screw terminal block layout is different between the MELSEC Q series 16 point I O modules and MELSEC AnS series 16 point I O modules 2 The external wiring connectors of the 32 and 64 point modules are not provided for the products Please purchase them after confirming the external wiring applicable connector types given in the specification field of the corresponding modules The external wiring terminal blocks of the 16 point modules are provided for fitted to the products 3 When using the 16 point modules use wires of 0 3 to 0 75mm core and 2 8mm 0 11inch OD max It is also recommended to cover the power connections of the crimpi
97. connectable to slave stations 0 2047 C 0 1023 The A1SJ72J95 slave station module may be loaded in 0 1023 the CPU slot of the A1S3_ B to control the AnS series I O se z modules A1SX A1SY D 026143 W 0 FFF F 0 2047 Performance Specifications kem Specifications A1SJ71J92 S3 A1SJ72J95 JPCN 1 compliant class TYPE S52I slave station Communication speed Communication system modulation system electrical characteristic transmission path Overall distance Number of stations connected Transmission right control Service type Number of link points Number of I O points occupied Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib 125k 250k 500k 1M bps Half duplex synchronous communication NRZI system EIA RS485 bus format Depends on communication speed 125kbps 1000m 3278 69feet 250kbps 800m 2622 95feet 500kbps 480m 1573 77feet 1Mbps 240m 786 89feet Up to 31 slave stations to one master station Polling selecting Initial setting Broadcasting Initial setting 1 0 Message write V O Reset Message read Reset Data write GET Data read PUT Input output lt 2048 32 points 0 4A 0 43 0 68 2 70 S LINK A1SJ71SL92 Overview The A1SJ71LS92 is a master module connected to SUNX s S LINK equipment to control it S LINK can control 128 points per master module and be used as a wiring saving network Features E System configuration l i il Main base Q30B
98. convert the connector of a connector type I O module into a terminal block to ensure ease of external wiring To use this module plug a dedicated cable to the connector of an I O module and plug the opposite side of that cable to the connector terminal block convertor module Perform external wiring at the terminal block of the connector terminal block convertor module Appearance Model list 1 Connector terminal block convertor modules Type Description Weigni kg lb A6TBXY36 For positive common sink type 0 4 input modules and sink type output 0 88 modules standard type A6TBXY54 For positive common sink type 0 5 input modules and sink type output 1 1 modules 2 wire type A6TBX70 For positive common sink type 0 6 input modules 3 wire type 1 32 A6TBX36 E For negative common source 0 4 type input modules standard type 0 88 A6TBY36 E For source type output modules 0 4 standard type 0 88 A6TBX54 E For negative common source 0 5 type input modules 2 wire type 1 1 A6TBY54 E For source type output modules 2 0 5 wire type 1 1 A6TBX70 E For negative common source 0 6 type input modules 3 wire type 1 32 2 131 MODEL SELECTION ACCESSORIES 2 Cables Type ACO5TB AC10TB AC20TB AC30TB AC50TB AC80TB AC100TB ACO5TB E AC10TB E AC20TB E AC30TB E AC50TB E 2 132 Description 0 5m 1 64ft for sink modules 1m 3 28ft for s
99. data from time to time Also the GOT A900 serves for process production control etc since PLC data can be read to the PC card for use on the other GOT A900 or read from Excel or other spreadsheet software on a personal computer for control For control on personal computer PC card 1 On the personal computer read the device value data CSV format file which were read from the PLC CPU and saved in the PC card in the CSV format file 2 Read and edit the CSV format file in the PC card using spreadsheet software etc 3 Save in the PC card the device value data CSV format file edited on the personal computer and use it on the GOT A900 To use the PC card on the A95 _ GOT the memory card interface module A1SD59J MIF is required E Printer function The GOT A900 series supports the printer function for alarm history daily monthly report forms display screen color hard copy etc The A985GOT A975GOT B A970GOT B and A960GOT are standard equipped with an interface and the A95I GOT should be fitted with the printer interface A9GT 50PRF to use the printer function Connectable printers 1 ESC P24 J84 compliant printer color compatible 2 Hewlett Packard s printer PLC command compatible color incompatible E Bar code reader function By connecting a bar code reader to the GO
100. description Type CPU Type a ircay A 0 Module C Link Module Type l Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H QJ71C24 QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 QJ61BT11 Q25H QJ71C24 R2 Il Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A AJ71QC24N AJ71QLP21 AJ61QBT11 Q2AS S1 Q2ASH S1 AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QC24N R2 R4 A1SJ71QBR11 ll A2U S1 A3U A4U AJ71UC24 AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 AJ61BT11 Q02 A Q02H A AISJ71UC24 R2 R4 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ61BT11 QO6H A A1SJ71BR11 A2AS S1 A2USH S1 IV Other than above If the combination of CPU module and communication module on a type basis is other than that shown in the above list the accessible range may differ from the one given The levels of the MELSEC communication protocol supported by the serial communication modules are as listed below Serial Communication Module Type Protocol Level QJU71024 QU71C24 R2 1 2 3 4 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 R4 1 2 3 AJ71UC24 AISJ71UC24 R2 R4 1 Protocol level 1 and level 2 Serial communication module Relay Target station station Access Range Request source Personal Computer station network PLC on path up to target station 10 Request Source Personal computer Protocol level 3 Network 1 to 7 Serial communication module Request source Personal Computer Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Type of relay station 1 Type of networks 1 to 8 Type of relay stations 2 to 8 MELSECNET 10 1 Hor ll Request Source
101. eceecceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 2 4 e Applicable Model List 0 eeeeeseeeeeesneeeesneeeeeneeees 2 5 Q Mode CPU Modules Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU eee 2 15 e CPU Built in Memories Memory Cards 008 2 24 e Network OvervieW c ccccecsceceseeeeeesseeeeseseeeenenes 2 27 e Ethernet QU71E71 QU71E71 B2 ou eeceeeseceeeeneeees 2 36 e MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 2 43 e MELSECNET 10H A6BR10 A6BR10 DC 2 53 CC LINK QUE61BT11 oo eececesecsseeeseecseesseeeeseeesseeees 2 55 e MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 Goi E E te tried 2 66 e MELSEC I O LINK A1SJ51764 ccccecesecsteeeeeeees 2 68 B NET A1SJ71B62 S8 fanann enai 2 69 e JPCN 1 Field Network A1SJ71J92 S3 A1SJ72J95 sigy sive vest ves ands te dyperwes ebyy uve ere EEE 2 70 S LINK A1SU71S L920 ceccceseccsteesseesseeesseeeseeees 2 71 e Profibus FMS Profibus DP interface A1SJ71PB96F ANSITAPB92D tic oie eee ee Bees ea 2 72 e DeviceNet A1SJ71DN91 eee ceeeceeeeeeteeesesteeeeseees 2 73 e Modbus interface A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 oc eccceccecsseeeseecsseesseeesseeeseeees 2 74 e Intelligent Communication A1SD518 eee 2 75 e ID Interface A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ71ID2 R4 A1SD321D1 A1SD321D2 0 eee ceectseeeseesneeeteeees 2 76 e Serial Communication Modules QU71C24 ENTALL H m PAAA EA ATT 2 77 Overview of Q Mode e Utility Package for Serial Communication
102. error Control bus error Instantaneous power failure occurrence Diagnostic Item Battery low O module verify Intelligent function module assignment error No parameters Boot error Memory card operation error File setting error File access error Instruction inexecutable Parameter setting check Link parameter error SFC parameter error Instruction code check No END instruction Pointer setting error Operation check error FOR NEXT instruction loop error CALL RET instruction loop error Interrupt program error Extension instruction error SFC error Watchdog timer error Program time out E Failure history MODEL SELECTION CPU Description Diagnoses the voltage of the battery Diagnoses the loading statuses of 1 0 modules Diagnoses the I O assignment status of the intelligent function modules Diagnoses the parameter write status Diagnoses the setting status of boot operation Diagnoses the handling of the memory card Diagnoses the file setting status Diagnoses the access status to the file Diagnoses the presence absence of the program file to be executed Diagnoses the set data of the parameters Diagnoses the set data of the link parameters Diagnoses the set data of the SFC parameters Diagnoses the code of the instruction to be executed Diagnoses missing END instruction Diagnoses the pointer setting status Diagnoses the operation results Diagnoses the FOR NEXT instruction loop
103. instruction Error Step No l 9 File Name Differences and Restrictions As compared to the operation of the Q mode CPU LLT has the following restrictions 1 LLT cannot support SFC programs 2 LLT does not support interrupt programs No operation will be performed if a sequence program is created 3 The operation result in any instruction that uses a floating point value is not equal to the actual operation result of the CPU because of a rounding error 4 LLT cannot simulate the functions of intelligent function network modules However it has a buffer memory area of 64k points x 64 modules for intelligent function network modules Data write read can be performed to from this area 5 For the timing of LLT processing time taken for one scan is calculated as 100ms default value By changing the constant scan setting you can change the time taken for one scan 6 In LLT the timing method of the timer changes with the scan time constant scan setting of the logic test function At a scan time of 100ms the current value of the 100ms timer is incremented by 1 every scan and the current value of the 10ms timer is incremented by 10 every scan At a scan time of 10ms the current value of the 100ms timer is incremented by 10 every scan and the current value of the 10ms timer is incremented by 1 every scan SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS 7 In LLT one low speed execution program is always run after a sc
104. km max 20 C resistance Capacitance 1kHz a Characteristic impedance Insulation 500M or more resistance Withstand voltage 500VAC 1 minute or longer OD 8 5mm max 9mm max E Restrictions on use with Q mode No restrictions Performance Specifications Item Max number of I O points 1 0 refresh time Applicable communication cable Communication speed Synchronous system Error control Transmission path form Transmission distance Number of I O points occupied External power supply rated voltage External power current consumption Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib Specifications 128 points when I O composite remote modules are used Approx 5 4ms Twisted pair cable or cabtyre cable 0 75mm or more 38 4kbps For frame synchronization and bit synchronization Parity check Bus system T branching possible termination resistors not needed Overall 200m Overall 665 74feet 64 points 24VDC 15 10 for transmission path Typ 90mA 24VDC 115mA 0 3 0 66 2 68 B NET A1SJ71B62 S3 Overview B NET is Mitsubishi Electric s network designed for power distribution control equipment Connecting power distribution control equipment distributed within a building or plant to B NET allows centralized management and centralized control of the power distribution control equipment The A1SJ71B62 S3 is an interface designed for B NET PLC and accepts up to 63 stations
105. load Weight kg Ib 2 54 0 5 1 1 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 Overview CC Link Control amp Communication Link designed for merger of control and communication is a wiring saving and information network which has the industry s latest advanced functions and performance capabilities e g real time capability decentralized control communication with intelligent equipment and RAS Note 1 function and also offers multi vendor environment in conjunction with various field equipment manufacturers The QJ61BT11 CC Link modules for Q mode inherit the features of the MELSEC A QnA series and newly adopt useful functions such as remote device station initial setting function Note 1 RAS stands for Reliability Availability Serviceability Features E System configuration A total of 64 remote I O remote device local standby master and intelligent device stations can be connected to one master station Master station Local standby master station MELSECNET 10 Display operation intelligent device terminal module group CC Link such as _ Positioning module Interface board for E oar pir interface Personal computer Termination resistor Partner products such as Sensor Solenoid valve l ear Indicator Temperature FX PLC controller ID controller Remote device mo
106. maximum of I O 4096 points max 8192 points when used with a remote I O network such as CC Link regardless of the CPU module type Up to 7 Extension Bases Connectable Extended Memo so e E EE Each CPU module is equipped with a small PC card slot to accept extended memory of up to 32MB when using the ATA card By loading large capacity extended memory you can perform large capacity file management and comment settings for all data devices and past programs can be stored in memory as a correction history All device comments Memory card Extended file registers when SRAM card flash card is used Extended file registers when SRAM card flash card is used Program year month day version Program year month day version Up to seven extension bases eight bases including the main can be connected to accept up to 64 modules Also the overall distance of extension cables is max 13 2m 43 28feet enabling high freedom of extension base layout Note 1 If a 12 slot base is used the total number of I O intelligent function and network modules is restricted to 64 Go mm oo l ade e TV EASE OF MAINTENANCE Needless to say maintenance is essential to exhibit the inherent performance of machinery and equipment However as business areas increase and machinery and equipment are installed all over the world s Nn e y
107. mechanical feed value unchangeable No operation control mode Shifts to operation of next data when this instruction has been set Makes an unconditional or conditional jump to specified positioning data No Repeats FOR NEXT loop control Performs multiple positioning processings by a single start Judges conditions of condition data and executes start block data If conditions do not hold executes start block data of next point Waits until conditions of condition data hold to execute start block data Performs positioning of axes specified in condition data simultaneously output of pulses at the same timing Repeats positioning processing of start block data across FOR NEXT by the preset number of times Repeats positioning processing of start block data across FOR NEXT until condition data hold 2 115 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High level positioning control Manual control Operation pattern OPR Compensation function Limit function 2 116 Main Function Continuous operation suspension function Inching operation Manual pulse generator operation Independent positioning control Positioning end Continuous positioning control Continuous path control Sub Function OPR retry function Home position shift function Backlash compensation function Electronic gear function Speed limit function Torque lim
108. memory card SRAM card battery Base Main module Extension Extension cable AnS series module Type QO02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A 13JR10 13J740 13J741 13J742 13J743 13J744 13JF40 13JL96 Q6BAT Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM BAT QA1S35B QA1S38B QA1S65B QA1S68B QCO06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B In addition to the above modules the AnS series modules can be loaded and used in the QA1S65B QA1S68B A Mode Model List Outline I O points 4096 Program capacity 28K steps Basic instruction 79ns I O points 4096 Program capacity 28K steps Basic instruction 34ns 1 O points 4096 Program capacity 30K steps x 2 Basic instruction 34ns QCPU A mode User s Manual Details ACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals ACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions AnSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPU Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions AnA AnUCPU Programming Manual AD57 Instructions AnA AnUCPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions MELSAP 2 Programming Manual QCPU A mode User s Manual Hardware packed with QA1S30B Replacement battery Small SRAM card Capacity 1M bytes Replacement battery for Q2MEM 1MBS Power supply CPU 5 I O slots for AnS series module loading Power supply CPU 8 I O slots for AnS series module loading Power supply 5 I O slots for AnS series module loading Power supply 8 I O slots for AnS series module loading 0 6m 1 97ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection 1 2m 3 93ft cable for QA1S65
109. module modules loaded on the base unit must be reduced e g Q02CPU QO6HCPU I O module e g QX10 QY10 Intelligent function module e g Q64AD Q62DA Refer to Applicable Equipment List for the current consumption value of each module Calculation example ae eae Ce ae ee et System configuration L LL I OLAD ginpow jndjno jnpow jndu jnpow yndu i 5 3 c c S S 3 3 fe e a Q c c o D jnpow yndu jnpow jndjno jnpow jndjno jnpow jndjino jnpow jndjno uoljouny ua l u uoljouny uaf l u jnpow Ajddns 1 Mm0dq Rated output current of power supply module Sum of 5VDC current consumption values Rated Output Current A 0 500 0 121 0 050x5 0 430x5 0 55 0 375 Q61P A1 3 948 A 5VDC current consumption of each module Rated output current of Q61P A1 6 A voere 5VDC Current gt sum of 5VDC current consumption values 3 946 A Type Module Type i Consumption A ee 9 500 Hence this system has no current consumption problem Q3128 0 121 QX10 Input module 0 050 QY10 Output module 0 430 conversion module conversion module 2 125 MODEL SELECTION POWER SUPPLY MODULE Power Supply Modules Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Overview The power supply module is designed to supply 5VDC to each PLC module loaded on the base unit Note that the power supply module type that may be loaded depends on the base unit
110. next scan This type can be used as a processing program which need not be run every scan e g output to printer and data transmission to host personal computer or the like When multiple programs have been set to the low speed execution type they are run in order of lower to higher program numbers and low speed END processing is performed when all low speed execution type programs are run Note 1 The constant scan function is designed to keep the program operation processing time i e scan time constant so that the signal input program operation processing signal output delay time is constant to increase the control accuracy of a device When the constant scan function is used the scan time which normally varies per scan is fixed to a given period If the scan time is shorter than that fixed period surplus time is produced and can be used to process a low speed execution program E Wait type A wait type program is run only when an execution request is given A subroutine program may be described in each scan program but may be independent of the scan program and be used as a wait program When used as a wait program that subroutine can be called not only from that scan program but also from other scan programs Interrupt may take place during execution of any scan program An interrupt program will be easier to understand when it is managed as a wait program Scan execution type program l 1 Main routine Main
111. of File Register Points RAM memory card Drive 1 ROM memory Q2MEM 2MBF card Q2MEM 4MBF Drive 2 Standard RAM Drive 3 Q2MEM 1MBS 517 120 points 1 040 384 points 1 042 432 points 32 768 points CPU Built In Memories Memory Cards Performance Specifications Memory cards are available in SRAM type linear flash ROM type and ATA flash ROM type They are classified as follows according to their applications and capacities Memory x Type Memory Type Capacity e n bytes Q2MEM 1MBS No restriction Q2MEM 2MBF_ Linear flash 100 000 Q2MEM 4MBF_ ROM 100 000 Q2MEM 8MBA ATA flash 1 000 000 Q2MEM ROM 1 000 000 16MBA Q2MEM 1 000 000 32MBA Note 4 Both the linear flash ROM and ATA flash ROM are rewritable non volatile memories Battery Life of Q2MEM 1MBS The Q2MEM 1MBS built in battery has the following battery life Note that the Q2MEM 1MBS is loaded into the PLC CPU and consumes battery current if power is ON Memory Backup Time Hours Backup Time after Guaran Battery Error ON Actual teed TYP Hours MIN i During storage During operation During storage Loaded in PLC CPU with power off or card is stored alone During operation Loaded in PLC CPU with power on 2 26 Network Overview MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Overview In production locations the introduction of a network system suited to applications and objectives is signific
112. of data communications error stores in buffer memory up to 16 sets of error history information including message sub headers other end equipment IP addresses etc Checks hardware including communication circuit of Ethernet module Set from GPPW Performance Specifications Compatible cable Transmission specifications Data size Max number of data per communication Loadable station Item Data transmission speed bps Transmission method Max inter node distance m ft Max segment length m ft Max number of nodes Min node interval m ft Number of simultaneously openable connections Fixed buffer size Random accessing buffer size E mail attached file size MC protocol communication Fixed buffer communication Random buffer communication E mail attached file Data communication instructions RECVS RECV READ SREAD SEND WRITE SWRITE Data communication instructions ZNRD ZNWR Number of loadable modules per CPU Number of I O signals occupied 5VDC internal current consumption A External dimensions mm inch Weight kg Ib QJ71E71 B2 10BASE2 QJ71E71 10BASE5 10Mbps Base band 2500 8196 72 4000 13114 75 925 3032 79 500 1639 34 100 units segment 2 5 8 2 16 connections connections usable in sequence program 100 327 87 185 606 56 30 units segment 0 5 1 64 1024 units all hub 12 units 1k word x 16 areas 6k wor
113. of other Application station Writes data to word ZNWR device of other Application station Clears error ERROR Error ERRCLR LED off error log Fundamental process clear ing Reads error ERRRD information Fundamental 2 37 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Ethernet QJ71E71 QU71E71 B2 Fundamental in the Remarks field indicates the instructions explained in the Ethernet User s Manual Fundamentals and Application indicates the instructions explained in the Ethernet User s Manual Applications Program Compatibility The sequence program of the system which uses the A series QnA series Ethernet interface module e g A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71QE71 B2 hereafter referred to as the E71 and the program of its host system can be utilized for the system using the QU71E71 E71 program usability for data communications which uses the QJ71E71 is be described below ibility with Compatibility with eS s Program for QnA Program for A Series 3 Series Ethernet Ethernet Module Module Compatible Host system side However only data in Compatible program Note 1 PLC is accessible in Note 5 6 MC protocol Note 7 PLC side program Compatible l l Note 1 neompauble Note 2 3 4 Note 1 In any of the above cases performance and communications timings are incompatible so communications may not be made by utilizing the program as it is Always check operation when utilizing the program
114. of the software and user s manual of corresponding modules in PDF format are included Note 3 Compatible mode Usable x Not usable 5 Windows 95 8 Windows 98 N Windows NT 4 0 Note 5 Please contact local Mitsubishi office for availability of Japanese Chinese and German version software Note 4 Compatible OS MODEL LIST Compatible Mode A Q O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O x O x O x O x O O O O Q O O O O Q O O O O O O O O O QO O O O O QO QO Com patible OS 5 8 N 5 8 N 5 8 N 5 8 N 5 8 N 6 21 gt xe O D Q O D n MODEL LIST Software Peripheral Devices Product Special module data setting software Connection cable PC card adapter Type SWOIVD MINIP E 13JF37 SWOIVD ROMA E 13JF34 SW11X AD51HPE 13J733 SW1IVD AD71P 13J916 SWOD5C AD75P E 13J948 SWOD5C QD75P E 13J973 QC30R2 Q2MEM ADP Outline MELSECNET MINI S3 data setting software MINIP Operating Manual packed with product Intel HEX format ROM write compatible data transfer software ROMA Operating Manual packed with product A1SD51S BASIC programming software AD51HP Operating Manual packed with product AD71 AD72 positioning data setting software AD71P Operating Manual packed with product AD75 positioning data setting software CD ROM AD75P E Operating Manual packed with product QD75 positioning data setting
115. operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation ON time on LLT measured Operation based on time on LLT No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Processed as BMOV instruction No operation No operation 2 166 3 AMODE CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW e Overview Of A MOde cccccscecesseseeeessneeeessneeeeseneeees 3 1 Comparison between Q Mode and A mode 3 2 e Compatibility of A Mode PLC with Ans eeee 3 3 2 MODEL SELECTION e General Specifications eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseetees 3 4 e Applicable Model List eeeeeseeeeeesneeeeesneeeeeneeees 3 5 e System Configuration eeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeneesseeeeeeetaes 3 9 e CPU Modules QO2CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A ra ARa eea aE dialer Or OND ie raed Heese esl 3 10 e CPU Built in Memories Memory Cards 008 3 15 e Network Special Function Modules I O Modules 3 18 e Current Consumption Calculation eeeeeeeees 3 19 e Power Supply Modules A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P WAG Ore ees iia ees MeN eee hen ak MN e
116. or more free space needed Disk drive CD ROM drive required Display Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or more Connection with QD75 When set data is downloaded to the QD75 or the operating status is monitored SWOD5C QD75P E is not directly connected to the QD75 Since SWOD5C QD75P E and QD75 make data communications via the Q mode CPU module the SWOD5C QD75P E installed personal computer is connected to the Q mode CPU module by RS 232 or USB For the RS 232 and USB cables refer to the explanation section of Programming Peripheral Devices Separately Prepared Product Product Description Manual SWOD5C QD75P E Operating Manual Note 1 The PDF format data of the same contents as those of the above separately prepared manual are included in the CD ROM of SWOD5C QD75P E MODEL SELECTION CURRENT CONSUMPTION Current Consumption Calculation Overview Calculation Method The PLC system operates on 5VDC supplied from the Make sure that the current consumption is as indicated in power supply module the following relational expression The sum of 5VDC current consumption values of the Rated output current of power supply module gt sum of CPU I O intelligent function and network modules loaded 5VDC current consumption values of modules on one base unit should not exceed the rated output Power supply module e g Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Base unit e g Q35B Q65B current of the power supply module If so the number of CPU
117. or receives data using 16 1k word using fixed fixed buffers Sequence program is buffers required for data transfer Random access Sends or receives data using random buffer accessing buffer 6k words in QJ71E71 communications PLC reads writes data from to random accessing buffer and host system accesses that data to make Ls communications Sending receiving Communicates data using e mail Can by e mail also be used with PLC monitoring function to transmit alarm information etc automatically by e mail Number of registerable e mail addresses 16 Number of monitoring function conditions 1 Main functions 2 38 Function Router relay function Data link instruction File transfer Broadcasting Sub functions test Existence check Error information Self loopback Ethernet QU71E71 QU71E71 B2 Outline MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Can send data to personal computer etc located beyond router Instructions for data communication with other PLCs MELSEC via Ethernet Can transfer file by FTP Can read write programs and data stored in CPU module as files Sends data to all other personal computers etc within same segment using UDP IP Checks whether other nodes are operating properly or not if communications had not been made with other nodes for given period Use GPPW to set existence confirmed not confirmed and time interval At occurrence
118. points are used use the RSET instruction to select the block used Specify file registers with RO to R32767 in any block H RSET K1 H RO designation Memory card for block 1 Ro MOV DO RO H R32767 H RSET K2 H RO designation mA for block 2 MOV DO Ro H R32767 RO 2 Consecutitve designation The device symbol ZR is used to specify file registers beyond 32k points without changing blocks File registers in multiple blocks can be managed as a single series of file registers mov po zR32768 Memory card ZRO Block 0 ZR32767 mov po zressss H ZR32768 Block 1 ZR65535 ZR65536 Block 2 The file register capacity is not fixed For the register capacity that may be secured refer to the explanation section of MODEL SELECTION MEMORY Nestings N Nestings are devices used with master control MC MCR instructions Pointers Pointers are devices used with branch instructions and 4096 points can be used in all programs run by a CPU module The pointers are used in the following applications 1 Designation of jump destination of jump instruction CJ SCJ JMP 2 Local pointers and common pointers are available as the call destination designating pointers of the subroutine call instruction CALL CALLP Local pointers Local pointers are used for a jump and subroutine program call in each program A call can only be made fro
119. processing You can set up to 16 interrupt program starting conditions The conceptional diagram and execution conditions are shown below Receive processing request interrupt iia Normal Receive sequence completion program ie eee ol processing program Interrupt sequence ren conditions hold QJ61BT11 Interrupt conditions RX ON OFF RWr Match mismatch with set value Communication W Interrupt program starting condition devices Set Device RX RY SB ON OFF Match mismatch with set value Description E Remote operation From the GPPW software linked to a PLC on CC Link remote programming can be performed for another PLC 2 58 CC Link QJ61BT11 Master station Local station Termination J resistor eg a Remote I O station The following functions MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Appearance lt LED indicators Station number setting switches Transmission speed mode setting switch TTS loo PA O IL XY can be performed for the PLC CPU at master local station Write to PLC Read from PLC Local station Monitor Test e RS 232C cable oO iii 2 GPPW Part names software package Name GPP function peripheral device E Dedicated instructions The following dedicated instructions are available for transient transmission
120. program No SD1008 Diagnostic error Error individual Low speed program SD16 information D210 Clock year month SD510 No SD1009 Annunciator detection Error individual SD520 i SD17 information D211 Clock day hour x1 Current scan time SD1015 CPU operation status Error individual D521 SD1017 Te 3 SD18 information D212 Clock minute second x1 Current scan time 1 Minimum scan time Error individual SD522 ns A SD1018 SD19 information D213 Year day of the week x1 Initial scan time 1 Current scan time Error individual D523 u SD1019 s i SD20 information D220 Display data x1 Initial scan time 1 Maximum scan time Error individual s SD524 a R SD1021 SD21 information SD221 Display data 1 Minimum scan time 1 Current scan time Error individual SD525 ar A SD1022 SD22 information SD222 Display data x1 Minimum scan time 2 1 sec counter Error individual SD526 f SD23 information D223 Display data x1 Maximum scan time SD1035 R block No Error individual SD527 A SD24 information SD224 Display data x1 Maximum scan time SD1124 Annunciator quantity indivi D52 A SD25 Error individua SD225 Display data Sl oe Current scan time D1125 Annunciator number information x 1 Error individual SD529 7 SD26 information SD226 Display data 1 Current scan time SD1126 Annunciator number SD532 Ta P SD50 Error reset SD227 Display data 1 Minimum scan time SD1127 Annunciator number d F SD533 n x SD62 Annunciator No
121. registration L e g computer link communication DSHEIS6R ev ell registration L Ethernet communication Aral yl B ZU E Tag setup utility G Cell area cut T Cell area copy C Cell area paste P Cell area delete 5 Auto save setup k Auto print setup O Search E Cell area name validfinvalid E Auto start up set release B test R version R SOFTWARE PACKAGES EXCEL Communication Support Tool SW3D5F OLEX E Alarm Summary and Comment Indications lt When OLEX function is set to button Read gt An alarm message preset for error occurrence can be Button click Sa oT 1 displayed with the date time and a comment can be Read meie 3 R M B ss 4 1 10 84 shown with the change of the corresponding device value a Soars 7 4 30 65 lt Alarm summary gt 2 5 4 2 Valve 1 malfunction E Material shortage 0 ue E En TE Device values are read to the cell nee apanar Fuel ererage Minar trouble area specified with the OLEX function Fuel shortage Tank 1 malfunction ajoj o Valve 2 malfunction Simple Communication using Tags lt Comment gt Oto 100 Lower than normal temperature When OLEX merely uses a tag having such information 101 to 200 Normal operation 201 to 300 Higher than normal temperature TA as the device types and device numbers in th
122. remote monitoring control system easily Mail server Q series PLC Q series PLC Mail address attached file GOT Connection The GOT A900 series graphic operation terminal can be connected using a CPU RS 232 port or serial communication module By connection to the Q series high speed bus you can achieve a much _ faster response graphic operation terminal g Ay in AA A on without being conscious of the different complicated communication protocols of Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CC Link RS 232 Automatic Notice from PLC A serial communication module RS 232 422 connected to a personal computer has a function to automatically send data from the PLC to the personal computer when a given condition holds Also on Ethernet this function can be used for e mail transmission Use of this function permits rapid transmission of alarm occurrence information or the like without waiting for polling from the personal computer oil A Network Parameter Settin In the Q series the network parameter setting screens for Ethernet MELSECNET 10 H and CC Link are included in the GPP function software Ethernet CC Link or other network setting which had to be made in sequence programs can be made on the screen reducing programs and improving viewability of settings Protocol Open system Fixed buffer TCP Active Send No procedure 2 TCP Unpassive Receive Procedure erst m
123. rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV 16 points common common terminal TB18 ON indication LED 18 point terminal block M36 screws ABA AAA ABOoEeAoo n o eo o Sal el eT m o gt joo o gt no lo 7 nm olol S o N m f pr o Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm max R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used 5VDC internal current 80mA consumption Weight kg Ib 0 17 0 37 External Connections Terminal Block Number B Y02 B Y03 B Y04 B Y05 Y06 YO7 Y08 YO9 YOA YOB YOC YOD YOE YOF 12 24VDC COM Internal 2 97 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Output Modules E QY80 transistor output module source type ee ee Specifications 12 24VDC 20 15 ET 4A 10ms or less T 0 1mA or less FUSED 0 2VDC TYP 0 5A 0 3VDC MAX 0 5A Response time OFF ON ms or less ON OFF ims or less rated load resistive load Surge suppressor Zener diode Zener diodes ooo O 4A x 2pcs connected in parallel 6 7A equivalent unchangeable fuse blow capacity 50A Yes When fuse blows LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supp
124. routine program program ee 1 J P100 Sub routine z 7 7 7 program H Wait type program Scan execution type program P100 Sub routine program Interrupt program Interrupt program E Cyclic execution type A cyclic execution type program is run every user set time execution cycle The execution cycle can be set to each cyclic execution type program within the range 0 5ms to 60s When multiple cyclic execution type programs have reached their execution cycles at the same time they are run in order of lower to higher program numbers until all of them are run Program Run Control Instructions Program run control instructions are used to change the program execution type when the CPU module is during RUN during program execution These instructions cannot change the execution types of the programs stored in the built in flash ROM and memory card which are not read to the program memory There are four different program run control instructions 1 PSCAN instruction 2 PLOW instruction 3 POFF instruction 4 PSTOP instruction E PSCAN instruction Changes an initial execution type program low speed execution type program or wait type program into a scan execution type program at END processing E PLOW instruction Changes an initial execution type program scan execution type program or wait type program into a low speed execution type program at END proce
125. serial communication module RS 232 RS 422 conversion CPU programming port CPU programming port QnACPU ACPU motion controller QCPU Q mode A mode QnACPU ACPU motion controller USB communication F CPU programming port QCPU Q mode Windows 98 only Ethernet Ethernet QnACPU AGPUL a communication board Se RTOFTIERNG acon controller MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 ct MELSECNET 10 QCPU Q mode A mode communication board ale See bade CC Link CC Link re eee CC Link module QCPU Q mode A mode communication board Note 1 aes Note 2 QnACPU ACPU CC Link G4 communication LLT RS 232C RS 422 conversion CC Link G4 module D or later Software version CC Link module software version N or later motion controller QCPU A mode QnACPU ACPU motion controller GPPW logic test function LLT communication offline debugging Note 1 Q mode CPU connection requires software version W or later Note 2 The CC Link modules for A mode QnACPU ACPU and motion controller require software version N or later SOFTWARE PACKAGES Basic Communication Support Tool SW3D5F CSKP E Connection Configuration List The following table lists the connection configuration and required interfaces Connect
126. stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local standby master and intelligent device stations26 1 to 64 Communication specifications Item Max overall cable length and inter station cable length System configuration 1 made up of remote I O and or remote device stations only CC Link QJ61BT11 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Continued Specifications Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote device Master station Remote device Remote device Remote device station station station station 2 2 1 1 1e Max overall cable length gt amp 1 Inter station cable length between remote I O or remote device station and remote I O or remote device station k 2 Inter station cable length between master station and adjacent station CC Link dedicated cable 100 Q termination resistor used Inter station cable length Commu nication speed 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps 30cm 11 82 inch to 59cm 23 25 inch gt 1m 39 4 inch or more Max overall cable length 1200m 3934 43 ft 600m 1967 21 ft 200m 655 74 ft 110m 360 66 ft 150m 491 8ft 50m 163 93 ft 80m 262 3ft 100m 327 87 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable 130 Q termination resistor used Commu a cable vaci nication eng e 156kbps 1m 200
127. to back up the built in RAM memory of the CPU module at a power failure The Q2MEM BAT battery is used to back up the Q2MEM 1MBS memory card at a power failure E Appearance Q6BAT Q2MEM BAT E Specifications Type Q6BAT Q2MEM BAT Nominal voltage 3VDC 3VDC Battery type Manganese dioxide Graphite fluoride lithium battery lithium battery Current capacity 1800mAh 48mAh Storage life 10 years Note 1 4 years Note 1 Applicable model Q02 Q02H QO6H Q2MEM 1MBS Q12H Q25HCPU Note 1 The storage life indicates the life during which the battery can be used independently of how much battery current is consumed Extension Base Cables Overview An extension cable is used for connection between the main and extension base units or between the extension base units Appearance Model list Qco6B ac30B QC50B 0 6 1 2 3 5 1 97 3 93 9 84 16 39 Main base unit Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension base unit Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B 0 35 0 48 0 88 1 32 Directions for use When the above extension cables are used together the QC100B Usable base unit overall distance of the extension cables should be within 13 2m 43 28ft External Wiring Connectors for I O Modules Overview Loaded onto a connector type I O module and used for wiring an external device These connectors are classified into six different types according to the used connector and I O module types
128. wire type input 2 channels 32 32pt F Kaka No converter module A1S62RD4 Pt100 4 wire type input 2 channels 32 32pt F No A1S68TD Thermocouple input 8 channels 32 32pt F No Analog I O module A1S63ADA Analog input 2 channels analog output 32 32pt F No 1 channel No 2 channels Temperature control A1S64TCTT S1 0 42 module F A1S64TCTTBW Thermocouple input 4 channels with 32 32p 0 42 No S1 heater wire breakage detection function No A1S64TCRT S1 No S1 wire breakage detection function A1S62TCTT S2 F A1S62TCTTBW Thermocouple input 2 channels with 32 32pt F 0 28 S2 heater wire breakage detection No No function A1S62TCRT S2__ Pt100 input 2 channeis s22 F 28 No S2 wire breakage detection function Pulse catch 16ft6ptY oo55s No Analog timer 0 055 No Interrupt module 32 32ptF __ _0 057 Yes Positioning module 48 first half 16pt os0 No S latter half 32pt _o No Pulse output 2 axes manual pulse No generator usable SSC network compatible 1 axis 32 32pt F 0 70 Yes SSC network compatible 2 axes SSC network compatible 3 axes Pulse train output 1 axis 32 32pt F 0 70 Yes Pulse train output 2 axes Pulse train output 3 axes A1SD774M____ 4 axes motion control modue s2 2ptF 0 90 No MELSECNET MINI S3 Master module for optical twisted pair 32 48 32 48pt F 0 35 E Yes master module ca
129. x Unusable gt xe ne D Q O D n 6 23 MODEL LIST GOT A900 Graphic Operation Terminal Product A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT A950GOT Type A985GOT TBA A985GOT TBD A985GOT TBA EU A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B A975GOT TBD A975GOT TBA EU A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA EU A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A970GOT SBA EU A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A970GOT LBA EU A960GOT EBA A960GOT EBD A960GOT EBA EU A950GOT SBD A950GOT LBD A951GOT QSBD A951GOT QLBD A953GOT SBD A953GOT LBD A956GOT SBD A956GOT LBD A950GOT SBD M3 A950GOT LBD M3 Outline 800 x 600 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 12 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity 800 x 600 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 12 24VDC power supply built in high intensity 800 x 600 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 12 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity CE UL cUL compliance 640 x 480 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in wide angle vision 640 lt 480 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity 640 x 480 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in high intensity 640 lt 480 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in wi
130. you can select whether refresh processing is carried out at the END instruction of the last run scan execution program or at the END instruction of the corresponding scan execution program QCPU CPU operation processor RL At input refresh Input area for peripheral device Data memory for input X Area for communications with input module At output refresh Data memory for output Y To increase the response capability I O control in an interrupt program may require updating of I O data at a point during program run before refresh processing is carried out at the END instruction In that case devices DX input and DY output may be used as O For example when you describe X100 X100 data obtained by refresh processing is used for operation When you describe DX100 operation is executed using the X100 data of the same input module acquired at the point of executing its contact instruction This also applies to output 2 15 MODEL SELECTION CPU Q Mode CPU Modules QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU E Operation processing The Q mode CPU has three operation modes RUN STOP and PAUSE Each operation mode performs the following operation processing Operation processing in RUN mode 1 In the RUN mode sequence program operation alternates between step 0 and END FEND instruction 2 When the CPU goes into the
131. 0 050 0 090 0 050 0 075 0 430 0 065 0 105 0 150 0 080 0 080 0 095 0 010 0 020 0 040 0 020 0 020 0 040 o oO q a 0 55 0 75 0 80 0 80 0 28 0 24 640 0 330 0 125 0 345 0 180 0 30 0 40 0 56 0 82 B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to Restrictions No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List E When using QA1S6 _ B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to the next section System Configuration Number of Points Current Product Type Description Occupied Consumption A Restrictions pe me VO Allocation power supply 5 slots a SEE power supply 8 slots Extension cable 0 6m 1 97ft cable for extension base ee No 1 2m 3 93 ft cable for extension base No 3m 9 84 ft cable for extensionbase No 5m 16 39 ft cable for extension bas ee No 10m 32 79 ft cable for extension A No base 240VAC 5VDC 5A output 200VAC 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A output 24VDC 5VDC 5A output AC input module 100 120VAC 16 input points terminal 16 16pt X Svea E No block 100 120VAC 16 input points terminal 16 16pt X as al No block block 200 240VAC 16 inpu
132. 0 6 0 Required memory capacity 32MB or more Hard disk free space 9MB or more Disk drive Needed for driver installation Loinen ME loppy disk drive Note 3 A multiprocessor compatible personal computer cannot be used since the driver is incompatible Note 4 The driver for MS DOS cannot access the Q mode PLC Accessories Product Description Software SWnDNF MNET10 software driver Connector BNC F connector X 1 pc attached to A70BDE J71QBR13 only Manual MELSECNET 10 Interface Board User s Manual NETWORK BOARDS CC Link Boards A80BDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 Overview Type AS0OBDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 The CC Link board can be loaded into a PCI bus slot as an optional board of a personal computer Note 1 to connect the personal computer to the CC Link system Two kinds of CC Link boards are available A8SOBDE J61BT11 supports both master function and local function of CC Link while A8OBDE J61BT13 only supports local function of CC Link Note 1 IBM PC AT and its compatibles Features Personal computer incorporated into CC Link system You can load the CC Link board into a personal computer and connect the personal computer to CC Link as a local station Adoption of PCI bus Because of compatibility with the PCI bus troublesome switching setting is not needed By merely loading the board into the PCI bus initial setting is automatically made Monitoring test
133. 0 pixels monochrome EL screen size 9 100 240VAC power supply built in CE UL cUL compliance 320 lt 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD RS422 interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD RS422 interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD Q series bus interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD Q series bus interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD RS232C interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD RS232C interface 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD external communication interface required 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD external communication interface required 1MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD RS422 interface 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD RS422 interface 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 6 24 MODEL LIST GOT A900 Graphic Operation Terminal Product Type Outline A950GOT 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD Q series bus interface 3MB built in memory PASIGO SREDNO 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD Q series bus interface 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN colo
134. 0 to 1255 For example SIO is assigned to CH1 count value coincidence interrupt and SI1 to CH2 count value coincidence interrupt on the QD61 and setting 150 and 151 to the QD61 assigns 150 to SIO and 151 to SI1 allowing the 150 or 151 interrupt program to be run on count value match Interrupt request by internal timer An interrupt program can be run at intervals of 10ms 20ms 40ms or 100ms these are default values and can be changed in increments of 0 5ms between 0 5ms and 100ms Interrupt request due to error occurrence An interrupt program can be run when an error is detected by the self diagnosis of the CPU module Macro Instructions The macro instruction function is designed to register a ladder pattern often used by the user as a single instruction to utilize it any number of times macro utilization i e the user can create an original instruction Using a macro instruction allows a ladder pattern made up of multiple instructions to be represented as a single line instruction producing effects on program viewability improvement and program standardization In macro registration registering the devices to be changed for utilization variables as VDO to VD9 ensures ease of device changes By setting actual devices to variables VDO to VD9 for macro utilization the preset devices are used for conversion into a sequence program Note 1 In the QnA PLC reading a program created using a macro instruction
135. 00 Module type High speed counter module Module side Module side PLC side 4 Setting item Buffer size Transfer word Device count CH1 Present value w100 w102 w104 W106 W108 W108 W108 w200 W202 CH1 Latch count value CH1 Sampling count value CH1 Cycle PLS count previous value CH1 Cycle PLS count present value CH1 Sampling cycle counter flag CH1 Overflow detection flag CH2 Present value n n n n n w w n n n n wj wj o CH2 Latch count value Make text file Cancel Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to monitor the data states and operating status in the high speed counter module to force the set values to be changed as required Since you can acquire the operating status without needing to know the addresses in the high speed counter module these functions are effective for system adjustment and troubleshooting The following data and functions can be monitored and tested 1 X Y device 5 Ring counter function 2 Preset function 6 Present value 3 Coincidence output 7 Overflow detection function 8 Down count command 4 Counter function 9 Count enable command selection function Monitoring testing screen sample Monitor MEE r Module information Module model name
136. 00 for your equipment as multiple screens can be selectively shown on one display a E GOT A900 series lineup Screen Size A l Display Color Displ A Supply Type Type Inch isplay Section Colors ower Supply Typ A985GOT TBA ae _ 100 to 240VAC A985GOT A985GOT TBA EU 12 High intensity TFT color liquid crystal A985GOT TBD 24VDC A975GOT TBA Wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal 256 100 to 240VAC Pa High intensity TFT color liquid crystal A975GOT A975GOT TBA EU A975GOT TBD Wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal 24VDC A975GOT TBD B High intensity TFT color liquid crystal A970GOT TBA Wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal T TBA B 100 to 240VAC he B i High intensity TFT color liquid crystal A970GOT TBA EU 10 16 A970GOT TBD Wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal 24VDC A970GOT TBD B High intensity TFT color liquid crystal T g A970GO A970GOT SBA 100 to 240VAC A970GOT SBA EU D STN color liquid crystal 8 A970GOT SBD 24VDC ee oa 100 to 240VAC A970GOT LBA EU STN Monochrome liquid crystal 2 monochrome A970GOT LBD 24VDC A OT EBA LS ae 2 yellow orange 100 to 240VAC A960GOT A960GOT EBA EU 9 High intensity EL black A960GOT EBD 24VDC wu cc STN color liquid crystal 8 eae mute ROSOCOTLED communication l aosocot LBo m3 STN Monochrome liquid crystal 2 monochrome interface built in oo eal STN color liquid crystal 8 ee ASS3GOT agsscoTisp PT communication l aos3Go
137. 0H Ethernet and CC Link the following settings can be made on the GPPW screen without programming E MELSECNET 10H Parameter Name Function Type Used to choose operating mode of MELSECNET 10 H Used to assign devices in CPU module as transfer destination of communication data in network module and CPU module device data to be transferred to network module as communication data Used to allocate LB LW LX LY link device range to each station Needed to assign parameters different from Refresh parameter Common parameter Station specific parameter common parameters to a certain station Normally not needed Inter link transfer Used to exchange communication data parameter partially between two or more networks using CPU module connected to two or more networks Routing parameter Used to determine message sending path when accessing remote CPU module which spans networks Event interrupt Used to set condition for generating interrupt signal to CPU module to start interrupt program E Ethernet Parameter Name Function Initial setting Used to set various watchdog timer values of TCP and IP address of DNS server Used to set TCP UDP protocol selection open system connection target IP address port number etc Used to set host station IP address communication data ASCII BIN selection etc Used to set host station e mail address mail server etc Used to set mail address for sending e mail Open setti
138. 0TB AC30TB AC50TB AC80TB AC100TB ACOS5TB E AC10TB E AC20TB E AC30TB E AC50TB E A6TE2 16SRN ACO6TE AC10TE AC30TE ACS50TE AC100TE A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CONS A6CON1E A6CON2E A6CON3E Outline Sink type input module sink type output module standard type Sink type input module sink type output module 2 wire type For sink type input module 3 wire type For source type input module standard type For source type output module standard type Source module input module 2 wire type Source module output module 2 wire type Source module input module 3 wire type For 0 5m 1 64ft sink module For 1m 3 28ft sink module For 2m 6 56ft sink module For 3m 9 84ft sink module For 5m 16 40ft sink module For 8m 26 25ft sink module common current 0 5A max For 10m 32 80ft sink module common current 0 5A max For 0 5m 1 64ft sink module For 1m 3 28ft sink module For 2m 6 56ft sink module For 3m 9 84ft sink module For 5m 16 40ft sink module Relay terminal module Cable for relay terminal Cable length 0 6m 1 97ft module connection Cable length 1m 3 28ft _ Application to AY42 AY42 S1 Cable length 3m 9 84ft J AY42 S4 AH42 A1SY41 A1SY42 Cable length 5m 16 40ft A1SH42 Cable length 10m 32 80ft Soldering 32 point connector standard equipped Crimp contact connection 32 point connector 40 pin connector Flat cable pressure displacement 32 point connector Soldering
139. 1 A1SJ71BR11 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 Module 1 is the existing MELSECNET Il or Module 2 is an MELSECNET 10 module for MELSECNET Il or MELSECNET B module compatible Usable Mode MELSECNET 10H O O O JO O JO oO O MELSECNET 10 O x MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 Performance Specifications MELSECNET 10H Item QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 Connection form Duplex loop type Simplex bus type Max number of link LX LY 8192 points 8k bits points per network MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points 8k bits MELSECNET 10H mode 16384 points 16k bits MELSECNET 10 mode 8192 points 8k bits MELSECNET 10H mode 16384 points 16k words Max number of link points per station LW LB LY lt 2000 bytes cyclic communication LW LB LY lt 2000 bytes low speed cyclic communication Transient transmission capacity Max 1920 bytes frame Communication speed 10Mbps Communication system Token passing Synchronous system Flag synchronization frame synchronization system Modulation system Base band system Transmission sign NRZI Non Return to Zero Inverted Manchester Cable type Optical SI QSI Coaxial 75 Q 3C 2V 5C 2V Transmission frame format HDLC conformance frame format Error control system CRC X16 X12 X5 1 and time out retry Max number of networks 239 Max number of groups 32 Number of stations connected 64 stations 1 control station 63 normal station 32 stations 1 control statio
140. 111 114 130 131 134 135 137 138 151 157 159 to 200 201 to 400 except 263 265 281 298 396 About the Copyright and Right to Use The copyright of the figures contained in the SWOD5C PIC B graphic data package belongs to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation The figures contained in the SWOD5C PIC B graphic data package may only be used by those who purchased the software duly and returned the software agreement Those who have not purchased it duly or those who have not returned the software agreement cannot use the data package You cannot distribute or sell the figures contained in the SWOD5C PIC B graphic data package as is or altered You can distribute or sell the figures after incorporating them on monitor screens etc SOFTWARE PACKAGES Graphic Data Package SWOD5C PIC B Graphic Data Samples Pipe ISO figure Tee Pump Conveyor Robot Fan Speaker Display frame Tank Keyboard Valve Lamp and pushbutton Automobile MELSEC Others Meter Motor 4 16 NETWORK BOARDS MELSECNET 10 Boards A7OBDE J71QLP23 A70BDE J71QLP23GE A7OBDE J71QBR13 Overview 3 Station 3 Station 1 i z A Station 1 Station 2 ordinary station ordinary station Station 2 Station 3 Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 32 control station ordinary station ordinary station control station control station ordinary station ordinary station ordinary station A AIA E 8g AJA
141. 12 24VDC 20 15 ae 01234567 0 1VDC TYP 0 1A 0 2VDC MAX 0 1A 01234567 n 89 ABCDEF Response time 1ms or less 1ms or less rated load resistive load Zener diode No External 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supply power 20mA at 24VDC Max all points ON 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to Short circuit protection Yes thermal protection short circuit protection e Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point e Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point 12 24VDC 0 1A Operation indicator ON indication LED External connections 40 pin connector LED Applicable wire size External wiring connector A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CONS optional block conversion module consumption kg Ib Weight kg Ib 0 15 0 33 We L B01 B02 O gAol A02 Internal 12 24VDC 12 24VDC COM1 12 24VDC COMI 2 95 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Output Modules E QY42P transistor output module sink type Transistor Output Module Sink Type Specifications QY42P 12 24VDC 20 15 0 1VDC TYP 0 1A 0 2VDC MAX 0 1A Response time ims or less ims or less rated load resistive load External 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supply power 20mA at 24VDC common Max all points
142. 12B t AnS series power supply I O intelligent function modules Q series power supply I O intelligent function modules MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List 2 Peripheral devices for QOPU MITSUBISHI WELSES Memory Card SRAM Flash ATA type QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU USB cable RS 232 cable QC30R2 A At LEEE PIE SEE A 25 S LESSEE EES ie aS EES SE SEES SSS Yi PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP Personal computer SW5D5C GPPW E E instructions for system configuration 1 The total number of I O and intelligent function modules that may be loaded into the main and extension bases is up to 64 This total of loadable modules is the same whether you use the Q6 _ B extension or the QA1S6 _ B extension Also you have a selection of base units from the 3 I O slot 3 You can use the Q6 combination but you must set the extension numbers of Q6 B and QA1S6 _ B in B to lower than those of the QA1S6 B 4 The overall distance of extension cables is within 13 2m 43 28ft 5 Different from the A and QnA series CPU modules the Q mode CPU module automatically recognizes the number of slots of the connected m
143. 14336 bytes 14337 to 16384 bytes Capacity of Network Parameter Setting 2k bytes 4k bytes 6k bytes 8k bytes 10k bytes 12k bytes 14k bytes 16k bytes Note 3 When the comment and extended comment capacities are set 1k bytes are occupied for each capacity for the system Note 4 Online sampling trace and online status latch data are stored in the extended file registers 3 17 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK SPECIAL FUNCTION I O Network Special Function Modules I O Modules Network The A mode can use the same network system as the AnS series You can use MELSECNET B MELSECNET II CC link and MELSECNET MINI modules without any changes to say nothing of MELSECNET 10 Refer to the applicable model list for the usable modules The Q2AS Q series network modules cannot be used with the A mode Special Function Modules Use the AnS series special function modules with the A mode Refer to the applicable model list for the usable modules You cannot use the intelligent function modules designed for Q2AS Q series I O Modules Use the AnS series I O modules with the A mode You cannot use the I O modules designed for Q series For the specifications of the AnS series modules refer to the MELSEC AnS PLC catalog MODEL SELECTION CURRENT CONSUMPTION Current Consumption Calculation Overview Calculation Method The PLC system operates on 5VDC supplied from the Make sure that th
144. 15 10 15 Across inputs LG outputs FG 2 830VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38ft Inputs outputs LG FG separated inputs LG FG outputs LG FG 10M Q or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester By noise simulator of 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency LED indication Lit at 5VDC output Built in unchangeable by user B where the AnS series modules will be A1S63P 24VDC 30 35 41W 81A within 1ms 5A 5 5A or more Within 10ms 500VAC across primary 5VDC 5MQ or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency 2 126 MODEL SELECTION POWER SUPPLY MODULE Power Supply Modules Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Item Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Terminal screw size M3 5 x 7 Applicable wire size 0 3 to 2mm Applicable crimping terminal Applicable tightening torque Weight kg Ib RAV1 25 3 5 RAV2 3 5 59 to 88Necm Appearance and Wiring Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Appearance and Wiring A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P E Appearance E Appearance MELSEC A1S62PN POWER MITSUBISHI O to0 240VAC CVG 4A 5VDC 3A OP 24VDC 0 6A MITSUBISHI Wiring External wiring Terminal Description ERR Output turned ve off when CPU Wiring 24VDC 0 5A detects error 4 ERR commo
145. 2047 Function input FX points 5 FXO to 4 Function output FY points 16 FYO to F Function register FD points 16 FDO to F Link direct device Device for direct access to link device Dedicated Specified format J _ _ Intelligent function module direct device Device for direct access to buffer memory of intelligent function module Specified format U G Latch power failure compensation range LO to 8191 default Latch range setting can be made for B F V T ST C W and D Remote RUN PAUSE contact Clock function Year month day hour minute second day of week Automatic leap year judgment Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 12 s d 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25 TYP 1 90 s d 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53 TYP 3 67 s d 55 C Permissible instantaneous power failure time Depends on power supply module 5VDC internal current consumption A o 60 osa foes os64 Weight kg Ib 0 20 0 44 0 20 0 44 0 20 0 44 0 20 0 44 0 20 0 44 External dimensions mm inch 98 3 86 H x 27 4 1 08 W x 89 3 3 52 D Remarks Each number of device points can be changed by parameters Note that the overall device capacity is uniform When using Q2MEM 1MBS Number of device points is fixed Parameter setting Refer to the power supply module section Note 1 Sum of the number of I O points on the main extension base directly controlled by the CPU module and the number
146. 3 Own station station 4 sending area Remote output RX Area for receiving data from master station station 1 Area for receiving data from master station station 2 Area for receiving data from master station station 3 rea tor receiving data from master station station 4 Remote register RWr Unusable station 1 Area for receiving data from master station Area for receiving data from master i n Area for receiving data from master station Remote register RWw Unusable station 1 Area for receiving data from remote device station 2 Area for receiving data from local station 3 Own station station 4 sending area Transient buffer 2 56 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QUJ61BT11 CC Link cyclic communication data Communication Method Bit transmission Word transmission H Link devices 3 GPPW programming software is used to read write or monitor the program of another PLC Description Cyclic communication 32 points I O data communications per station 4 point write read data communications per station In addition to a total of 4096 points of bit data per CC Link f a i 4 The host personal computer etc reads writes device system the cyclic communication of a total of 512 points PRESS i data from to a PLC of word data permits rapid communication with Factory Automation equipment products such as re
147. 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A 58 8N cm to 88 2N cm 5 15 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications E Performance specifications of communication boards and communication modules Performance specifications of bus boards Item A9GT QBUSS A9GT QBUS2S A9GT QBUS2SU For connection of multiple GOTs Application For connection of 1 GOT For connection of multiple GOTs for A950 P Number of bus ports Applicable PLC Q mode PLC only Q mode PLC only Q mode PLC only Weight g Ib 90 0 20 100 0 22 170 0 37 Performance specifications of serial communication boards Item A9GT RS2 A9GT RS4 Interface connector 9 pin D sub male inch screwing type 9 pin D sub male inch screwing type Communication speed 38400bps 38400bps Weight g Ib 90 0 20 98 0 22 Performance specifications of network and data link modules Network Module Data Link Module Item A7GT J71LP23 A7GT J71BR13 A7GT J71AP23 A7GT J71AR23 A7GT J71AT23B 10Mbps 20Mbps 125k 250k 500k 1 Communication speed a ps p 10Mbps 1 25Mbps multiple transmission Mbps Communication system Token ring system Token bus system Polling system Synchronization system Frame synchronization system T issi h a pat Duplex loop Simplex bus Duplex loop Bus 30km 98360 66feet 3C 2V 5C 2V 125kbps When using SI cable eem 10km 10km 1200m 3934 43feet Overall distance between stations 983 6 feet feet an nen eoom 1967 21f8e1 A
148. 5C QSET E SW5D5C GPPLLT E SW5D5C GPPW E SW5D5C GPPW E5 SW5D5C GPPW E10 13J966 13J974 13J975 13J976 13J980 SW5D5C LLT E SW5D5C LLT E5 SW5D5C LLT E10 13J977 SWOD5C CNVW E SWOD5C CNVW E5 SWODSC CNVW E10 13J949 SWOD5C QADU E SWOD5C QDAU E SWOD5C QSCU E SWOD5C QCTU E SW3D5F CSKP E SW3D5F CSKP E5 SW3D5F CSKP E10 SW3D5F CSKP E20 13J954 13JF57 SW3D5F OLEX E SW3D5F CSOLEX E SW3D5F OLEX E5 SW3D5F OLEX E10 13J955 SW3D5F XMOP E SW3D5F CSXMOP E SW3D5F XMOP E5 SW3D5F XMOP E10 13J956 SWOD5C PIC B Software Peripheral Devices Outline Ladder list SFC programming simulation tool SWOD5C QADU QDAU QSCU QCTU CD ROM Ladder list SFC programming simulation tool CD ROM Ladder list SFC programming CD ROM Ladder list SFC programming CD ROM license product for 5 licenses Ladder list SFC programming CD ROM license product for 10 licenses Starting GPPW optional GPPW Operating Manual Startup packed with product GPPW Operating Manual optional Note 1 GPPW Operating Manual SFC optional Note 1 GPPW Operating Manual MELSAP L optional Note 1 Simulation tool CD ROM Simulation tool CD ROM license product for 5 licenses Simulation tool CD ROM license product for 10 licenses LLT Operating Manual optional Note 1 CSV file TXT file data conversion CD ROM CSV file TXT file data conversion CD ROM license product for 5 licens
149. 6B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B A9GT QC200BS A9GT QC300BS A9GT QC350BS AC30R4 25P AC100R4 25P AC300R4 25P AC30N2A AC30R2 AC30R2 9P AC30R2 9SS FX 232CAB 1 FX 232CAB 2 QC30R2 AC30PIO 20P Outline GOT memory capacity 10M bytes flash PC card formatted GOT memory capacity 20M bytes flash PC card formatted GOT memory capacity 40M bytes flash PC card formatted For connection of parallel printer for A950GOT 1 channel Memory card interface with parallel printer for A950OGOT 1 channel each External I O interface for A960 A97L1 A985GOT 12 24VDC 8 input points 64 keyboard input points 16 transistor output points External I O interface for ASS0GOT 12 24VDC 8 input points 64 keyboard points 16 transistor output points CD ROM for Windows 98 95 NT 4 0 0 6m 1 97ft cable 1 2m 3 93ft cable 3m 9 84ft cable 5m 16 40ft cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable 10m 32 79ft cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable 20m 65 57ft cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable For purchasing contact Mitsubishi 30m 98 36ft cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable Electric System Service Co Ltd 35m 114 75ft cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable 3m 9 84ft cable CPU connection RS 422 cable 10m 32 79ft cable CPU connection RS 422 cable 30m 98 36ft cable CPU connection RS 422 cable For personal c
150. 9E 38 to 3 40282E 38 Note 3 Character string JIS8 code Note 4 Note 1 Bit devices can also handle numerical data by using digit designation In digit designation bit devices are Example Setting range by digit designation of inputs XO to XF XF XC XB X8 X7 X4 X3 XO K1 designation range 4 points K2 designation range K3 designation 8 points range K4 designation range 12 points 16 points Numerical Range That Can Be Handled Designated Digits K2 8 points K3 12 points K4 16 points 0 to 4095 32768 to 32767 Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points Note 2 Bit devices can also handle numerical data by carrying out digit designation In digit designation bit devices are represented by designating them in 4 bit increments Example Setting range by digit designation of inputs X0 to XF X1F X1C X1B X18 X17 X14 X13 X10XF XCXB X8X7 X4X3 X0 K1 designation range K2 designation 4 points range K3 R designation 8 points range K4 3 designation 12 points pqange gt K5 R designation 16 points range K6 R designation 20 points range K7 designation 24 points range 4 aio 28 points ke range 32 points i w Numerical Range That Can Be Designated Digits Handled K1 4 points 0 to 15 K2 8 points 0 to 255 K3 12 points 0 to 4095 K4 16 points 0 to 65535
151. A06 A05 Coincidence EQUI wt output point No 1 Aos A05 Coincidence EQU2 aAa Zy output point No 1 ane B06 B05 Coincidence EQU2 Wy output point No 2 eres Bos B05 Coincidence Sean B02 B01 12 24V A F circuit YA re output point No 2 A02 A01 OV To fuse blow B02 B01 12 24V ee M aoao Terminal numbers A08 A07 A04 A03 B08 B04 and B03 are A02 A01 OV not used Terminal numbers A03 A04 B03 and B04 are not used 2 110 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D Performance Specifications Item QD62D Counting speed changing setting 200k 100k to 200kPPS 500k 200k to 500kPPS 100k 10k to 100kPPS 200k 100k to 200kPPS 10k 10kPPS max 100k 10k to 100kPPS 10k 10kPPS max Number of channels 2 channels Count input Single phase multiplied by one single phase multiplied by two two phase multiplied by one two phase multiplied by signal two two phase multiplied by four CW CCW EIA Standard RS 422 A ON OFF Differential line driver Note 1 level characteristics 24V 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 UP DOWN preset counter ring counter functions Refer to the separate list counting speeds External 5 12 24V Note 2 input ON OFF 5V ON 4 5 to 5 5V 2 to 5mA OFF 2V max 0 1mA max ON 2 5 to 5 5V 2 to 5mA characteristics OFF 1V max 0 1mA max ON 10 8 to 13 2V 2 to 5mA OFF 4V max 0 1mA max ON 21 6 to 26 4V 2 to
152. A1SJ61BT11 A1SJ51T64 A1SJ71J92 S3 A1SJ72J95 A1SJ71B62 S3 A1SJ71SL92 A1SD51S A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 A1SJ71PB96F A1SJ71PB92D A1SJ71DN91 A1S62LS A1SSs91 A1SD59J S2 A1SD59J MIF AC20MIF L A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711ID2 R4 A1SD321D1 A1SD321ID2 A1SG60 A1SG62 A1S TA32 A1S TA32 3 A1S TA32 7 A1S TB32 Outline SI QSI optical cable duplex loop for control ordinary master station Coaxial 75 cable simplex bus for control ordinary master station SI QSI optical cable duplex loop for remote I O station Coaxial 759 cable simplex bus for remote O station Repeater for coaxial bus 100 240VAC power supply Repeater for coaxial bus 240VDC power supply 752 termination resistor for coaxial bus Ethernet interface module 10BASE2 Ethernet interface module 10BASE5 Master local module for twisted pair Master module twisted pair cabtire cable JPCN 1 master module twisted pair JPCN 1 slave module twisted pair Power distribution control equipment transmission signal unit interface module for B NET Max 128 control I O points S LINK master module Intelligent communication module Modbus ASCII RTU slave RS 232 x 1ch Modbus ASCII RTU slave RS 422 485 x 1ch Profibus FMS Client or Server Profibus DP Master DeviceNet Master Absolute position detection by dedicated sensor PLC simple monitoring module Memory card interface module Memory card module Connection
153. A1SJ71SL92 Extension base QA1S6 OB S LINK Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor The A1SJ71SL92 can be used with QA1S6 _B E Connectable remote modules The S LINK equipment of SUNX Ltd can be connected E Restrictions on use with Q mode No restrictions MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Performance Specifications Item Transmission system Synchronization system Transmission protocol Transmission speed Transmission distance Connection system Number of branches Number of control I O points External 24VDC 10 power permissible supply for ripple p p 10 S LINK or less system Across D G 1 60A across 24 0V 5 00A Number of I O points occupied Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib Specifications Bidirectional time sharing multiplex transmission system Bit synchronization system frame synchronization system S LINK protocol 28 5kbps Signal trunk Max overall distance 200m 655 74feet 400m 1311 48feet when booster is used T branching multidrop connection multidrop connection 24V 0V D G with short protection across D G 10 branches max 128 points 24VDC 10 permissible ripple p p 10 or less Across D G 1 60A across 24 0V 5 00A 32 points 0 2A 0 27 0 59 2 71 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Profibus FMS Profibus DP interface A1SJ71PB96F A1SJ71PB92D
154. A6TBX70 E For negative common source 0 6 1 32 type input modules 3 wire type Accessories 3 23 MODEL SELECTION EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS External Dimensions E QA1S3_B Q A1S6 External Dimensions LIB structural dimensions AU w Tre Unit mm inch CC Link remote I O z AOB TBT 1 ry T RRR osrisissery OSIIN IHSIANSLIN 151 9 5 98 142 9 5 63 2 A N hole AJ65BTB2 1 Dimensions between Base module mounting holes a QA1S33B 130 110 110 235 5 12 10 05 4 33 4 33 9 26 QA1S35B EA 305 12 EA 12 02 QA1S38B EA 410 EA 94 16 15 QA1S65B Fa 5 295 Fa 41 11 62 QA1S68B EA 400 EA 55 15 76 AJ65BTC1 3 E Connector terminal block convertor modules A6TB36 2 fA 3 24 78 5 3 09 5 mounting hole a ft a lay 2g g EEE ERE gla 2B og olo Bo o s Be by Bo i o oly ojo SR ae ge SE i No ge x ij ba L 21 A P507 652 56 46 a cose amp pa 5 mounting hole Est Ea A6TB54 A6TBX70 2 4 5 mounting hole
155. B 0 2 3P about 7 5mm 0 30inch in OD Mitsubishi Cable Industries make Note 1 Refer to lt Separately prepared manuals gt for separately prepared manuals lt Software gt Type Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E For sequence programming or later For Ethernet parameter O setting communication module A Communication support software for personal A computer SW3D5F CSKP E Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note2 The software products shown above or later version are usable E QJ71C24 R2 RS232C cable ie J _ h R HEE 24 lt QJ71C24 R2 accessories gt Product Manual Description Serial Communication Module User s Manual Hardware lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment must be prepared separately Product Description RS 232 7 0x127 P HRV SV 8 5mm 0 33inch or more in cable OD Oki Electric Cable make specify the number of pairs in QJ71C24 R is equipped with D Sub 9P female connector Note 4 Refer to lt Separately prepared manuals gt for separately prepared manuals lt Separately prepared manuals gt Serial Communication Module User s Manual Fundamentals Specifications functions Pre operation procedures Maintenance inspection troubleshooting Basic communications method in MC No protocol bidirectional protocol Note 5 About data package Dedicated instructions Serial Communication
156. B QA1S68B connection 3m 9 84ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection 5m 16 39ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection 10m 32 79ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection Refer to the AnS series module model list Note 1 The purchase order number is indicated in the manual s Type field 6 14 Product For main extension base AC input module AC DC input module DC input module TTL CMOS input module DC input module Contact output module Triac output module Transistor output module TTL CMOS output module Transistor output module DC input transistor output module DC input contact output module Type A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A1SX10 A1SX10EU A1SX20 A1SX20EU_ A1SX30 A1SX40 A1SX40 S1 A1SX40 S2 A1SX41 A1SX41 S1 A1SX41 S2 A1SX42 A1SX42 S1 A1SX42 S2 A1S42X A1SX71 A1SX80 A1SX80 S1 A1SX80 S2 A1SX81 A1SX81 S2 A1SX82 S1 A1SY10 A1SY10EU A1SY14EU A1SY18A A1SY18AEU A1SY22 A1SY28A A1SY28EU A1SY40 A1SY41 A1SY42 A1S42Y A1SY50 A1SY60 AiSY6sA A1SY71 A1SY80 A1SY81 A1SY81EP A1SY82 A1S60E A1SH42 A1SH42 S1 A1SX48Y58 A1SX48Y18 MODEL LIST Q A Mode Common Model List Outline 100 240VAC input 5VDC 5A output 100 240VAC input 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A output 24VDC input 5VDC 5A output 100 120VAC 16 points terminal block 100 120VAC 16 points terminal block 200 240VAC 16 points terminal block 200 240VAC 16 point
157. BASE UNITS Base Units Q3 O B Q6 1B QA1S6 G B Overview Handling instructions The base unit serves to supply the CPU I O and 1 The right hand side mounting screws of the base unit intelligent function modules with 5VDC generated by the cannot be removed when an I O module is loaded in power supply module It also serves to exchange control its rightmost slot Remove the mounting screws after data among the CPU I O and intelligent function modules unloading the I O module 2 When mounting the base unit into a control panel etc Function List leave a 30mm 1 18inch or more clearance between its top and the structure or parts to ensure ease of Main base unit module replacement and reduce the influence of O Ds ESS radiated noise or heat When the wiring duct is not ee ie more than 50mm 1 97inch in height 40mm loaded 1 58inch or more clearance for other cases Applicable I O 1 O modules for Q Also leave 5mm 0 20inch or more clearances in the modules k i Mounting hole 5 pear shaped hole for M4 screw left to right direction 20mm 0 79inch or more size clearance on the left hand side when an extension Exetel 189 ria sia oo cable is plugged without removal of an adjacent unit dimensions 7 44 9 65 12 92 17 30 mm inch 98 3 86 3 Mount the base unit on a flat surface to prevent Weight kg Ib 0 23
158. CNET II 10 MELSEC s control network is highly regarded in the market for its excellent real time capabilities simple network settings highly redundant reliability typified by duplex loop and boasts the largest share in Japan and a great number of installations throughout the world In the Q mode the MELSECNET 10H inherits the features of this excellent MELSECNET II 10H and has also extra real time capabilities and data capacities to meet further market needs Field network CC Link We assume that a field network which links control devices such as PLC with sensors and drive equipment is on the lowest network level in production locations While control devices were previously linked with sensors and drive equipment by wires on a point by point basis the field network can connect multiple sensors and drive equipment with a single network cable reducing the number of wires and wiring processes When connected with intelligent equipment such as the ID system bar code reader inverter and display the field network allows production data control at network ends through transfer of various data in addition to ON OFF data and serves for improved maintenance efficiency by centralized control of equipment operating statuses In the Q mode the CC Link functions having high speed and excellent data transmission performance has been improved to ensure further ease of use Hi Seamless communication The Q mode networks are seamless
159. D9091 Self diagnostic error number number D9124 Annunciator Annunciator detection count detection count D9125 Annunciator Annunciator detection count D9126 detection count D9127 D9128 D9129 D9130 D9131 D9132 Note 1 Derived from the constant scan setting Note 2 Same as all constant scan settings Default is 100ms Note 3 The time set as a constant scan is the time of 1 scan 3 30 Sequence Program Simulation 12 LLT is not compatible with the following instructions and no operation will be performed if they are executed When a no operation instruction is executed the logic test function screen lamp is lit and that no op instruction and its step number can be displayed Non operated and processing restricted instruction list Instruction Remarks Symbol Class Program run control instruction No operation No operation IRET No operation SUB P Refresh instruction COM No operation No operation No operation Data link instruction LRDP No operation LWTP No operation RFRP No operation RTOP No operation ZNFR No operation ZNTO No operation ZNRD No operation ZNWR No operation ZCOM No operation No operation n m Display instruction PRC No operation LEDC No operation Other instructions H No operation CHKEND No operation No operation SLTR No operation STRA No operation STRAR No operation x lt No operation x lt AlxX X 2 O lt 4 x No operation m No operation
160. DE J71QLP23GE A7OBDE J71QBR13 Loopback function automatic return function loop monitoring function self diagnostic function Performance Specifications Item Connection cable MELSECNET 10 mode Communication speed Communication system Transmission path format Stations connected in one network Control station ordinary station Other network specifications Loading slot Number of boards loaded Number of slots occupied Specifications MELSECNET 10 mode incompatible with MELSECNET 10H mode 10MBPS equivalent to 2OMBPS in multiple transmission Token ring system Duplex loop 64 stations control station 1 ordinary stations 63 Ordinary station does not operate as control station Other specifications conform to those of MELSECNET 10 ISA bus slot Max 4 1 slot board Coaxial bus system A70BDE J71QBR13 3C 2V 5C 2V or equivalent 10MBPS Token bus system Simplex bus 32 stations control station 1 ordinary station 1 NETWORK BOARDS MELSECNET 10 Boards A7OBDE J71QLP23 A70BDE J71QLP23GE A7OBDE J71QBR13 Operating Environment Item Description Personal computer Personal computer where Pentium 133MHz or more and ISA bus slot half size are installed Note 3 Any of e Microsoft Windows 95 Operating system OS e Microsoft Windows 98 e Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Microsoft MS DOS Ver 6 2 Microsoft Visual Basic Ver 4 0 5 0 6 0 Programming language Microsoft Visual C Ver 4 2 5
161. E71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 MELSECNET 10 Module Type QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 AJ71QLP21 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 Serial Communication Module Type QJ71024 QJ71C24 R2 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 R4 AJ71UC24 AISJ71UC24 R2 R4 CC Link Module Type QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 If the combination of CPU module and communication module on a type basis is other than that shown in the above list the accessible range may differ from the one given 2 28 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview E When connecting via MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet Network 2 to 7 Request source GPPW CSKP Target station 2 CC Link Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Condition 5 Request Source Tyee of network 4 Type of relay Type of networks 2 Type of relay Type of target Access Range station 1 to 8 stations 2 to 7 station 1 GPPW Ethernet l MELSECNET 10 I II or I l PLC on path up to target station 2 l I Hor Ill Il 1 or IV PLC on path up to target station 1 ll I lor Ill PLC of type Il on path up to target station 1 ll Inaccessible IV PLC of type IV on network 2 MELSECNET 10 I lor Ill I lor Ill l PLC on path up to target station 2 I Hor Ill I lor Ill Il 1 or IV PLC on path up to t
162. EE A3H SW4GP GPPAEE A38A SW5GP GPPAEE A3A A6HGP SW3 GPPAEE A3H DOS SW IVD GPPA A4U Windows personal SW _ D5C F GPPW E A4U computer Note 1 SW D5C GPPW E Corresponding Note 2 type Note 1 For SW2 software or earlier Note 2 For SW4 software or earlier the A mode CPU type is listed so choose the corresponding CPU type Note 3 When the CPU type chosen is A3A A3H there are restrictions on the device memory capacities usable within programs i Usable GPP and CPU types Type A7PU A7PUS Restrictions Hand held connection possible Instructions Different in Specifications E Instructions different from those of AnS The following table lists the instructions that differ between the A mode and AnS Class Failure check Interrupt disable Interrupt enable Microcomputer program call Note 1 Note 1 When a PID function arithmetic or other utility program is used use the instructions after replacing them with the A mode dedicated instructions H Instructions added to the A mode Instruction Name CHK DI El SUB SUBP The following table gives the dedicated instruction added to the A mode Class 1ms timer setting Instruction Name ZHTIME 3 25 PROGRAMMING Peripheral Devices Overview RS 232 Connection The A mode CPU module may be programmed with the E Connection configuration diagram device used for programming the conventional AnS series or on a Windows personal computer
163. ELECTION ACCESSORIES Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors External Wiring Cables for Positioning Modules QD75 Control signal cable for connection between the positioning module QD75 and servo amplifier or stepping motor driver With external device connection cable These cables can save time and trouble for cable fabrication noise reduction shielding etc on the user side for easy use of the QD75 Type Description FA CBLQ75M2H For Mitsubishi Electric MR HA series FA CBLQ75M2J2 For Mitsubishi Electric MR J2A J2SA series FA CBLQ75M2C For Mitsubishi Electric MR C series FA CBLQ75Y2 Il Yaskawa Electric Il series FA CBLQ75P2A For Matsushita Electric Industrial MINAS A series FA CBLQ75S2PY Sanyo Electric PYO series FA CBLQ75G2 Loose wire type mating side for QD75P For connection of Oriental s stepping motor etc A single cable of 2m 6 56ft length is compatible with up to two axes Cables other than the FA CBLQ75G2P are for use with the QD75D differential output 2 135 MODEL SELECTION External Dimensions _ External Dimensions __ Dimensions Base module E R E BQ3 B Q6 _B QA1S6 __B structural 98 739 98 3 86 3 86 dimensions 130 ma 110 5 12 12 41 4 33 Unit mm inch e fign 420 ae E CC Link remote I O dimensions AJ65BTB1 16 i AJ65BTB2 16 i AJ65BTC1 32 E3 J
164. ETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 E Standby master function By setting a standby master station data link can be continued if a fault occurs in the master station When the master station returns to normal during operation performed by the standby master station it can return to data link as a standby station If the standby master station becomes faulty during operation in this status the master station on standby continues data link Master station Standby master station y station station station Master station ea Standby master station ocal remote Local remote station station station ocal remote E Remote device station registration function Using GPPW initial setting can be made to a remote device station without creating a sequence program The setting example and setting items are shown below E Setting items for remote device station registration function Setting Item Description Execution flag Setting of whether set data is valid or invalid Operating condition procedure Set write conditions execution condition Execution data Set write devices and write data E Start of interrupt program event interrupt The interrupt program of the CPU module can be started when data is received from the network and the set conditions hold This ensures compatibility with the system which requires faster
165. For Q series For A series Main base amre EUa leeiceimnedties Main base of A mode cpu Power supply I O special and QA1S3L B is used network modules are all for Ans Extension cable for Q series is used y Extension base A series compatible software is used on Windows personal of QA1S6LIB is used computer or A6GPP A8PUJ or similar A series peripheral device may be used Note that since peripheral port of A mode CPU is RS 232 RS 232 422 conversion cable is needed for use of A series compatible device of RS 422 specifications Note 4 Note 1 Some modules for the AnS series e g MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B are not usable or have operating restrictions When Using A Mode CPU Using the A mode CPU in the your current system you can enhance the CPU performance easily A2USHCPU S1 2 0 a gt gt Q02HCPU A 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 PC MIX value Note 4 The RS 232 422 conversion cable FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m 0 66feet or FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m 1 64feet is FX series P A series QnA series i available from Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd ecco e eee a program A program J Ne program J 2 Q MODE CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW e Overview of Q MOde ccccescecesseceeeessneeesesneeeseneeees 2 1 Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode 2 2 Compatibility of Q Mode PLC with AnS Q2AS 2 3 2 MODEL SELECTION e General Specifications
166. GOT B A960GOT A950GOT A953GOT Usable GOT A900 Necessary interface AQGT RS4 A9GT RS2 module RS 232C User made Connection cable cable RS 422 User made cable RS 232 S 2320 15m 49 18 feet Max cable connection length RS 422 9 S 422 200m 655 74 feet connection The A950GOT contains the RS 422 communication interface and the A953GOT contains the RS 232C communication interface and they do not need the interface module The communication speed that can be used by the A9GT RS4 and A9GT RS2 is up to 38 4kbps E MELSECNET 10 connection Usable GOT A900 Necessary interface module Connection cable Overall distance A985GOT A97LIGOT B A960GOT A956GOT e Network module A7GT J71LP23 A7GT J71BR13 Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable Conforms to network specifications Incompatible with MELSECNET 10H connection CPU device ranges accessible via MELSECNET 10 are indicated below Device Name Setting Monitoring Range X0 to X7FF Output Y YO to Y7FF Internal relay W MO to M8191 Annunciator F FO to F2047 Link relay B BO to BFFF g Latch relay L LO to L8191 3 Timer Contact TT TTO to TT255 z Coil TC TCO to TC255 estinter Contact TT CTO to CT255 CCO to C0255 Specified bit of following word Bit of word device device except index register and buffer memory GOT bit register GB GB64 to GB1023 Data register D DO to D6143 Link register W WO t
167. GRAMMING e Sequence Programs ssseeeeeeeseeeeereeerreerresrrsreeen 2 138 e Network Setting SW5D5C GPPW E csecee 2 159 e Data Conversion Software SW0D5C CNVW E 2 160 e Peripheral DeVICES cseccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeensees 2 161 4 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS e Sequence Program Simulation cccc0ee 2 162 The Q series CPU modules are available in either Q mode and A mode products which offers a wide selection of products for different purposes The Q series has been developed to be higher in performance and easier to use while simultaneously having the heritage of MELSEC s programming capabilities network capabilities various functions and operation procedures The Q mode is designed to exhibit the inherent functions and performance capabilities of the Q series It can improve functions and performance capabilities in the whole PLC system including not only the CPU but also the I O and network modules and various intelligent function modules The A mode is designed to merely improve the performance capabilities of the CPU for users with AnS PLC With the A mode only the CPU modules base units and extension base cables need to be changed in a current AnS series system The other modules and programs can be used as they are the new CPU brings about an increase in the CPU processing speed and program capacity 2 1 OVERVIEW Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode Comparison betwee
168. High speed counter Analog to digital converter module Digital to analog converter module Temperature digital converter module Analog I O module Temperature control module Temperature control module Pulse catch module Analog timer module Interrupt module Computer link module Positioning module A1SD75 cable Teaching module Positioning module servo amplifier connection cable MELSECNET MINI S3 MELSECNET I MELSECNET B Type A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D A1SD62D S1 A1SD62E A1S64AD A1S68AD A1S62DA A1S68DAV A1S68DAI AiS62RD3 A1S62RD4 A1S68TD A1S63ADA A1S66ADA A1S64TCTT S1 A1S64TCTTBW S1 A1S64TCRT S1 A1S64TCRTBW S1 A1S62TCTT S2 A1S62TCTTBW S2 A1S62TCRT S2 A1S62TCRTBW S2 A1SP60 A1ST60 A1Sl61 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SD70 A1SD71 S2 A1SD71 S7 A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 A1SD75P1 S3 A1SD75P2 S3 A1SD75P3 S3 A1SD774M A1SD75 C01HA AD75TU AD75C20SH__ AD75C20SJ AD75C20SJ2 AD75C20SC A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71132 S3 A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B A1SJ71T25B Q A Mode Common Model List Outline DC input 50kpps 1 channel DC input 100kpps 2 channels Differential input preset DC input 200kpps 2 channels Differential input preset differential input 200kpps 2 channels DC input source output type 100kpps 2 channels Analog input 4 channels Analog input 8 channels Analog output 2 channels
169. J71DN91 DeviceNet Master 32 32pt F 0 24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 Modbus RTU ASCII slave RS 232 32 32pt F 0 10 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Modbus RTU ASCII slave RS 422 485 32 32pt F 0 10 A1SG60 Blank cover for I O slot 16 16pt vacant A1SG62 16 32 64 point dummy module 16 32 64 0 060 16 32 64pt X For details of the performance specifications of the AnS series modules refer to the MELSEC A small mid scale compatible type catalog Note 1 Current consumption is the value when A1SD59J MIF is loaded Note 2 Please confirm compliance of the ID products to local laws and regurations for radio transmitting devices System Configuration MODEL SELECTION System Configuration The A mode uses the AnS series modules Use the main and extension bases and extension cables designed for Q series You cannot use the AnS series main and extension bases and extension cables E Basic configuration Load the AnS series modules on the QA1S35B or QA1S38B main base unit and QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units Power supply module CPU module battery Option memory card 0 ot i 3 in J je oe fe iy Power supply i module Input output special function A network modules qe oj o Main base unit la QA1S35B QA1S38B 1g fe Coa ojo o Extension cable QC B Extension base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B g o ol o cl 9
170. Main base 239 32pt 32pt e En A QoeH 1 1 p Parameter status 1 0 Address o z0 40 so so MESET ERE Inte Inte Intel Inte None p Status 1lig 1lig 1lig 11igl a ent ent ent ent 16pe M Unit system eror azpe 32pt s2pt azpe Unit eror Unit warning PLC diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Seimei Stop monitor Close Output Modu es Provided with Short Circuit Protection Some transistor output modules use transistors provided with short circuit protection to protect output modules from being burnt out due to a wiring mistake or external device failure Intelligent Function Module Monitoring Peet eeFoeseececcscevreceseecesesvesesesvoeocee You can confirm the operating status and error detection condition of an intelligent function module Note 2 on a monitor screen In addition the intelligent function module is monitored via a CPU module eliminating the need for separate cable connection Monitor Bee Module model name QJ71C24 Stat ONo 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Curent value Setting value al Non procedure monitor test Bidirectional monitor j Flash ROM setting Detale Current value Monite SEE reme a ag Read from modue
171. Module User s Manual Applications User registered frame function On demand function PLC CPU monitoring function Modem compatible function ASCll binary conversion function Transparent code usage method Transmission control method communications mode data communication watchdog timer changing Half duplex communication m n communications between external device and PLC CPU Interrupt program MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Protocol specification manual that describes the functions with which the MC protocol for serial communication module Ethernet module is compatible their send and receive frames and send and receive procedures Note 5 The description of the MC protocol is not given For details refer to the MC Protocol Reference Manual 2 82 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Utility Package for Serial Communication Modules SWOD5C QSCU E Overview SWOD5C QSCU E is a utility package designed to set the condition data needed to use the QJ71C24 or QJ71C24 R2 serial communication module and to read and set the error codes and other status data It is added to SW4D5C GPPW E or later The use of QSCU is not required for use of the QU71C24 or QJ71C24 R2 and initial value and other settings can be made in sequence programs However the use of QSCU removes the need for these programs and facilitate checking of the setting and operating statuses Especially when using the modem notification or other applica
172. Modules SWOD5C QSCU CE 10 ecccccccecsteesseessteeseseeesseeseneeeeeees 2 83 I O Modules s 2 2 ankd ne aiiciaeeitiii aie eieocas 2 85 Input Modules eee eeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneneneeeenseners 2 87 e Output MOdUIeS eee eeeeeeeseeteteeeeeeeeeneeteeeeteneeeeeees 2 93 e Analog to Digital Conversion Modules Q64AD QBBADV Q6BADI ceeccsesceeteeesteeseeeesseessseeesaes 2 100 e Utility Package for Analog to Digital Conversion Modules SWOD5C QADUCE c ceeseeesseseteeeteees 2 103 Digital to Analog Conversion Modules Q62DA Q64DA e eee Re eet A 2 104 e Utility Package for Digital to Analog Conversion Modules SWOD5C QDAUGCE ceeeseeeeeeeeeees 2 107 e High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D PAATE AEEA Ab Mantas A hace dans tt tek A 2 108 e Utility Package for High Speed Counter Modules SWOD5C QCTUCE wu ccececcccsseesseeesseeessseecseesseeeenees 2 114 e Positioning Module QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 ou eeececesseeeseeeteeeeees 2 115 e Positioning Module Software SWOD5C QD75P E 2 123 e Current Consumption Calculation cee 2 125 e Power Supply Modules Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN ATS62PNATS6S Piipun ann Heo eee 2 126 e Base Units Q3 _ B Q6 L B QA1S6 __ B 2 129 e Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors 2 130 e External Dimensions c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 2 136 3 PRO
173. N O MODULES Output Modules E QY40P transistor output module sink type anaa a sass Outpt Mosul Sink Type ____ Specifications 12 24VDC 20 15 as 01234587 0 1VDC TYP 0 1A 0 2VDC MAX 0 1A Response time ims or less 1ms or less rated load resistive load Zener diode No External 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supply power 10mA at 24VDC Max all points ON 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1s noise width and 25 to Short circuit protection Yes thermal protection short circuit protection Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point e Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point Operation indicator ON indication LED AAA BOER H CORRE Ph PherbPhPrbheheheEk nlmlololol slejas oN Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used consumption A Weight kg Ib 0 16 0 35 Pp External Connections Terminal Block Number __SignalName 12 24VDC External connections 18 point terminal block M3 x 6 screws Internal 2 94 MODEL SELECTION I O MODULES Output Modules E QY41P transistor output module sink type Transistor Output Module Sink Type Specifications QY41P
174. N Standby master station operation L RUN ON Data link during execution Host station ON Communications error Host station L ERR Flicker Switch setup is changed during power on SD ON Data being transmitted RD ON Data being received Used to set the station number of the module Factory setting 0 lt Settings gt Master station 0 Local stations 1 to 64 Standby master stations 1 to 64 ERR LED is lit if setting is other than 0 to 64 2 59 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 Name Description Transmission Used to set the transmission speed and operating speed mode status of the module setting switch Factory setting 0 No Transmission speed Mode 0 Transmission speed Online 156kbps 1 Transmission speed 625kbps 2 Transmission speed 2 5Mbps 3 Transmission speed 5Mbps 4 Transmission speed 10Mbps 5 Transmission speed Line test 156kbps At station number 6 Transmission speed setting of 0 Line 625kbps test 1 4 Transmission speed At station number 2 5Mbps setting of 1 to 64 a Transmission speed Line test 2 5Mbps 9 Transmission speed 10Mbps Comparison of Q Compatible CC Link and AnS Q2AS Compatible CC Link Remote I O Network Mode PLC type CC Link module type Connectable remote local station Remote I O station Communication speed Max 10Mbps Number of cyclic 0 to 7FF 2048 points points per 0 to 7FF 2048 po
175. NIERR SPBUSY SPCLR The Q mode CPU does not have the MELSECNET MINI automatic refresh function 2 66 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJT32 S3 Performance Specifications A1SJ71T32 S3 Compatible cable Optical cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Number of master modules loaded No restriction Per master module Max number of link 64 stations Note 1 stations points O refresh time 3 2 to 18ms when 64 stations are connected Note 2 Communication speed 1 5Mbps Max inter station distance 1 3 28ft to 1 3 28ft to 1 3 28ft to 50m 163 93ft 100m 327 87ft 100m 327 87ft Note 3 Note 4 Note 4 Number of I O points occupied O dedicated mode 32 points extension mode 48 points 5VDC internal current consumption 0 3A Weight 0 6kg 1 32Ib Note 1 The max number of link stations indicates that the total number of occupied stations assigned to remote modules is up to 64 However the max number of connectable remote terminal modules number of occupied stations 4 is 14 Note 2 The I O refresh time changes with the number of remote module stations connected their type and the operating mode of the master module Note 3 Communications may not be made if the inter station distance of the optical cable is less than 1m 3 28ft When the 2VTPE 1 cable Mitsubishi Cable Industries make is used the max inter station distance is 35m 114 75ft Note 4
176. Note 1 When A1SD59J MIF is connected MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List System Configuration and AnS series modules are available respectively Choose the loading bases according to the modules used With the Q mode you can use the Q series modules and For extension base cables use the Q series extension AnS series modules given in the applicable model list cables with both the Q series and AnS series module Because of the difference in size between Q and AnS bases The AnS series main extension bases and series modules bases for loading the Q series modules extension cables are unusable E Basic configuration This section provides components peripheral devices and configuration outline in a QCPU system 1 Components in QCPU system ELSES IHSIGNSLIN Y OCR Batter Memory card Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU y SRAM Flash ATA type Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q6BAT ee eee E Main base unit Q series power supply I O Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B intelligent function modules Addition of AnS series modules Addition of Q series modules O ii p 0 00 Pno aololnn Extension cable QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B QA1S6 __ extension base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B Q6 _ B extension base unit Q63B Q65B Q68B Q6
177. Note 2 The QU71E71 has no EPROM Delete an access program to E7PROM Note 3 For the QU71E71 it is not neccessary to set in the program whether communications are possible or not during PLC CPU STOP GPPW parameters are used for setting Delete the sequence program used for this setting Note 4 The LED ON status switch setting status read from the buffer memory of the QU71E71 are different from those of the AJ71QE71 Note 5 When using the file transfer FTP server function the default value of the FTP login name and FTP password specified on the external device side changes from AJ71QE71 to QU71E71 Note 6 For file access in the Q series CPU using MC protocol create a new program since a dedicated new command will be used Note 7 Can be used in the same range as that of the conventional A series CPU for read write communications MC protocol level 1 of data in the PLC CPU compatible with the conventional A series E71 Appearance connection of 10BASE5 28 0 1 1 DK For connection of 10BASE T QJ71E71 B2 Ri 29 2 1 15 23 65 0 93 Unit mm inch x1 When connecting a cable its flexing radius R1 guideline value near the connector should be cable outline x 4 or more Function List Function Outline MC protocol Reads writes data from to CPU module in communications accordance with MC protocol from host system PLC always performs passive processing Communications Sends
178. O to C255 Interrupt counters no initial e Extended counters C256 to C1023 8192 DO to D8191 Setting range 1 to 32767 times C224 to C255 by setting Count value set by word devices D W R 8192 WO to W1FFF 2048 FO to F2047 Max built in 64k points memory card 152k points 2 AO A1 14 V V1 to Ve Z Z1 to Ze 256 PO to P255 32 10 to 131 256 M9000 to M9255 256 D9000 to D9255 Max 4032 set in 64 point increments Max 3968 set in 64 point increments Selection between operation status at STOP is re output default output after operation execution Watchdog error monitor watchdog timer fixed to 200ms Memory CPU I O battery and other error detection STOP CONTINUE selection L1000 to L2047 default Latch range setting can be made for L B T C D W 1 point can be set to each RUN and PAUSE contacts from X0 1FFF Yes 128 characters Yes Number of I O points occupied and module type can be registered Sequence program operation execution and stop possible Interrupt by interrupt module or cyclic interrupt signal 10 to 190 setting can be made in 10ms increments Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Remarks Note that device usable ranges are limited depending on the programming software used MODEL SELECTION CPU CPU Modules QO02CPU A QOD2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Item Q02CPU A QO6HCPU A Remarks Year month day hour minute second day of week
179. OWER SUPPLY MODULE ON when run bad a yet by ERR Interlock circuits as pepp SZ ERR_ necessary 4 Provide external OUTPUT MODULE tuctmc interlock circuits for 1 Ni l S conflicting operations Power to output such as forward OC equipment rotation and reverse switched OFF MC2 when ERR rotation and for parts L egies contact turns OFE that could damage ee ae er In the case of the machine or cause t MC1 an emergency accidents if no Si wl 1 cd i Sa interlock were used 4 limit switch When PLC power supply is AC and output power supply is DC Switch power ON 1 2 3 4 Set CPU to RUN ERR contact turns ON When DC power is established RA2 goes ON Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 seconds 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program The power ON procedure is as follows Note Only the ERR contact of the power supply module loaded in the main base is valid The ERR contact of the power supply module loaded in the extension base cannot be used LOADING AND INSTALLATION Loading and Installation When using A mode
180. Output Module Specifications avio Number of output points 16 points solation method Rated switching voltage 24VDC 2A resistive load F 240VAC 2A COS 1 _ POint 8A common avo Response 39ABCDEF time ON OFF A Life 20 million times or more Electrical Rated switching voltage current load More than 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1 5A 240VAC 1A COS 0 7 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0 4A 240VAC 0 3A COS 0 7 300 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A 240VAC 0 5A COS 0 35 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 0 3A 240VAC 0 15A COS 0 35 300 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A 100VDC 0 1A L R 7ms 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 0 3A 100VDC 0 03A L R 7ms 300 thousand times or more Maximum switching frequency 3600 times hour Surge suppressor Dielectric withstand voltage 2830VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 ws noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV rIinPbebeh hh el bh FI m O gt oJ D e in o OHAAAAARARAAAAAHE TUE Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max consumption A Weight kg Ib 100VAC nml oloisena oN Internal circuit 2 93 MODEL SELECTIO
181. PU RS 232 port connection CPU USB port connection Serial communication RS 232 422 MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II MELSECNET B CC Link Allowed SW4D5C GPPW E or later Disallowed Disallowed method GOT A900 SW2D5C GOTRE PACK version C or later Allowed Allowed ladder monitor will be compatible soon g isallowed Allowed ladder monitor will be compatible soon owed ladder monitor will be compatible soon isallowed isallowed A D D A owed ladder monitor wi be compatible soon A Mode QO02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Programs for the current AnS series Basically there are only functions that are usable with the AnS series though some specifications have been expanded in performance For expanded specifications refer to section 2 CPU modules in this chapter For AnS series A6SIM X64Y64 cannot be used For using AnS series modules QA1S3 B QA1S6_ B Qc B A1S6 P Allowed g isallowed gt lowed Allowed Allowed owed without automatic refresh parameter setting A Allowed with automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed N letworks compatible with AnS series SW2D5C GPPW E or later Note 1 SW2IVD GPPA or later Note 1 SW3GP GPPAEE or later Note 1 Allowed Allowed GOT A900 800 SW1D5C GOTRE PACK or later SWONIW A8GOTP or later Disallowed Allowed ladder monitor possible Dis
182. RT 1 Y20 gt Transition Ly Workpiece unloaded ee fe condition 4 an Machining completed 1 Operation unit 7 END step SEC Program 2 140 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Performance Specifications of SFC Item Specifications Number of files 1 file Note 1 Number of blocks Max 320 blocks 0 to 319 Max 8192 steps in all blocks Number of SFC steps umber o p Max 512 steps in one block Number of branches Max 32 Number of simultaneously Max 1280 steps in all blocks activated steps Max 256 steps in one block Number of operation output Max 2K steps in one block sequence steps No restrictions per step Max 2K steps in one block No restrictions per transition condition Number of transition condition sequence steps Note 1 The other program execution controlling SFC program may be created The program execution controlling SFC program indicates an SFC program designed to control the start stop of a program file necessary to match the operation process of equipment E Operations in SFC Chart Name Symbol Function Main functions Step A step is an equipment process unit and is processed until the transition condition described next to that step C holds Note that when a transition to the next step is made the current step is deactivated and the coil described in the OUT instruction automatically turns off Initial step A step at the beginning of each block is
183. RUN mode the output Y status saved at STOP is re output according to the parameter setting STOP RUN output mode setting Saved output data may be cleared to perform RUN Operation processing in STOP mode 1 In the STOP mode sequence program operation is stopped by the RUN STOP switch or remote STOP or operation is stopped due to error detection 2 When the CPU goes into the STOP mode the current output Y status is saved and all outputs Y are turned off Data memory other than the output Y is held Note that the Q series output module can be set to hold the output at a STOP due to error detection Operation processing in PAUSE mode 1 In the PAUSE mode sequence program operation is stopped with the output Y and data memory status held This mode should be used carefully because outputs which are ON are kept ON and inputs which should turn OFF the outputs are ignored E Data type There are five data types that can be handled by the Q mode CPU bit word double word real number and character string The following table lists the numerical ranges that can be handled and the CPU module s internal devices which can store those values Numerical Range Bit 0 OFF 1 ON Word 32768 to 32767 Value can be handled as a collection of 4 8 12 and 16 bits Note 1 Double word 2147483648 to 2147483647 Value can be handled as a collection of 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 and 32 bits Note 2 Real number 1 1754
184. Range check code for digital to analog converted digital value Error code detected by the digital to analog conversion module Automatic refresh setting screen sample Auto refresh setting 5 Module information Module model name Q64DA Start ONo 0000 Module type D A Conversion Module Module side Module side Transfer PLC side 2 Setting item Buffer size Transfer diection Device word count CHT Digital value 1 1 lt D0 CH2 Digital value 1 1 lt D CH3 Digital value 1 1 lt D2 CH4 Digital value T T lt D3 CHT Set value check code T T gt D4 CH2 Set value check code T 1 gt D5 CH3 Set value check code 1 1 gt CH4 Set value check code 1 i gt Enor code 1 1 gt 3 Make text file End setup Cancel Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to monitor the data states and operating status in the digital to analog conversion module to force the set values to be changed as required Since you can acquire the operating status without needing to know the addresses in the digital to analog conversion module these functions are effective for system adjustment and troubleshooting The following data can be monitored and tested Target Item Digital to analog Module ready conversion Synchronous output mode status flag Synchronous output request Digital to analog converted value of each channel Each channel out
185. S 232C communication interface and does not need the interface module x The communication speed that can be used by the A9GT RS2 is up to 9600kbps E Serial communication module connection A985GOT A97_IGOT B A960GOT A950GOT A953GOT Necessary interface module A9GT RS4 A9GT RS2 RS 232C cable RS 422 cable RS 232C connection RS 422 connection Usable GOT A900 User made Connecti on cable User made Max cable length 15m 49 18 feet 200m 655 74 feet The A950GOT contains the RS 422 communication interface and the A953GOT contains the RS 232C communication interface so they do not need an interface module x The communication speed that can be used by the A9GT RS4 and A9GT RS2 is up to 19 2kbps E MELSECNET connection A985GOT A97LIGOT B A960GOT A956GOT e MELSECNETIi II B A7GT J71AP23 A7GT J71AR23 A7GT J71AT23B module MELSECNET 10 A7GT J71LP23 A7GT J71BR23 Optical fiber cable Coaxial cable Twisted pair cable Usable GOT A900 Necessary interface Connection cable Max cable length Conforms to network specifications x Incompatible with MELSECNET 10H connection 5 9 Q T gt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E CC Link connection LZ Partner maker product Master station ff s Remote O station Remote I O station gt Local station E N LIZ o
186. S2 A1SX81 A1SX81 S2 A1SX82 S1 A1SY10 A1SY10EU A1SY14EU A1SY18A A1SY18AEU A1SY22 A1SY28A A1SY28EU A1SY40 A1SY41 A1SY42 A1SY42Y A1SY50 A1SY60 A1SY60E A1SY68A A1SY71 A1SY80 A1SY81 A1SY81EP A1SY82 A1SH42 A1SH42 S1 A1SH48Y58 A1SX48Y18 A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D A1SD62D S1 A1SD62E Applicable Model List Number of Points Description Occupied 1 0 Allocation 24VDC 16 input points terminal block for 16 16pt X high speed input sink source 24VDC 16 input points terminal block for 16 16pt X high speed input sink source 24VDC 16 input points terminal block for 16 16pt X high leakage current sensor sink source 12 24VDC 32 input points connector 32 32pt X sink source 24VDC 32 input points connector for 32 32pt X high leakage current sensor sink source 24VDC 64 input points connector 64 64pt X sink source 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 output points 16 16pt Y terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 output points 16 16pt Y terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 12 output points 12 16pt Y terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 independent 8 16pt Y contact output points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 output points 8 16pt Y terminal block 100 240VAC 0 6A 16 output points 4 16pt Y 100 240VAC 1A 8 output points all 8 16pt Y points independent 100 240VAC 0 6A 8 output points all 8 16pt Y points independent 12 24VDC 0 1A 16 output points terminal 16 16pt Y bloc
187. SD290 Device assignment 1 Minimum scan time SD1128 Annunciator number A A A SD534 i y SD63 Annunciator quantity D291 Device assignment 1 Maximum scan time SD1129 Annunciator number i A SD535 A SD64 Detection table SD292 Device assignment 1 Maximum scan time SD1130 Annunciator number SD65 Detection table SD293 Device assignment P1181 Annunciator number SD66 Detection table D294 Device assignment P8112 Annunciator number 1 Same as all constant scan settings Default is 100ms 2 Derived from the constant scan setting and scan count The time set as a constant scan is the time of 1 scan 2 165 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS Sequence Program Simulation 15 LLT supports the instructions of the Q25H However some instructions have restrictions or are not supported No operation is performed for unsupported instructions The following instructions are not operated or have processing restrictions When a no operation instruction is executed the logic test function screen lamp is lit and that no op instruction and its step number can be displayed Non operated and processing restricted instruction list Class Output instruction Program run control instruction Refresh instruction Display instruction Debugging troubleshooting instruction Clock instruction Peripheral device instruction PID control instruction Instruction Symbol DELTA P DI
188. STOP switch of the CPU module Remote operation can be done to the CPU module connected with GPPW or to the CPU module connected by MELSECNET 10H MELSECNET 10 Ethernet CC Link or serial communication E Remote run Performing remote run causes the CPU module put in the STOP PAUSE mode by remote stop pause to go into the RUN mode E Remote stop Performing remote stop causes the CPU module in the RUN PAUSE mode to go into the STOP mode output Y is switched off and operation stopped i Remote pause Performing remote pause causes the CPU module in the RUN mode to go into the PAUSE mode output Y is held and operation stopped E Remote reset Performing remote reset causes the CPU module in the STOP mode or being stopped by the self diagnostic function to be reset initialized Device data other than the latch specified data are cleared E Remote latch clear Performing remote latch clear causes the CPU module in the STOP mode to clear the latch specified non latched device data 2 158 PROGRAMMING Network Setting SW5D5C GPPW E Overview With MELSECNET 10H Ethernet and CC Link placed as major networks of the Q mode network compatible functions are incorporated in the GPP function software package for Windows hereafter referred to as the GPPW to enhance the functions and performance capabilities and ensure ease of use Network Parameter Setting In the network parameter settings of MELSECNET 1
189. SX42 A1SX42 S1 A1SX42 S2 A1S42X A1SX71 Description Program capacity 28k steps number of I O points 4096 points basic instruction processing speed 79ns Program capacity 28k steps number of I O points 4096 points basic instruction processing speed 34ns Program capacity 30k steps number of I O points 4096 points basic instruction processing speed 34ns SRAM card 1M bytes including usable space of 302k bytes AnS series module loading base for power supply 3 slots AnS series module loading base for power supply CPU 5 slots AnS series module loading base for power supply CPU 8 slots AnS series module loading base for power supply 5 slots AnS series module loading base for power supply 8 slots 0 6m 1 97ft cable for extension base 1 2m 3 93ft cable for extension base 3m 9 84ft cable for extension base 5m 16 39ft cable for extension base 10m 32 79ft cable for extension base Battery for program memory standard RAM 100 240VAC input 5VDC 5A output 100 240VAC input 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A output 24VDC input 5VDC 5A output 100 120VAC input 16 points termina block 100 120VAC input 16 points termina block 200 240VAC input 16 points terminal block 200 240VAC input 16 points terminal block 12 24VDC 12 24VAC input 16 points terminal block 12 24VDC input 16 points terminal block sink 24VDC 16 input points terminal block for high speed input sink
190. T logo removable 5 piece set Attachment Conventionally used model Replaceable model A77GT 96ATT A77GOT L L S3 L S5 CL CL S3 CL S5 A960GOT A85GT 95ATT A850GOT A95LIGOT A87GT 96ATT A77GOT EL EL S3 EL S5 A870GOT EWS A8GT 70GOT EW EB _ A960GOT A87GT 97ATT A870GOT SWS TWS A8GT 70GOT SW SB TW LB A970OGOT Stand A9GT 80STAND Debugging stand for A985GOT A9GT 70STAND Debugging stand for A975 970 960GOT A9GT 50STAND Debugging stand for A950GOT Memory card Q1MEM 64S Memory capacity 64k bytes for QNACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant Q1MEM 128S _ Memory capacity 128k bytes for QNACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant Q1MEM 256S _ Memory capacity 256k bytes for QnACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant Q1MEM 512S Memory capacity 512k bytes for QNACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant QiMEM 1MS Memory capacity 1M bytes for QNACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant QiMEM 2MS Memory capacity 2M bytes for QNACPU SRAM PCMCIA 2 1 compliant gt xe O D Q O D n 6 25 MODEL LIST GOT A900 Graphic Operation Terminal Product Flash PC card Printer module Printer memory module External I O interface Drawing software Q series bus cable RS 422 cable Personal computer connection RS 232C cable CPU connection RS 232 cable Parallel cable Centronics compliant Type AQ9GTMEM 10MF AQ9GTMEM 20MF AQ9GTMEM 40MF A9GT 50PRF A9GT 50MIF PRF A9GT 70KBF A8GT 50KBF SW3D5C GOTRE PACK QC0
191. T A900 the data read by the bar code reader can be written to the PLC CPU Connectable bar code readers 1 TCD 6100RMG Token 2 OPT 5125 RS232C H Optoelectronics 3 BL 500 series Keyence BL 80R Keyence bar code reader BL 100R Keyence bar code reader 4 BB 530RS Aimex 5 LSH3502AHV Olympus Symbol Bar code 123456789 PLC CPU GOT Written to PLC CPU as ASCII code Overview and Features E Compatible with severe environment and operation The display section of the GOT A900 is compatible as standard with the IP65F waterproof dustproof oilproof standard for use in a wide variety of environments E EC Directive compliant A985 A975 A970 A960GOT The A985GOT TBA EU A975GOT TBA EU A970GOT TBA EU A970GOT SBA EU A970GOT LBA EU and A960GOT EBA EU comply with the EC Directives The EC Directives are laws stipulated by the European Union EU E CRT output A985GOT Containing a CRT interface SVGA 1 channel the A985GOT can show the same screen as the display screen of the GOT A985 on its large screen CRT E Software packages Drawing function A screen can be created by merely choosing objects moving image function from among a wide selection of templates and placing them on the screen After completion of screen layout you can set monitor devices etc fis pos fibres J fie fo
192. TWARE PACKAGES Basic Communication Support Tool SW3D5F CSKP E Instruction To use the ladder logic test function LLT GPPW and ladder logic test tool LLT are required separately Error Viewer Function The error viewer gives you a quick view of the errors that occurred Also it leaves a history to tell you when errors had occurred Communication Support Software Tool Error viewer basic middleware LEL Log View Help Type Date andTime Time Source Eror No Message Contents Shared Device Function Used to set bit and word devices on a personal computer Via the shared devices you can make inter program communication on the same personal computer or make communication between personal computers on the MELSECNET 10 A EM and ED devices on EM and ED devices of each P other accessiblel Windows NT 4 0 accessible a 2 eA Personal computer EM ED Windows NT 4 0 CSKP CSKP MELSECNET 10 r 1 r Personal computer Personal computer EM ED Windows 95 98 Windows NT 4 0 ea lt EM and ED devices do not exist PLC Device Monitor Function Use of the device monitor utility allows the monitoring and data changing of the specified devices Device status checking
193. Use the Q61P A _ modules with the Q3 _ A1S62PN and A1S63PN power supply modules with the QA1S3 loaded Performance Specifications E Performance specifications Item Applicable base unit Input power supply Input frequency Input voltage distortion factor Input max apparent power Inrush current Rated 5VDC output current 24VDC Over 5VDC current protection 24VDC Overvoltage protection Efficiency Permissible instantaneous power failure time Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Noise immunity Operation indication Fuse Application Rated switching voltage current Minimum switching load Response time Life Contact output section Surge suppressor Fuse B and Q6 Q61P A1 a3 B Q6 B 100 120VAC 10 15 50 60Hz 3Hz 5 or ess 105VA 20A within 8ms 6A 6 6A or more 5 5 to 6 5V 65 or more Within 20ms 24VDC 0 5A 5VDC 1mA less No No ERR contact Contact turned off opened normally closed contact at CPU error stop OFF gt ON 10ms or less ON gt OFF 12ms or Mechanical 20 million times or more Electrical Rated switching voltage current 100 thousand times or more power supply B where the Q series modules will be loaded Use any of the AnS series A1S61PN B or QA1S6 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62PN B QA1S3 B QA1S6 200 240VAC 100 120VAC 10
194. W3D5F CSKP E basic SW3D5F OLEX E Excel Interface board communication support tool communication support tool Needed depending on communication path SW3D5F CSKP E basic SW3D5F XMOP E MELSECNET 10 CC Link communication support tool monitoring tool interface board interface board Commercially available Ethernet board 4 3 SOFTWARE PACKAGES Basic Communication Support Tool SW3D5F CSKP E In addition the bit and word devices of the PLC can be used in the personal computer so that you can handle data as if you are using the PLC Overview The SW3D5F CSKP E basic communication support tool is designed to create a communication program on a personal computer without regard to the complex communication protocol of a network for connection of the personal computer and PLC Since CSKP can handle a number of communication methods for the MELSEC PLC using common functions you can use a common application program if the communication method is changed according to your application Minimum program modification is needed e g communication setting change Personal computer Bit device EM Word device ED Only when Windows NT 4 0 is used Communication can be made with specified PLC easily without regard to communication protocol HP diel Compatible PLC MELSEC data link library QCPU Q mode A mode COM port communication Computer link
195. a Thailand Indonesia India Service Network Econotec AG Geva Elektronik Handelsgesellschaft Mecco Medicion Control S A Foneca Limitada Autocont Control Systems s r o INEA MPL Technology Sp z 0 0 GTS M S A Manufacturing Pty Ltd STC Techno Seoul Co Ltd Ryoden International Shanghai Ltd Ryoden International Ltd Setsuyo Enterprise Co Ltd Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte Ltd Felexible Automation System Sdn Bhd F A Tech Co Ltd P T Autoteknindo Sumber Makmur Messung Systems Hinterdorfstrabe 12 CH 8309 Nurensporf Wiener Strasse 89 A 2500 Baden Gran via Deles Corts Catalanes 133 4 E 08014 Barcelona Estrada de Taboeira 87 89 Esgueira P 3800 Aveiro Nemocnicni 12 CZ 70100 Ostrava 1 612300 Domzale Ljubljanska 80 UL Wroclawska 53 PL 30 011 Krakow Fahri Gizden Sok No 22 Hacaloglu Apt K Gayrettpe 80280 Istanbul Bramley 2018 Johannesburg South Africa 1F Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg 660 11 Deungchon dong Kangseo Ku Seoul 157 030 Korea 3F Block5 Building Automation Instrumentation Plaza 103 Cao Bao Rd Shanghai 200233 China 10th Floor Manulife Tower 169 Electric Road North Point Hong Kong 6F NO 105 Wu Kung 3rd RD Wu Ku Hsiang Taipei Hsine Taiwan R O C 307 Alexandra Road 05 01 02Singapore 159943 60 Jalan USJ10 1B 47620Uep Subang Jaya Selangor D E 1138 33 34 Rama 3 Road Yannawa Bangkok 10120 Kompleks Agung Sedayu Propertindo Blok HNo 4 Jl M
196. a Changes target position during positioning Can also change speed Sets command in position flag when remaining distance up to positioning address has become less than preset distance at end of positioning Adjusts acceleration deceleration of control Starts multiple axes simultaneously Equivalent to simultaneous start in special start Description Returns set data stored in flash ROM of QD75 to factory settings The following two methods are available 1 Using sequence program 2 Using QD75 software package Stores backs up currently executed set data in flash ROM The following two methods are available 1 Using sequence program 2 Using QD75 software package Switches signal logic according to externally connected device MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT Positioning Module FUNCTION MODULES QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Main sub function combination list Changing A Others function Limit function Main Function OPR retry function Home position shift function Electronic gear function Speed limit function Torque limit function Software stroke limit function Hardware stroke limit function Speed changing function Override function Torque changing function Step function Skip function M code output function Teaching function Command in position function Backlash compensation function Acceleration time changing function Acceleration deceleration processing fu
197. a MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q pata BOOK Opening up new possibilities for Factory Automation with more compact faster and easier to use PLCs es PEF EAGLE INHER The assets accumulated for the A and QnA series can be utilized effectively for the Q series ajelnj lo piii olaj gt jojo x oja m m o Windows Microsoft Excel Visual Basic and Visual C are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Other product and company names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners m Features SPACE EFFICIENT Having about 60 of the conventional AnS series mounting area the ultracompact Q series contributes to equipment space saving Refer to P 1 1 OPTIMIZED CONFIGURATION Program capacity Max 252k steps 8192 points of I O control allowing optimal configuration of small to large scale systems Refer to P 1 3 HIGH PERFORMANCE ims processing of 12k steps opens up possibilities for high performance and precision CONtrOl rreren Refer to P 1 2 Improved debugging A wide variety of functions designed for program design and debugging efficiency nS E E TE Refer to P 1 8 USER FRIENDLY Development and maintenance efficiency is improved with a user friendly comfortable Windows comprehensive env
198. ade to an event which occurs asynchronously with the program scan of the PLC e g data receiving from a network or count value match of high speed counter A cyclic execution program is started and run at predetermined time intervals High accuracy can be provided if you use this program in the processing of areas which will particularly influence machining accuracy The cyclic time intervals can be set to 0 5ms 60s E Ordinary scan execution program 0 END 4 pm f 3 wi 3 i 2 Ig D W Cyclic execution program qma mm qm eS eR aS O gt a Se ia 3 o Ve amp gt lt gt 0 5ms 0 5ms NE Oa ON FEATURES OPTIMUM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Production facility control grows more and more sophisticated Also it is necessary to process large volumes of production data e g more precision production control quality control and recently resources energy control in consideration of global environment To meet such needs the Q series is designed to handle large volumes of programs and data Program Capacities The Q series has a wide assortment of CPU modules having 28k 60k 124k and 252k step program capacities enabling a selection of the CPU module which matches the machinery equipment control capacity HICPU program capacities steps Q02CPU QO2HCPU ak QO6HCPU 60k Q12HCPU 124k Q25HCPU 252k Number of Control I O Points and Number of I O Modules The Q series can control a
199. ain and extension model to the 12 I O slot model Whichever base units you combine the total number of loadable modules is up to 64 2 You may combine the Q6 _ including the main B and QA1S6 _ B up to 7 extension bases as you like Up to 8 bases bases and allocates the I O numbers Refer to the QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The next page shows the I O numbers assigned when the base unit setting is the automatic mode and I O assignment is not made Applicable Model List MODEL SELECTION Q35B 5 slots occupied 4s Slot No o 1 2 v o o alal gt rom fe O fe fo eles Ee a3 s s 8 6 Q Q Q ge S Oo a D D w N points points points points I O numbers assigned in terms of I O points of slots z Output module R Output module a O number allocating sequence X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50 Slot No of extension base unit 1 XOF X1F X3F Y4F Y8F li assigned the number next to Extension cable Q65B 5 slots occupied the last slot No of main base unit 5 6 7 8 9 2 eof oj 2 edleslesl a amp Fol Soa oo So amp SEISE E gt 22 asleslaslas 2 Vacant slot p
200. al device data are stored into the CPU module built in standard RAM drive 3 or memory card RAM drive 1 The devices usable as local devices are the internal relays M edge relays V timers T ST counters C and data registers D and their ranges are set in parameters In the QnACPU module the devices set as local devices act as local devices in all programs In the Q mode however you can select whether local devices are used or not per program Using local devices exchanges the local device data of the memory card RAM or standard RAM and the device data of the CPU module after program run increasing the scan time by the exchange time In a program which does not use local devices data exchange is not made and program switching time is shortened Exchange time when the number of local device points is 1k word Exchange Time ms CPU Type Memory card RAM Standard RAM Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Note 1 Exchange time differs from the above when both the memory card RAM and standard RAM are selected as the save areas of local devices When M7000 and later have been set as local devices a i they can be used independently in programs where M7000 and later are executed 1 1 1 Program A Memory card i 1 1 For program A 1 1 pega ae See a r M7000 Ji Internal relay aj f A Yi2 ON OFF data of M7000 ON OFF i 1 1 4 M7000 Yeager i F bi
201. aller than that of the conventional compact model AnS series E Mounting area comparison Aisyso Mes _fRR Aisxai Aisya AJ 8B 98mm 3 86inch y MITSUBISHI 5 slot main base 245mm 9 65inch Depth 98mm 3 86inch 8 slot main base 328mm 12 92inch 12 slot main base 439mm 17 30inch i Mounting Freedom SOU er ae sar The Q series has a wide assortment of 5 8 and 12 slot bases The freedom of mounting space allows reduction in the number of required bases E Base unit types Number of I O Slots Main Base Extension Base Mounting Size mm inch 5 Q35B Q65B 245 9 65 X98 3 86 8 Q38B Q68B___328 12 92 X98 3 86 12 Q312B Q612B 439 17 30 X98 3 86 Note 1 The base units are designed for the Q series I O intelligent function and network modules The AnS series modules cannot be loaded on the base units given in the above table 1 1 gt Main and extension bases are the same size Link e a a a a The Q series has increased affinity with CC Link for easier use Using the GPPW network setting screen you can set the network parameters and the automatic refresh of the remote I O signals to the CPU internal memory In addition you can make automatic setting of initial setting data to remote device stations such as the analog to digital converter and high speed counter so that you can carry out programming without
202. allowed Allowed ladder monitor possible owed ladder monitor possib O owed owed adder monitor possib adder monitor possible o A A A A owed ladder monitor possible Note 1 Depending on the software version there are restrictions on the program capacities CPU internal device capacities etc For details refer to Programming A MODE Note 2 The above table gives general usability and connectability for comparison of the Q mode and A mode Since there may be restrictions on usable connectable products always check details in the applicable model list and corresponding model explanation sections OVERVIEW Compatibility of A Mode PLC with Ans Compatibility of A Mode PLC with AnS The following table indicates the compatibility between A mode PLC programs and AnS series programs Note that the following table gives general information only and details should be checked in the corresponding module explanation sections Item Compatibility with AnS General program The same programs as in AnS are usable Ethernet Host system side The same programs as in AnS are usable program PLC side The same programs as in AnS are usable MELSECNET 10 The same network parameters and programs as in AnS are usable CC Link The same programs as in AnS are usable Serial Host system side The same programs as in AnS are usable communication program PLC side The same programs as in AnS are usable Oth
203. ams Multiple Programs In a PLC control is generally exercised with a single program Hence facility initialization processing automatic operation manual operation data collection communication related processing and others are described in one program resulting in a large program for a complex system thus making it difficult to create debug and maintain the program This will also make it difficult for maintenance staff members other than the engineer who created it to understand the operations of that program The Q mode allows a program to be divided into multiple programs and processed function by function or process by process It has such advantages that program division by purposes makes individual programs smaller and clear purposes make programs easy to understand In addition purpose based program division will increase program utilization efficiency standardizing the programs Creation of programs process by process Built in RAM built in ROM Division into Machining process t gt Program B process by process processings Outgoing process gt Program D Built in RAM built in ROM Division into Main processing gt Program B function by function processings Program C Built in RAM built in ROM Division into f gt Program B function by function processings gt Program C Program For programs to be co
204. an time communications status of each station and error status 2 159 PROGRAMMING Data Conversion Software SWOD5C CNVW E Overview The SWOD5C CNVW E data conversion software package for Windows hereafter referred to as the CNVW is software designed to make mutual data conversion between other format data text format data CSV format data and GPPW handled data instruction list device comment It allows CAD created data to be utilized on GPPW for facility design or GPPW created data to be utilized for design on CAD increasing design efficiency A Operation preparation circuit u nN 1 4 4 5 o 7 E Operating environment Since CNVW is used by adding it to GPPW SW3D5F C GPPW E or later GPPW must be installed in advance Data conversion function The following data can be converted by CNVW Conversion Factor Conversion Data CSV format data gt GPPW Instruction list format data Device comment Text format data gt GPPW format Instruction list data Device comment GPPW format data text format Instruction list data Device comment GPPW format data gt CSV Instruction list format data Device comment SAFET xT COVER je MELSEC series GPP A SAMPLE Proj Edit Find Replace Convert View Onine Diagnostics Tools Window Help Safety eouibment Safety cover x2 READY Operation ready Oil pressure p ON when ready New project ala Qpen project
205. an be accessed since their device areas are secured but they do not have inherent SD functions In addition the unsupported SD devices have the initial values of 0 zero Device Device Device Device Name Remarks Wea Remarks Name Remarks Vaan Remarks SDO Diagnostic error SD67 Detection table D295 Device assignment SD1 Error occurrence time SD68 Detection table SD296 Device assignment SD2 Error occurrence time SD69 Detection table SD297 Device assignment SD3 Error occurrence time SD70 Detection table SD298 Device assignment SD4 te SD71 Detection table SD299 Device assignment SD647 File register capacity SD5 ee SD72 Detection table SD300 Device assignment SD648 R block No Error common A 3 SD6 information SD73 Detection table SD301 Device assignment Error common x SD7 information SD74 Detection table SD302 Device assignment Error common r F SD8 information SD75 Detection table SD303 Device assignment Error common F SD9 information SD76 Detection table SD304 Device assignment Error common SD412 SD10 information SD77 Detection table 2 1 sec counter Error common SD414 A SD11 information SD78 Detection table 2 2n sec clock setting Error common SD415 2n millisec clock SD12 information SD79 Detection table 2 setting Error common z SD13 iitormati n SD200 CPU switch status SD420 Scan counter SD14 Annunciator number SD201 LED status en E A SD15 ror common SD203 CPU operation status SD500 Run
206. an execution program independently of whether the constant scan setting and low speed execution program running time setting have been made or not 8 A cyclic execution program is run if its cyclic time interval has been reached on completion of the processing of scan execution program and cyclic program 9 LLT can use all device memories of the Q mode CPU Note that it cannot use the link direct devices JnXn JnYn JnBn JnWn JnSBn and JnSWn resulting in no operation 10 OPERATION ERROR occurs if a device range is exceeded in indirect designation using the index register 11 In real number processing instructions the ladder logic test tool LLT checks their real number ranges strictly OPERATION ERROR occurs if any value entered cannot be evaluated as a real number 12 The following parameters are invalid if set Parameter PLC name setting PLC system setting PLC file setting PLC RAS setting I O assignment Device setting Program setting Boot file setting SFC setting Network parameters Setting Item All invalid Items except timer time limit setting STOP RUN output mode and common pointer No are invalid e Target memory of file register is invalid e Comment file used for instructions is invalid Target memory of device initial value is invalid e Target memory of file for local devices is invalid Error check is invalid Items other than op
207. an ordinary step Reset SFC Symbol Function Series transition a Selective branch an Transits execution to the next step when the transition condition holds Executes only the step whose condition occurs first among multiple transition conditions arranged in parallel Simultaneously executes all of multiple steps arranged in parallel Parallel Lo 2 Ah branch a Causes a jump to the step specified within the same block Block end Terminates a series of processings in that block 2 141 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs E Memory Capacity How to calculate the memory capacity of an SFC program is indicated below SFC program capacity 2 8 x largest block number Step 1 capacity of block 0 capacity of block 1 capacity of block n Capacity of one block 2 number of SFC chart steps refer to the following table number of ladder program steps within one SFC step number of ladder program steps within one transition condition Number of SFC chart steps Symbol Number of Steps Step initial dummy block start Series transition selective 4 x number of transition branch selective coupling conditions Parallel branch 2 2 x number of branches Parallel coupling 2 2 x number of coupling branches 1 2 x number of re branches after coupling Block end jump 2 142 PROGRAMMING Sequence Progr
208. and host system The 16 1k word fixed buffers available for the QJ71E71 are used by allocating them as sending or receiving buffers to or from any equipment E Communications of large volumes of data with personal computer The communications function using random access buffer is available as a way to transfer 1k word or more data In data communications using random access buffer up to 6k words of data can be transferred Large amounts of data can be transferred by use of the random access buffer communications function if data capacity is insufficient in fixed buffer communication max 1k word E Communications with remote locations automatic notice Using the e mail communication function you can send or receive up to 6k words of data to or from a remote computer as an attached e mail file By setting automatic notice in transmission from the PLC the QU71E71 monitors the user set notice conditions PLC CPU status and device value at fixed intervals and automatically sends e mail when the notice conditions are true Note that up to 16 e mail addresses can be registered for transmission 2 36 Ethernet QU71E71 QU71E71 B2 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK E Communications with other PLCs The communication function using data link instructions is available for read write of device data and any data to from other PLCs In communications using data link instructions read write of device data and any data from one PLC
209. angga Dua Raya Jakarta Pusat 10730 15 Electric Sadan lll M 1 D C Bhosari Pune 411026 SERVICE NETWORK Tel 41 1 838481 1 Fax 41 1 8384812 Tel 43 2252 85552 Fax 43 2252 48860 Tel 34 3 4227700 Fax 34 3 4322847 Tel 351 34 315800 Fax 351 34 315804 Tel 42 69 6152111 Fax 42 69 61 13562 Tel 38 61 718000 Fax 38 61 721672 Tel 48 12 6322885 Fax 48 12 6324782 Tel 90 212 2749427 Fax 90 212 2661450 Tel 27 11 444 8080 Fax 27 11 444 8304 Tel 82 2 668 6567 Fax 82 2 3665 4965 Tel 86 21 6475 3228 Fax 86 21 6484 6996 Tel 852 2887 8870 Fax 852 2887 7984 Tel 886 2 2299 2499 Fax 886 2 2299 2509 Tel 65 473 2308 Fax 65 476 7439 Tel 60 3 733 1280 Fax 60 3 733 6613 Tel 66 2 295 2861 Fax 66 2 295 2865 Tel 62 21 336292 Fax 62 21 330378 Tel 91 20 7128927 Fax 91 20 7128108 6 29 gt xe O D 2 O D n SERVICE NETWORK Asia Philippines Edison Electric Integrated Inc 24F Galleria Corporate Tel 63 2 634 8691 CenterEdsa Cr Ortigas Ave Fax 63 2 634 5899 Quezon City Metro Manila Philippines Flexible Automation System Coporation 3F Unit A P amp L Condominium Il Tel 63 2 804 0605 South Super Hgwy Palanan Fax 63 2 551 2585 Makati Metro Manila Oceania Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty Ltd 348 Victoria Road Postal Bldg Tel 61 2 9364 7777 No 2 Rydalmere NSW 2116 Fax 61 2 9684 7245 New Zealand MELCO Sales New Zealand Ltd 1 Parliament S
210. ant to ensure efficient production and appropriate quality control and to achieve reductions in equipment sizes and costs by labor saving and wiring reduction The Q mode inherits the conventional MELSEC network and offers a network with advanced performance functions and user friendliness Features Hierarchical network Assuming a three level network the Q mode offers network products optimum for respective applications Information network Ethernet We assume that an information network is on the highest network level in production fields Designed to transfer production control information quality control information facility operating status and other information between the PLC or facility controller and the production control computer the information network assumes the use of the most general purpose Ethernet Ethernet accepts not only a wide variety of computers such as Windows and UNIX type personal computers but also various Factory Automation equipment The Q mode has functions which make the best use of the Ethernet features and utilize Ethernet easily Control network MELSECNET 10H We assume that a control network which links control devices e g PLC and CNC is on the middle network level in production sites Designed to transfer data directly related to the operations and motions of machinery and equipment between the control devices the control network is required to have excellent real time capabilities MELSE
211. arget station 1 IV IV PLC of type III or IV on network 2 CSKP Ethernet l I Ior Ill I Il lor IV PLC on path up to target station 1 II or Ill I Ior Ill PLC of the same type as relay station 1 on path up to target station a e A Cee IV PLC of type III or IV on network 2 MELSECNET 10 I lor Ill I or Ill 1 11 Hor IV PLC on path up to target station 1 IV IV E PLC of type III or IV on network 2 Note 1 The ISA bus MELSECNET 10 board and SW3DNF MNET10 driver are required to connect a GPPW or CSKP installed personal computer to MELSECNET 10 The access ranges for use of the driver of SW3DNF MNET10 or earlier are different from those in the above table 2 29 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview When connecting via CC Link Network 2 to 8 Request source Relay station Relay station Network 9 Target station GPPW 8 1 Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Request Source a Access Range Type of relay station 1 Type of networks 2 to 9 Type of relay stations 2 to 9 GPPW lor Il MELSECNET 10 I Il or Ill PLC of the same type as relay station 1 on path up to a station 1 Note 2 The PCI bus CC Link board and SW3DNF CCLINK driver are required to connect a GPPW or CSKP installed personal computer to CC Link The access ranges for use of the driver of SW3DNF CCLINK or earlier are different from those in the above table When connecting via CPU port or se
212. arts creation processes Features Wealth of parts You have a wide choice of 1351 different graphic data such as buttons tanks valves pipes and ISO figures Bitmap format data Graphic data are available in bitmap format so that you may use them in various application programs e g Visual Basic and Excel No need to install The graphic data are offered on CD ROM You can read the necessary data directly from CD ROM without installation into the hard disk Supporting two color modes TrueColor and 256 colors The package is compatible with two different color modes to correspond to various personal computer environments Operating Environment Item Description OS Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 WWW browser Internet Explorer 4 01 or later or Netscape 4 06 or later CPU Pentium 100MHz or more multiprocessor incompatible Display Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or more recommended 1024 x 768 pixels Required 32MB or more memory Hard disk free 5MB or more space Graphic Data The following table lists the number of figures per type Type Number of Figures ISO figure Note 1 348 Box 4 Automobile 16 Conveyor 21 Crane 20 Fan 8 Display frame 6 Keyboard 15 Lamp and pushbutton 361 MELSEC 313 Meter 2 Motor 10 Pipe 41 Pump 8 Robot 114 Speaker 11 Tank 18 Valve 18 Others 17 Note 1 Figures of the following numbers are stipulated in ISO7000 1989 1 to 100 110
213. ata link KB Constant Total 1to8 9to 16 17t024 25to32 33t040 41to48 49to56 57to64 number of stations ke 40 as 49 ss sz e2 es 7o are used to calculate the transmission delay time Conditions Sending and receiving side CPU modules QO6HCPU Position where network module is loaded Main base unit Number of stations Total number of stations 8 Number of cyclic data points of all stations on network LB 1024 points LW 1024 points LX LY 0 points Sending side sequence program scan time ST 1ms Receiving side seq uence program scan time SR 1ms On both sending and receiving sides cyclic data of all stations on network are to be refreshed 2 50 MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 MELSECNET 10H Mode Q T KM1 KM2x LB LX LY SB LWx16 S Wx 16 8 number of network modules 1 0 13 0 41 x10 x 10244 0 0 512 1024x 16 512x16 8 1 1 1 47ms Q T KM1 KM2x LB LX LY SB LWx16 S Sending side link refresh time T ms Receiving side link refresh time R ms Wx 16 8 number of network modules 1 0 13 0 41 x10 x 10244 0 0 512 1024 16 512x16 8 1 1 1 47ms LS KB 0 45xtotal number of stations LB LY LWx 16 8x0 001 Tx0 001 Fx4 4 0 0 45x8 1024 0 1024x 16 8x0 001 0x0 001 0x4 9 78ms TD1 ST T LSx1 SRx2 R 1 1 47 9 78x1 1x2 1 47 15 72ms Link scan time LS ms Transmission delay time TD1 ms System Equipment usabl
214. ation LW Total number of link register LW points refreshed by that station LX Total number of link input LX points refreshed by that station LY Total number of link output LY points refreshed by that station SB Number of link special relays SW Number of link special registers KM1 KM2 Constants Network Module Loaded in Extension ra Network Module Loaded in Main Base n 5 Bas nes KM2 X10 KM2 X10 QnCPU QnHGPU More time will be taken if the data refresh destination is a file register on the memory card or inter data link transfer function is to be performed Link scan time LS ms LS KB 0 45x total number of stations LS KB 0 75x total number of stations The following expressions LB LY LWx16 8x0 001 Tx0 001 Fx4 LB LY LWx16 8x0 001 Tx0 001 Fx4 LB Total number of link relay B points of all stations on network LW Total number of link register W points of all stations on network LY Total number of link output Y points of all stations on network T Total number of bytes transient transmitted during one link scan When transient transmission is made simultaneously from multiple stations during one link scan this value is the total of data lengths of frames to be transferred Number of returning stations valid only when faulty stations exist The number of returning stations indicates the number of stations which will return to network when faulty stations return to normal and reenter d
215. ation Q mode CPU module QnA Q2AS ZNWR Writes data to target station CPU A mode module AnU A2AS 2 45 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Comparison between MELSECNET 10H and MELSECNET 10 Host PLC type Applicable other station PLC type Number of cyclic points per network Number of cyclic transmission points per station Communication speed Link scan time LX LY 1 Bit LB 1Bit LW 16Bit Cyclic communications Low speed cyclic Inter PLC network and remote I O network Cable Optical SI QSI 200 250 Optical GI 50 125 Coaxial 3C 5C 2V Max number of networks Dedicated instructions Routing function ZCOM REQ ZNRD ZNWR READ WRITE SREAD SWRITE SEND RECV ZNFR ZNTO RFRP RTOP 32 bit data split prevention function MELSECNET 10H Q mode Q mode QnA Q2AS Q mode A mode QnA Q2AS A AnS A70BD series MELSECNET 10 board Q mode 0 to 1FFF 8192 points 0 to 3FFF 16384 points 0 to 3FFF 16384 points Max 2000 bytes Max 2000 bytes 10Mbps Short Inter PLC network MELSECNET 10 10Mbps Normal Inter PLC network MELSECNET 10 0 to 1FFF 8192 points 0 to 1FFF 8192 points 0 to 1FFF 8192 points Max 2000 bytes No 10Mbps Normal Inter PLC network O O simplex bus duplex loop 239 oppio opopo Note 1 MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 MELSECNET 10 A mode AnU A2AS 10Mbps Normal remote I O network
216. bbS No notification Pager receiver designation Telephone number Extemal ine dialing No extemalline dialing r Flash ROM setting p Details Wile to Fie save module Read from File read Select input module Make text file Select test Close CPU status monitoring function setting screen sample PLC CPU monitoring system setting BEE Module information Module model name 0J71C24 R2 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value Cycle time units designation min Cycle time designation 10 PLC CPU monitoring function designation Condition agreement x PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation Notification 7 Constant cycle transmission 0 Transmission pointer designation Number of outputs designation a Data No for connection designation 0000 Number of registered word blocks designation 1 Number of registered bit blocks designation 2 PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation Monitoring 7 No 1 block monitoring device Z Monitoring device designation lz r Flash ROM setting r Details Wite to Fie save module Hexadecimal input Read from Fie read Setting range 00000000 FFFFFFFF module Make text file Select test Close Automatic Refresh Setting QSCU has an automatic refresh setting function Automatic refresh is a function to automatically read the data of the QU71C24 buffer memory which st
217. below and are selected according to your applications Item QD62D I O type Differential input Sink output Source output Sink output Max counting 500kPPS speed Features 32 bit counting range There are two input channels which are independent and can count signed 32 bit binary values 2147483648 to 2147483647 respectively Counting speed switching function The max counting speed can be changed to count a wide range of pulses from high speed pulses to low frequency pulses of slow leading trailing edge Input system selection The input system can be selected from among single phase multiplied by one single phase multiplied by two two phase multiplied by one two phase multiplied by two two phase multiplied by four and CW CCW Counter type selection You can choose either of the linear counter and ring counter types CPU module interrupt function When the preset count value is reached an interrupt signal is output to the CPU module to start an interrupt program Counter selection function One function can be chosen for use from among four different counter functions Function control from external terminal The preset or counter function can be selected by applying a voltage to the external preset terminal or function start terminal Maintainability improvement The X input signal and module indicator LED indicate that a fuse blown in the external output section is detected Ease of setting b
218. bles only Intelligent communication o4o Yes dedicated sensor PLC diagnostic module ooso No Memory card module A1SD59J S2 Memory card interface module 32 32pt F 0 05 No CAE el 2 9 MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List E When using QA1S6 B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to the next section System Configuration Product ID interface module MELSEC I OLINK B NET module S LINK master JEMANET JPCN 1 master module Profibus DeviceNet Modbus Blank cover Number of Points Current Type Description Occupied Consumption A Restrictions C I O Allocation 5VDC 24VD A1SJ71ID1 R4 1 connectable reader writer 32 32pt F Yes A1SJ71ID2 R4 2 connectable readers writers 32 32pt F Yes A1SD32D1 1 connectable reader writer 32 32pt F No A1SD32D2 2 connectable readers writers 32 32pt F No I O points ee e e Wel control Gaia e a tl 128 control I O points JEMANET JPCN 1 interface for EE A Yes master station A1SJ71PB96F Profibus FMS Client Server 32 32ptF _ ose Yes A1SJ71PB92D Profibus DP Master 32 32ptF _ ose No A1SJ71DN91 32 32ptF _ o24 No Modbus RTU ASCII Slave RS 232 32 320tF o1o Yes Modbus RTU ASCII Slave RS 422 485 32 32ptF 0 10 Yes A1SG60 Blank cover for I O slot 16 16pt vacant No A1SG62 16 32 64 point dummy module 16 32 64 0 060 No 16 32 64 pt X
219. broadcast to multiple QU71C24 s connected MC Protocol Communications Rast ete No Bidirectional ongemana Protocol Protocol transmission x function in RS 422 multidrop Mode changing Communications protocol switching function paG O Transparent code Transparent code added code is set to enable data setting communication of the same value as transmission O control code conversion received data is converted into BIN interrupt program is started ES communications to access CPU module connection 2 80 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71C24 QU71C24 R2 Performance Specifications Specifications Item QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 Interface RS 232 compliant D sub 9P RS 232 compliant D sub 9P RS 422 485 compliant two piece terminal RS 232 compliant D sub 9P block Communication Protocol Line system MELSEC communication protocol Half duplex Full duplex half Half duplex Full duplex half duplex duplex Bidirectional protocol Synchronization system Asynchronous system Transmission speed bps Note 2 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 Usable when the total transmission speed of two interfaces is within 115200bps Transmission RS 232 m feet Max 15 49 18 distance RS 422 485 m feet Max 1200 3934 43 overall distance Data format 1 Data bit 7or8 1 lateral parity or none to be selected Stop bit 1 or 2 to be selecte
220. c Communication Support Tool SW3D5F CSKP E Data Link Functions CSKP offers the functions designed for Visual Basic and Visual C to allow you to make communication with the PLC CPU without regard to complex communication protocols Programming language e Visual Basic Ver 4 0 e Visual Basic Ver 5 0 e Visual Basic Ver 6 0 e Visual C Ver 4 2 e Visual C Ver 5 0 e Visual C Ver 6 0 Many Useful Utilities Setting is easy as communication parameter setting to each communication path can be made on the utility screen Also the testing utility designed to check whether settings are proper or not after making settings and the error viewer developed to confirm the error history are available to establish communication easily E Communication setting utilities Communication parameter setting utilities designed for respective communication systems e g computer link serial communication and Ethernet have a communication test function to set the communication speed communication target and others and to confirm the settings Computer link utility Baud ele Date bt Stn bt p Check Sum sen e 61 None ce C2 vai Paty p Transmission Contol Tine out veloc oN DTR DSR Control E OE a oa C No Cont Hele al if Moritring PLC 2500 ey CPU Nonea Neto Tf PLN fF
221. cable 2m 6 56ft ID reader writer interface module 1 channel ID reader writer interface module 2 channels ID reader writer interface module 1 channel ID reader writer interface module 2 channels Blank cover for I O slot 16 32 64 point dummy module 32 point crimp contact terminal block adapter 0 5mm AWG20 32 point crimp contact terminal block adapter 0 3mm AWG22 32 point crimp contact terminal block adapter 0 75mm AWG18 32 point screw terminal block adapter 0 14mm to 0 75mm AWG26 to 18 Note 1 Compatible mode Usable A Usable with restriction x Unusable External accessory Note 2 Please confirm compliance of the ID products to local laws and regurations for radio transmitting devices Compatible Mode Iolololol gt IIO ol o JOJOJOJOJO o JO O lololo OJOJOJOJOJO gt lt P lt Px Px JO JO Ol O lpp amp JO amp JO EJOyx x x Olojo 6 17 gt xe O D Q O D n MODEL LIST Accessories Shared Among Q AnS Series O Product Connector terminal block converter module Connector terminal block converter module Cable Relay terminal module Cable Soldering For crimp contact For pressure displacement Soldering For crimp contact For pressure displacement O connector For sink For source Type A6TBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 A6TBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX54 E A6TBX70 E ACO5TB AC10TB AC2
222. cannot be used as master station modules of a remote I O network system To make a remote I O network system use the CC Link system CC Link master module QJ61BT11 Features E High speed network The MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET 10H are 10Mbps token passing networks Since the transmission right is always assigned cyclically in a token passing network data transmission can always be made if the number of connections or communications with the network increase Hence this network is suitable for facility control requiring real time capabilities MELSECNET 10H is identical in communication speed to MELSECNET 10 the network module has shorter processing time to reduce the link scan time E User friendly network MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET 10H have a cyclic communication system for data communications The cyclic communication system is designed to transfer periodically or automatically the data pre specified in the network parameters and does not need programming for data transfer It also has dedicated devices of link relays B ON OFF data and link registers W 16 bit numerical data used for cyclic communication B and W operate as the shared memories of that network and can be handled as ordinary internal relays and data registers in programs so you can create programs without having to think about the network configuration Note 2 Note 2 The link relays B and link registers W are the names of data in the CPU They are calle
223. ce batch monitoring and buffer memory batch monitoring functions of GPPW In addition the monitoring and testing functions of the ladder logic test tool include a function to display ON OFF states and values in a timing chart format It enables time series operation to be acquired Timing File Device Monitor Bei p Device Enty Range of Chart Display C Auto Manual x C x2 Cx5 C XID C x20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 eR a a D1 88 D2 25 i D32 0 J H Tool Function The tool function is designed to temporarily save the data of the virtual CPU device memory and special function module buffer memory and read and use the saved data when resuming debugging work Error Detail Display Function Error detail explanation appears when an operation or similar error occurs during simulation made by LLT This function saves time and trouble taken to refer to the manuals etc and facilitates finding the error occurrence cause Differences and Restrictions As compared to the operation of the A mode CPU LLT has the following restrictions 1 LLT cannot support SFC programs 2 LLT does not support interrupt programs No operation will be performed if a sequence program is created 3 The operation result in any instruction that uses a floating point value is not equal to the actual operation result of the CPU since a rounding error is always produced 3 28 Se
224. cifications Send receive in the form of an attached file When two or more files are received the first file is received and the others are discarded Binary data or ASCII data may be selected File name bin binary asc ASCII us ascll format or ISO 2022 JP base64 Attached file cannot be divided max 6k words file When divided files are received the first file portion is received and the others are discarded SMTP sending server port number 25 POPS receiving server port number 110 lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment must be prepared separately Product Description Transceiver Ethernet Standard compatible product Product where SQETEST Signal Quality Error Test or heartbeat will operate Coaxial cable Ethernet Standard compatible product AUI cable Ethernet Standard compatible product N type terminator Ethernet Standard compatible product 12VDC power supply Power supply for transceiver Note Refer to lt separately prepared manuals gt on the next page for separately prepared manuals lt Connectable products gt Product Transceiver AUI cable Maker Type Mitsubishi Cable ET 10081 ET 10071 Industries Optic Dai Ichi Denko CNT 101 Makunika JET 803 TDK CIU 1000 Allied Telesys CentreCOM106 CentreCOM116 HLTC 100B 4022 Hirakawa Hutech Ethernet QU71E71 QU71E71 B2 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK lt Software gt Remarks or
225. city Number of Files Bytes Stored Q02 H CPU 28 QO6HCPU 60 Q12HCPU 124 Q25HCPU 252 The program stored in the standard ROM is transferred to the program memory at power on of the system and executed in the program memory When boot operation setting has been made Capacity Calculation Use the following table to calculate the capacity of the files stored in each memory drive Note that the file size increment of drive 0 is 4096 bytes and those of drives 1 to 4 are each 512 bytes If less than the size increment the capacity is calculated in the size increment Choose the memory with enough allowance since the system may set several files about 4k to 20k bytes to each memory drive automatically File Function File Capacity Bytes Parameter 11k network parameter capacity Note 2 Intelligent parameter Note 2 Program Number of steps x 4 136 Number of comment characters x total number of comments number of comment ranges x 10 Assuming that n setting number 44 x n number of device points of setting 1 number of device points of setting n x 2 66 Number of file register points x 2 Note 2 Device comment Device initial value File register 2 25 MODEL SELECTION MEMORY File Function File Capacity Bytes 72 set device type x 6 total number of set M and V points 16 total number of set T ST and C points 16 x 18 number of set D points x 2 x number of p
226. ck L were used When PLC power supply and output power 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches supply are both AC 100 The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 3 Turn ON the start switch seconds 4 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the gt xe O D Q O D n program When PLC power supply is AC and output power program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer supply is DC TM is required in the program 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 6 5 LOADING AND INSTALLATION E Fail safe measures against failure of the PLC Failure of a PLC CPU or memory can be detected by the self diagnosis function However failure of I O control area may not be detected by the CPU In such a case all I O points turn ON or OFF depending on a condition of a failure and normal operation and safety may not be maintained Though Mitsubishi PLCs are manufactured under strict quality control configure an external fail safe circuit so that a PLC failure occurring for some reason wou
227. cludes flash memory instead of E7PROM Namely if access to E2PROM is executed in the conventional program access to flash memory is made Note that communications will stop during write to flash memory Note 4 The LED ON states switch setting states read from the buffer memory of the QU71C24 are different from those of the AJ71QC24 Note 5 Access to a file in the Q series CPU by the MC protocol uses a new dedicated command and a new program should be created Note 6 The conventional A series computer link module compatible dedicated protocol MC protocol level 1 has an area inaccessible to the internal device memory of the Q mode CPU expanded from the conventional A series CPU 2 79 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71C24 QU71C24 R2 Appearance QU71C24 R2 0071024 R2 FUN QJ71C24 R1 flexing radius near terminal block Cable diameter x 4 R2 flexing radius near connector Cable diameter x 4 r1 flexing radius near crimping terminal Connectable to the degree that it is not flexed extremely Function List Outline 3ub Function User frame User defined header footer is added to sent data for registration transmission Also header footer is removed from received data Notice function When specified conditions hold data is sent to exterior automatically Global transmission Data is
228. could result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product E WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective earth conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or malfunction Use the PLC at the rated voltage of each module Using it at any different voltage can cause a fire or failure Do not connect the outputs of multiple power supply modules in parallel Doing so can heat the power supply modules causing a fire or failure LOADING AND INSTALLATION Loading and Installation Therefore it is necessary to make a circuit which can switch on the PLC power supply first Also an abnormal operation may be performed if an external power supply fault or PLC failure takes place To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading to the abnormal operation of the whole system areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents due Safety Considerations When the PLC power supply is switched ON OFF proper process output may not be provided temporarily due to differences in delay time and starting time between the PLC power supply and PLC output load power supply especially DC to abnormal operations e g emergency stop protective E i gl eat bee a Pee Dee ie and interlock circuits should be constructed outside the PLC then switched on the DC output module may provide false output instantane
229. ction 1 Ground the surge absorber E1 and PLC E2 separately 2 When selecting a surge absorber make due allowance for increases in the power supply voltage LOADING AND INSTALLATION 1 0 equipment wiring 1 Run the input and output lines separately 2 When the I O signal cables cannot be separated from the main circuit and power lines use a batch shielded cable grounded at the PLC end or in some cases at the opposite end PLC Shielded cable TAa z Input Output DC 3 Where wiring runs through piping securely ground the piping 4 Run the 24VDC I O cables separately from 100VAC and 200VAC cables 5 Wiring over 200m 656 1 7ft or further may give rise to leakage currents due to the line capacity causing false inputs This must be corrected by taking proper measures Grounding The way of grounding indicates below 1 2 and 3 1 Where possible independently ground the PLC to the protective earth conductor Grounding resistance 100 max 2 When independent grounding is impossible use the shared grounding method shown in 2 lh ofl ae cal Protective earth 2 Shared grounding Good 1 Independent grounding Best 3 Shared grounding Not allowed 3 Use 2mm or larger grounding wire The grounding points should be as near as possible to the PLC to minimize the grounding cable length 6 9 gt xe O D
230. ctions 1 The A mode CPU can communicate at up to 115 2kbps but depending on the performance of the personal computer connected it may not be able to communicate at 115 2kbps If so choose any of 57 6k 38 4k 19 2k and 9 6kbps communication speeds 2 When using the QC30R2 3m 9 84 ft cable we have confirmed that communication can be made at 115 k2kbps 3 The usable communication speed and distance of the cable fabricated by the user should be checked by the user E RS 232 RS 422 conversion cables introduced products When the dedicated peripheral device such as the AGGPP is used the RS 232 RS 422 conversion cables given below are usable Fen Peripheral Cable Type Specifications Device Type FA 0 2m 0 66ft A7PU CNV2402CBL CPU side RS232C mini DIN 6 pin A7PUS AC30R4 side RS422 D sub 25 pin A6PHP FA 0 5m 1 64ft A6GPP CNV2405CBL CPU side RS232C mini DIN 6 pin A6HGP AC30R4 side RS422 D sub 25 pin E RS 232 RS 422 conversion cable connection example For connection of A series peripheral device such as A6GPP AC30R4 cable I connection RS 232 log l RS 422 side pin number PLC side conversion 7 2 RD pin number logic 15 RD TRD U l SD 1 RD RD Hq gl m 3 SD 2 sD Hd a lt _ lt 16 SD 3 SG H MSDC Noea 1 7 8 20 SG 4 Reserved 12 13 24 25 5V 5 DR regs 4 ER 6 ER LJ gt r 17 ER l 5 DR 18 DR Chassis
231. current consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib External Wiring Q64AD For voltage input Q68ADV Q68ADI 4 points 4 channels 8 points 8 channels 8 points 8 channels 10 to 10VDC input resistance value 1MQ 0 to 20mADC input 0 to 20mADC input resistance value 250 fl resistance value 250 4096 to 4095 Voltage Voltage 0 1 25 5 C 0 to 55 C With temperature drift compensation 0 3 without 0 4 80 us channel With temperature drift compensation time is increased by 160 us independently of the number of channels used Voltage 15V current t30mA Across I O terminals and PLC power supply Photocoupler insulation Across channels No insulation 16 points 18 point terminal block Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 1 1inch max RAV 1 25 3 R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminal cannot be used 630mA 640mA 640mA 0 14 0 31 0 19 0 42 0 19 0 42 For Q68ADV Terminal Signal Name CH1 v fone H4 cam Co A68ADI CH2 2 101 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Analog to Digital Conversion Modules Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI I O and Buffer Memory Lists HE 1 0 list Device No Signal Name X00 Module ready YOO to Y08 Not used X01 Temperature drift compensation status flag X02 to X08 Not used X09 Operating condition setting completion flag Operating condition setting request XOA Offset gain setting mode status flag User range wr
232. curs network recovery may take a long time since many PLCs are connected over a wide range and cables are run in ducts and ceilings which are difficult to replace etc With emphasis on this point the MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET 10H have functions to increase reliability Loopback function Optical duplex loop system only With the optical loop cables duplexed a faulty portion is separated at occurrence of a fault such as cable breakage or PLC failure to continue normal transmission with operable stations Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station No 2 Station No 3 Station separating function Coaxial bus system only When a station becomes faulty due to power off for Station No 4 Station No 1 Station No 4 example that station is separated to continue normal Station No 3 transmission with operable stations Station Station No 1 No 2 Station 3 faulty Y Tauly Y bran Ea bran 1 a 2 Eag 3 ITT Ty Control station shifting function When the specified control station is disconnected due to a fault such as power off the ordinary station replaces the specified control station to act as a sub control station to continue communication Automatic return function When the station disconnected as a faulty station is recovered from its cause of fault it returns to the network automatically to resume data link E Network monitoring
233. d x Termination resistors are fitted to stations at both ends lt QJ71BR11 accessories gt Description QJ71LP21 BR11 MELSECNET 10H Network Module User s Manual F type BNC connector 2 51 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment manual must be prepared separately Product Description Coaxial cable 3C 2V 5C 2V JISC3501 conformance Connector plug Termination resistor Connector plug for 3C 2V 5C 2V A6RCON R75 75 Q termination resistor Manual MELSECNET 10H Reference Manual lt Software gt Type Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E For sequence or later programming For MELSECNET 10H parameter setting O Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note2 The software of the above products or later version are usable Applicable Optical Cables E Optical fiber cable specifications For purchasing of optical fiber cables consult your sales representative Applicable optical cables SI Cable QSI Cable Core clad diameter 200 220 um 185 230 um Transmission loss wavelength 830 to Max 12dB km Max 5 5dB km 880nm Applicable connector CA7003 DL 72ME CA7003 2 52 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H A6BR10 A6BR10 DC Repeater Module for Coaxial Bus 3 If the AGBR10 becomes faulty the network is broken at the A6BR10 and communication continues in The A6BR10 and A6BR10 DC coaxial bus repeater
234. d Error detection Parity check sumcheck Flow control DTR DSR ER DR control only RS 232 controllable or DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff DC2 DC4 control Line configuration RS 232 1 1 connection Note 1 RS 422 485 Total of 1 1 1 n n 1 m n n and m n is max 32 Line configuration MELSEC communication 1 1 1 n m n 11 data protocol communications No protocol 1 1 1 n n 1 1 1 ote Bidirectional protocol E Max number of data MC protocol communication 960 words per communication No protocol 3839 words No protocol and bidirectional communications cannot transfer 3839 words communication bidirectional respectively communication Loadable station Q series CPU Q mode Number of loadable modules per CPU No restrictions loadable within I O signal points Number of I O points occupied 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 28 0 24 External dimensions mm inch 98 3 86 H xX 27 4 1 08 W x 90 3 55 D Weight kg Ib 0 2 0 44 Note 1 Indicates the combination for connection of external device and CPU External device side PLC CPU side Note 2 Depending on the characteristics of the cable used the transmission distance may be less than the distance given above E Usable modem specifications Item Specifications Telephone line Subscriber telephone private line cellular phone PHS ISDN Connection line Analog 2 wire type 4 wire type ISDN line Initialization Hayes AT command compatible product Hayes AT command compatib
235. d LB and LW in the network module respectively and the data actually shared on the network are LB and LW Since the CPU cannot handle LB and LW directly LB LW data are read into the CPU module after they are shifted to B W To transfer larger volumes of data than MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10H has been increased from the 8k points LB and LW capacities of MELSECNET 10 to 16k points If link relays B and link registers W are insufficient you can use link inputs LX and link outputs LY Note that the link inputs and link outputs are different in usage from link relays and link registers and they may be used only in 1 to 1 communications MELSECNET 10H network 5 Ho Ho You can handle B000 controlled in one PLC as contact data in the other PLCs without thinking about the network configuration E Applicable cables When configuring the MELSECNET 10H network system optical fiber and coaxial cables are usable They have the following features Optical fiber cables 1 Optical fiber has high noise immunity 2 Long 500m 1639 34ft 1km 3278 69ft distance between stations for long distance configuration Coaxial cables 1 Cables can be fabricated easily by the user 2 Cables are low in price 2 43 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 W High reliability When a problem oc
236. d feed control Fixed feed control interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation control Position control Linear control Linear interpolation control Speed position switching control Position speed switching control Current value changing NOP instruction JUMP instruction FOR count NEXT Block start Ordinary start Conditional start Other control Wait start Simultaneous start Repeated start FOR loop Repeated start FOR condition Description Sets up a positioning start point mechanically using a zeroing dog stopper or like Performs positioning to zero address stored in QD75 by machine zero return Performs positioning in linear path to a position specified by address or travel Performs positioning of specified travel In 2 3 or 4 axis fixed feed control fixed feed is performed in linear path by interpolation Performs positioning in circular path to position specified by address travel sub point center point etc Outputs consecutive pulses according to command speed First exercises speed control and then turns on speed position switching signal to perform position control positioning of specified travel First exercises position control and then turns on position speed switching signal to perform speed control output of consecutive pulses according to specified command speed Changes current feed value into address set in positioning data
237. d indicates the instruction explained in the Serial Communication Module User s Manual Fundamentals and Application indicates the instruction explained in the Serial Communication Module User s Manual Applications Program Compatibility The sequence programs of the system using the A series QnA series serial communication modules A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N etc hereafter referred to as the C24 and the programs of external devices can be utilized in the system using the QJ71C24 The C24 program compatibility for data communications using the QU71C24 are described in the next column Compatibility with Programs for QnA Series Serial Communication Modules Compatibility with Programs for A Series Computer Link Modules Other end Compatible Compatible external Note that only data Note 5 device side within PLC is accessible program 1 PLC side program 1 Incompatible Compatible Note 2 3 4 Note 1 In any of the above cases performance capabilities and communications timings are incompatible and therefore utilization of programs as they are may not permit communications When utilizing programs always confirm their operations Note 2 The following instructions cannot be used with the QJ71C024 READ SWRITE SEND RECV REQ Instructions unavailable for QU71C24 Note 3 The QnA series serial communication modules such as A1SJ71QC24N contain E27PROM but the QJ71C24 in
238. d manuals introduced in the manuals packed with the products and also pay careful attention to safety and handle the equipment properly The precautions given in this section are concerned with all Q series products and describe only the items to be noted in the design stage For the precautions for individual products and the precautions for installation wiring starting maintenance usage and disposal of the products always refer to the QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and the user s manuals of the individual products These Safety Precautions classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION DANGER Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition and cause death or serious injury if not carried out properly CAUTION Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition and cause superficial to medium injury or physical damage only if not carried out properly Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by CAUTION may also be linked to serious consequences In any case it is important to follow the instructions E DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe if an external power supply fault or PLC failure occurs Otherwise accidents could result from false output or malfunction 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop pr
239. de angle vision 640 x 480 pixels 256 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity CE UL cUL compliance 640 lt 480 pixels 16 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in wide angle vision 640 x 480 pixels 16 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in wide angle vision 640 lt 480 pixels 16 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity 640 x 480 pixels 16 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in high intensity 640 lt 480 pixels 16 color TFT color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in high intensity CE UL cUL compliance 640 x 480 pixels 8 color STN color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in 640 x 480 pixels 8 color STN color LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in 640 x 480 pixels 8 color STN color LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in CE UL cUL compliance 640 lt 480 pixels STN monochrome LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in 640 x 480 pixels STN monochrome LCD screen size 10 24VDC power supply built in 640 lt 480 pixels STN monochrome LCD screen size 10 100 240VAC power supply built in CE UL cUL compliance 600 x 400 pixels monochrome EL screen size 9 100 240VAC power supply built in 600 x 400 pixels monochrome EL screen size 9 24VDC power supply built in 640 Xx 40
240. de control panel Il or less 2 or less Pollution level Note 2 Note 1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V Note 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution level 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Note 3 The PLC cannot be used under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Doing so can cause a failure Applicable Model List MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List The following applicable model list gives models usable in an A mode system Product CPU module Memory card Main base unit Extension base unit Extension cable Battery Power supply module AC input module DC AC input module DC input module Type Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Q2MEM 1MBS QA1S33B QA1S35B QA1S38B QA1S65B QA1S68B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Q6BAT A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A1SX10 A1SX10EU A1SX20 A1SX20EU A1SX30 A1SX40 A1SX40 S1 A1SX40 S2 A1SX41 A1SX41 S1 A1SX41 S2 A1
241. ded to use the functions of intelligent function modules on the screen e g make analog to digital conversion enable disable setting and the automatic refresh setting of analog to digital conversion data to CPU internal memory in an analog to digital converter module thus removing the need for programs Also sequence programs and various intelligent function modules can be monitored tested at the same time to improve the debugging of programs related to the intelligent function modules FEATURES PROGRAM DEVELOPMENTIDEBUGGING EFFICIENCY IMPROVEMENT Sophisticated machinery and equipment and increased program scale result in the increased number of program development processes The Q series has inherited and developed the program structuring and standardizing techniques achieved by the QnA series and has functions to suppress and further reduce the increase in the number of program development processes Also debugging related functional performance has been improved to increase the debugging efficiency in the stage of adjusting machinery and equipment Program Structuring Standardization d The Q series allows multiple programs made on a machinery equipment operating function basis to be created and executed The programs divided function by function can increase program utilizability and viewability The Q series compatible GPPW function software enables SFC programming which is more suitable for structuring and sta
242. dge Place Suite 200 Norcross GA 30071 7566 Paragon Road Centerville OH 45459 800 Cottontail Lane Somerset NJ 08873 4299 14th Avenue Markham Ontario L3R 0J2 AV Rio Branco 123 15 and S 1507Rio de Janeiro RJ CEP 20040 005 Del Mar Chile Travellers Lane Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB Westage Business Park Ballymount Dublin 22 Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen 69672 Lyon Bron Cedex Donauweg 10 NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Teglverksveien 1 N 3002 Drammen Tel 1 847 478 2100 Fax 1 847 478 0328 Tel 1 714 220 2500 Fax 1 714 229 3897 Tel 1 770 613 5817 Fax 1 770 613 5849 Tel 1 937 291 4600 Fax 1 937 291 4606 Tel 1 732 560 4500 Fax 1 732 560 4535 Tel 1 905 475 7728 Fax 1 905 475 7935 Tel 55 21 221 8343 Fax 55 21 221 9388 Tel 56 32 610 896 Fax 56 32 611 294 Tel 44 1707 276100 Fax 44 1707 278695 Tel 353 1 505007 Fax 353 1 561337 Tel 49 2102 486 0 Fax 49 2102 486 717 Tel 33 4 72141800 Fax 33 4 72141801 Tel 39 11 9590111 Fax 39 11 9590250 Tel 31 20 5861592 Fax 31 20 5861568 Tel 45 43 959595 Fax 45 43 959590 Tel 32 2 4671711 Fax 32 2 4671745 Tel 46 40 358600 Fax 46 40 932301 Tel 358 9 6152011 Fax 358 9 61520500 Tel 358 2 550800 Fax 358 2 5508841 Tel 47 32 243000 Fax 47 32 848577 Europe Switzerland Austria Spain Portugal Czech Slovenia Poland Turkey Africa South Africa Asia Korea China Hong Kong Taiwan Singapore Malaysi
243. dicated high performance cables cannot be used together 2 64 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 System Equipment E QJ61BT11 Termination resistor Termination resistor CC Link cable pal pale pay lt QJ61BT11 accessories gt Product Termination resistor Description 110 13082 2 pcs each QJ61BT11 User s Manual Hardware Manual lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment must be prepared separately Product Product Description CC Link cable Choose CC Link cable partner maker product For details refer to CC Link catalog Manual QJ61BT11 User s Manual Details lt Software gt Type Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E For sequence O or later programming For CC Link parameter setting O Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note 2 The software of the above products or later version are usable 2 65 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJT32 S3 Overview The MELSECNET MINI S3 is a wiring saving remote I O network using plastic fiber or twisted pair cables The A2C series I O and special modules FX series PLC partner maker solenoid valves and others can be connected to MELSECNET MINI S3 as remote modules Features E System configuration Wf Main base Q3_ B oT A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 l l l Extension base QA1S6 _ B
244. difference 25 0 5 a ta for 2 phase input us Permissible rise fall time 25 10kPPS 0 5 500kPPS tH tH ws Note 3 500 500PPS_ 25 5 10kPPS 2 5 100kKPPS 1 25 200kPPS Note 3 Inputting a waveform of long rise fall time may cause false input Enter a waveform within permissible rise fall time Counting speed range PPS 2 111 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D I O Signals to from PLC CPU Input Signals Signal Direction QD62 E D gt CPU Output Signals Signal Direction CPU QD62 E D Device No Signal name X00 Coincidence signal No 1 reset command X01 Preset command X02 Coincidence signal enable command X03 cH Down count command X04 CH1 Count enable command X05 External preset detection reset command X06 Counter function selection start command X07 yo Oe Coincidence signal No 2 reset command X08 camerae gener poro fro Coincidence signal No 1 reset command X09 Yoo Preset command XOA yoa Coincidence signal enable command XOB YoB op Down count command xOC yoo Count enable command XOD yo External preset detection reset command X0E rte wae less ponner Counter function selection start command XOF Fuse blown detection e E Coincidence signal No 2 reset command The I O numbers X Y and I O addresses listed above assume that the QD62 E D is loaded in I O slot 0 of the main base unit Buffer Memory Re
245. ds x 1 area 960 words 1k words 6k words 480 words 230 words Q series CPU Q mode Max 4 modules 32 points 0 8 98 3 86 H x 27 4 1 08 W x 90 3 55 D 0 5 1 1 2 39 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Ethernet QJ71E71 QU71E71 B2 Segment length Transceiver Terminator Repeater Max inter node distance Segment length H Q a i zZ Zz fe fe Qa Q o E E mail specifications Item Data size 6k words x 1 Data transfer method Attached file format MIME Data of attached file MIME format Version 1 0 Encode decode of attached file base64 Subject Division No No Encryption function Compression function Communications with mail server System Equipment The following equipment is required for configuring an Ethernet system E 10BASE 5 QJ71E71 Terminator Ethernet coaxial cable Transceiver Other end of AUI cable communications transceiver cable noman DC power supply QJ71E71 lt QJ71E71 accessories gt Product Description Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Hardware Manual 2 40 Segment length Max 100m 327 9ft o eneneno o eT enone Hub Uuu il T eT uuu V Max 12 units in center hubs i L Spe
246. dule group such as Bar code reader Analog to digital converter module Digital to analog converter module High speed counter module Temperature input module Remote I O module Mitsubishi Factory Automation lt ID controller group equipment such as I O modules e Inverter Servo aas i Motion controllei Termination resistor E CC Link station types E Communication speed and distance CC Link has the following station types The industry s fastest class communication speed CC Link Station Type Description 10Mbps ensures compatibility with the sensor input Master station Controls all stations on CC Link One which requires fast response and with communication with station is required in one system y Local station Has CPU and can communicate with master intelligent equipment which needs large volumes of data and other local stations Standby master station Replaces master station when it becomes communication Also you can choose the optimum a and continues data link as master communication speed and overall distance according to station Remote I O station Handles bit data only your system Remote device station Handles bit and word data Intelligent device station Handles bit and word data Can also make data transfer irregularly 2 55 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 Communication Speed Overall Distance 10Mbps 100m 327 87ft 5Mbps 150m 491 8ft 2 5Mbps 200m 655
247. e E Optical loop system MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10 Mode Q T KM1 KM2x LB LX LY SB LWx16 S Wx16 8 number of network modules 1 0 13 0 41x10 x 1024 0 0 512 1024x16 512x16 8 1 1 1 47ms Q T KM1 KM2x LB LX LY SB LWx16 S Wx16 8 number of network modules 1 0 13 0 41x10 x 1024 0 0 512 1024x16 512x16 8 1 1 1 47ms LS KB 0 75xtotal number of stations LB LY LWx16 8x0 001 Tx0 001 Fx4 4 0 0 75x8 1024 0 1024x16 8x0 001 0x0 001 0x4 12 18ms TD1 ST T LSx2 SRx2 R 1 1 47 12 18x2 1x2 1 47 30 30ms Note1 The software of the above products or later version are E Coaxial bus system F type connector Network module QU71BR11 Power supply Optical fiber cable Network module QJ71LP21 lt QJ71LP21 accessories gt Product Description Power supply supply QJ71LP21 BR11 MELSECNET 10H Network Module User s Manual Coaxial cable Termination resistor AGRCON R75 lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment manual must be prepared separately Product Product Description Manual Optical cable SI QSI cable Manual MELSECNET 10H Reference Manual Connector lt Software gt Type Description Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E or later For sequence programming For MELSECNET 10H parameter setting Must be prepared A Prepared as require
248. e 301 to 500 Malfunction environment where the tag management process is Logging Automatic Saving Printing running you can easily access the devices set to the tag 1 Logging function accumulates data in more than one cell per collection timing 2 You can make a daily monthly reports easily by making use of the function to save print an Excel worksheet automatically at the set time PRA Tag1 Executed at specified intervals e Ch T Communication type Automatic batch or random eee saving ommunication ewok ssi intervals ons Communication status communication or no communication Field n Ur 7 ey Automatic printing Time DO Di D2 Device type W D X etc Data type single precision double precision chara string bit Field 1 n 1000 for batch communication n 256 for random communication Tag n n 1 to 1000 13 30 00 10 25 30 13 35 00 30 60 23 13 40 00 26 40 50 7 Communication path Logging e g computer link communication Ethernet communication pL Access to PLC devices OLEX Functions A By utilizing the OLEX functions as Excel macros you can transfer the data of the specified cell area at any timing SOFTWARE PACKAGES EXCEL Communication Support Tool SW3D5F OLEX E Specifications E Operating environment Operating e
249. e The Q series CPU is available in two different CPUs one for Q mode and the other for A mode Use the Q mode CPU to make the most of the performance capabilities and functions of the Q series or the A mode CPU to use the hardware configuration of the conventional AnS series as is and improve the performance of the CPU only A Mode Designed to make the most of the inherent functions and performance capabilities of the Q series by combining the Q series Designed for the customer who is using the AnS series to improve only the processing performance of the CPU without changing its programs and Faeiies CPU and other Q series modules If the appropriate module is not hardware Among the current AnS series hardware you only need to change the available from the Q series you can use the AnS series module CPU module bases and extension cables to increase the processing speed CPU type Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Usable programs Q series programs A series programs A ae et Only the functions usable in the A series can be used and various functions Usable functions Various functions introduced in this data book are all usable introduced in this data book are not usable with the exception of some functions Usable base units For Q series modules Q3 1B Q6LIB for A series modules QA1S6L_ B QA1S3 1B QA1S6L1B Usab
250. e main base QCPU A A Mode User s Manual Details Optional Use the ACPU Programming Manual for programming CPU Built in Memories Memory Cards MODEL SELECTION MEMORY Overview This section describes the memory capacities of PLC memories which store user created data such as programs and device comment files and how to calculate necessary memory capacities Memory Capacities The A mode CPU contains the RAM memory and ROM memory and allows a RAM memory card to be loaded as external memory The following diagram shows the memory makeup and stored data CPU modules Built in RAM RAM memory card Program Parameter T C set value Main program Subprogram Network parameter Comment Extended comment File register Extended file register Online status latch Online sampling trace Extended file register Extended comment Online sampling trace Online status latch Built in ROM Program Parameter T C set value Main program Subprogram Network parameter Note 1 Online status latch and online sampling trace use the memory areas secured as extended file registers Note 2 Extended comments are stored in the built in RAM if it has free space but if it does not they use the memory area secured as the extended file registers on the RAM memory card Built In RAM Built In ROM Type Memory Capacity Memory Capacity Bytes Bytes Q02CPU A 144k Q02HCPU A
251. e preset 32 32pt F differential input DC input source output type 32 32pt F Current Consumption A 5VDG 24VDC 0 050 0 050 0 050 0 080 0 080 0 160 0 120 0 090 0 120 0 090 0 120 0 100 0 240 0 075 0 240 0 075 0 270 0 004 0 130 0 270 Z 0 270 0 016 0 500 0 008 0 930 0 016 0 100 0 008 0 120 0 120 0 120 0 030 0 200 0 020 0 11 0 400 0 150 0 120 0 040 0 500 0 008 0 500 0 160 0 930 0 016 0 500 0 008 0 500 0 008 0 060 0 060 0 085 0 045 0 35 0 14 0 25 0 25 0 14 Symbol examples in Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation field X input Y output F special S vacant 3 6 Remarks Applicable Model List MODEL SELECTION Product Analog to digital converter module Digital to analog converter module Temperature digital converter module Analog I O module Temperature control module Pulse catch Analog timer Interrupt module Computer link module Positioning module MELSECNET MINI S3 master module MELSECNET Il module MELSECNET B module MELSECNET 10 module Ethernet interface module Number of Points Current Consumption A 24VDC Symbol examples in Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation field X input Y output F special S vacant Remarks Type Description Occupied VO Allocation ee A1S64AD Analog input 4 channels 32 32pt F 0 40
252. e 3 20 e Base Units Extension Cables cccceceeeeeeeeees 3 21 e Accessories Batteries Connectors cceeeeeees 3 22 e Accessories Connectors Terminal Block Convertor Modules sceneries ite none g eid aa 3 23 e External Dimensions ccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 24 3 PROGRAMMING e Sequence Programs cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeeees 3 25 e Peripheral Devices eseeceeeeseneesesereeneeseeeeteneees 3 26 4 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS e Sequence Program Simulation cccsseeeeee 3 28 Overview of A Mode The A mode is designed to improve the CPU processing capabilities of the AnS series systems already in use You can use the AnS series programs as they are and can use the AnS series hardware products such as I O modules without changing Note that the CPU modules base units and extension base cables must be changed This mode is recommended for those who want to use the current model and improve performance with minimum modifications Note The A mode is designed to improve the CPU processing capabilities of the AnS series as described above Namely note that the functional capabilities of the CPU other than the processing capabilities refer to the section of CPU modules are the same as those of the conventional AnS series and you cannot use the functional capabilities extended and developed inherently for the Q series Q mode We recommend you to examine th
253. e CPU module the scan time changes per scan because the processing time differs depending on whether an instruction used in a sequence program is executed or not The constant scan function is designed to run the sequence program repeatedly while simultaneously keeping the scan time uniform When the scan time is uniform time delays in external signal input operation processing and output are uniform increasing the equipment control accuracy The constant scan setting is 0 5 to 2000ms Scan Time at Constant Scan Setting of 100ms for Execution of Multiple Programs Sequence program A Sequence program B Sequence program C END processing A aes Waiting time 80ms 20ms 100ms E Processing at instantaneous power failure When the input power supply voltage supplied to the power supply module has become less than the rated voltage the Q mode CPU module detects an instantaneous power failure and performs the following operation processing Q Mode CPU Modules QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU When an instantaneous power failure occurrs for the permissible instantaneous power failure time or shorter 1 When an instantaneous power failure occurs the output status is held and operation processing is suspended However timer timing and watchdog timer WDT timing continue For example when the scan time is 190ms at the WDT setting of 200ms the occurrence of a 15ms instantaneou
254. e Q mode if you are considering new equipment design etc 3 1 OVERVIEW Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode CPU type Available functions modules Program Functions I O special modules Base unit Extension cable Power supply module Connectable networks Ethernet MELSECNET 10H MELSECNET 10 Inter PC network MELSECNET 10 Remote I O network MELSECNET II MELSECNET B CC Link MELSECNET MINI RS 232 422 485 Other networks Q Mode QO02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU etc Inherits the programming and instruction representing methods of the MELSEC However because of different internal codes the programs of the A AnS QnA Q2AS must be used after conversion Functions given in the Chapter of Features in this data book are usable For Q series and AnS series A6SIM X64Y64 cannot be used For using Q series modules Q3 B Q6 B For using AnS series modules QA1S6 B Qc B For using with Q series base unit Q6 P A1 A2 For using with AnS series base unit A1S6 _ P Allowed Allowed Allowed Disallowed Disallowed Allowed with automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed without automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed Networks compatible with AnS series Usable peripheral devices and software Windows personal computer DOS A6GPP HGP PHP Usable GOTs and connection Usable GOT Software Bus connection C
255. e chosen per channel 2 Q64DA 4 channels Voltage or current output can be chosen per channel Fast conversion processing Conversion speed is as high as 80ws channel High accuracy Conversion accuracy is as high as 0 1 operating ambient temperature 25 5 C Output range switching Output range Note 1 switching can be set easily from the GPPW function software package Note 1 The output range indicates the offset gain setting type The types often used are provided as defaults and the user can use others by offset gain setting Simple setting by utility package The optional SWOD5C QDAU E utility package is available The use of the utility package is not required but using the utility package allows initial setting and automatic refresh setting to be made on the screen to reduce sequence programs and facilitate the checking of the setting status and operating status Functions Synchronous output function This function sets a constant time 120us between CPU s digital value write and analog value output This function can be used with the constant scan function of the PLC CPU to exercise precision analog control a Digital value write from CPU Analog output Always constant Note 2 Using this function makes only one channel available and the other channels unavailable Analog output hold clear function When the CPU module is in error or STOP status this function allows the analog val
256. e current consumption is as indicated in power supply module the following relational expression The sum of 5VDC current consumption values of the Rated output current of power supply module gt sum of CPU I O intelligent function and network modules loaded 5VDC current consumption values of modules on one base unit should not exceed the rated output Power supply modi ag e current of the power supply module If so the number of A1S61PN A1S62PN QA1S35B QA1S65B i CPU module e g modules loaded on the base unit must be reduced QO2CPU A QO6HCPU A O module e g A1SX10 A1SY10 Special function module e g A1SD61 A1SD75 Refer to Applicable Equipment List for the current consumption value of each module Calculation example System configuration OvVXSLV ajnpow ndu L9AS LY jnpow 1 uno9 Z 09 x lt N jnpow yndu ajnpow jndjno ajnpow jndjno ajnpow jndjno peeds uBiH ajnpow BHuluonisog ajnpow Ajddns samod Rated output current of power supply module Sum of 5VDC current consumption values Type Rated Output Current A 0 600 0 118 0 050x2 0 270x4 0 350 0 700 A1S61PN 5 2 948 A 5VDC current consumption of each module Rated output current of A1S61PN 5 A gt sum of 5VDC z 5VDC Current current consumption values 2 948 A ie Consumption A Q02CPU A 0 600 Hence this system has no current consumption problem QA1S38B 0 118 A1SX40 Input module 0 050 A1SY40 Output
257. e module flash PC card is unusable is needed A9GTMEM 10MF A9GTMEM 20MF A9GTMEM 40MF E Debugging stand Stand used to place the GOT on a desk for debugging Remarks A9GT 80STAND A9GT 70STAND A9GT 50STAND For 12 inch mounting For 10 9 inch mounting For 6 inch mounting E External I O interface module Using the external I O interface module you can provide external inputs such as pushbuttons and outputs such as lamps relays External input devices Max 64 points of inputs Tt Such as operation panel pushbuttons External I O interface module Max 16 points of outputs Such as lamps relays Type Remarks External I O interface module A9GT 70KBF For A985GOT A97 LI GOT B A960GOT A8GT 50KBF External I O interface module For A95 O GOT M3 E Printer interface module A95 _ GOT M3 The printer interface module is needed to use the printer function on the A95OGOT The printer interface module is not needed for the A985GOT A9Y7LIGOT B and A960GOT since they contain the printer interface Type Remarks A9GT 50PRF Printer interface module for A95LIGOT Q zA gt GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS E General specifications of GOT A900 Item
258. e power supply module current is converted into power with the remaining 30 dissipated as heat i e 3 7 of the output current is used by the power supply module Therefore the calculation expression is as follows Wpw 3 x lsvx 5 W I5v 5VDC current consumption of each module Total 5VDC circuit power consumption of modules The 5VDC output circuit power of the power supply module is the total power consumption of the modules W5sv I5v X 5 Total 24VDC average power consumption of output module power consumption of points switched on simultaneously The average power of the external 24VDC power supply is the total current consumption of the modules Waav laav x 24 W Loading and Installation Average current consumption due to output section drop voltage of output module power consumption of points switched on simultaneously Wout louT X Vdrop X number of output points X simultaneous ON ratio W lout Output current actual operating current A Vdrop Drop voltage of each output module V Input section average power consumption of input module power consumption of points switched on simultaneously WIN N X E X number of input points Xx simultaneous ON ratio W lN Input current effective value for AC A E Input voltage actual operating voltage V Power consumption of intelligent function module power supply section when Q mode is used Ws I5v X 5 x l2av X 24 x hoo
259. e signal of the counter pulse function selection start command counter is input the present value is stored in the buffer memory at preset intervals These functions can be used together However you can choose only one of the linear counter and ring counter functions Also you can choose and use only one of the four counter function selection functions 2 108 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D Appearance External I O Terminals QD62 external I O terminals Terminal Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name A phase pulse A2 A1 0 2 input 24V Connector terminal number Connector terminal number B20 B13 apoase pulse B20 A20 input 12V i i A ph Ais Ata Pease puise i input 5V B19 B12 ABCOM B phase pulse A18 A11 i input 24V B phase pulse i i B18 B11 input 12V i B ph ulse B01 A01 Aiz aio phase p input 5V B17 B10 Preset input 24V Indicator LED Description A A phase pulse input indication A16 A09 Preset input 12V B B phase pulse input indication Ad DEC Counter down counting indication WYK B16 BO9 Preset input 5V FUNC Function start input indication FUSE Coincidence signal output section fuse blow ALD A08 CTRLCOM indication B15 B08 Function start input 24V A14 A07 Function start input 12V EE Function start V7 B14 B07 w input 5V
260. e specified as X in a sequence program 2 Direct access inputs Input signal imported from an input module every time a contact instruction is executed These inputs are specified as DX in a sequence program They cannot be used with digit specified instructions or as inputs used for MELSECNET 10 Outputs Y Outputs are used to provide the control results of a program to external solenoids signal lamps digital displays etc Outputs are available as refresh outputs and direct access outputs 1 Refresh outputs Output signals batch exported from all output modules at the refresh of END processing These outputs are specified as Y in a sequence program 2 Direct access outputs Output signal exported from an output module every time a coil instruction is executed These outputs are specified as DY in a sequence program They cannot be used with digit specified instructions or as outputs used for MELSECNET 10 Internal relays M Internal relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module and not latched not backed up at power failure They turn off at power on QnCPU reset or latch clear operation Outputs Y are used to export the control results of a program Latch relays L Latch relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module and latched backed up at power failure Operation results are held at power on or CPU reset They turn off w
261. each memory CPU Built In Memory Memory Card X 2 2 Esl E I E E Memory Name Eel 3S S 32 52 0 5265 DE et eO lt 6Oc 50g 29 SC SC Fe ecyec zeke amp E 42 n rie lt lt Drive number 0 3 4 1 2 File size increment 4kB 512B Program O x O O O O Parameter O x O O Oo Q Intelligent parameter O x O O O O Device comment O x O O O O Device initial value O x O O O O File register x O X O O x Local device x O O x x Debugging data x x x O x x Failure history x x x Q x x General purpose file x x x x x O A program stored in the standard ROM memory card RAM or memory card ROM is transferred to the program memory at power on and executed in the program memory Hence if the program is stored in the standard ROM memory card RAM or memory card ROM the program memory needs a sufficient free space to accept that program For use of the debugging data for trace function a failure history or a general purpose file the memory card must be loaded Program Ladder list or SFC sequence program file When running multiple programs multiple program files are also stored in memory Parameter File storing PLC parameters and network parameters set during programming Intelligent parameter Intelligent function module parameter file set using the intelligent function module utility software This file does not exist if you do not use the setting made with the utility software Device commen
262. eal number conversion 32 bit integer gt real number conversion Direct output set reset Retentive timer Rotation Direct reset Bit check Character string data coupling Character string data transfer ASCII character string conversion Character string data comparison Search Other AnA AnU dedicated instructions Instruction Name CHG CHK CLC IX LEDA LEDB LRDP LWTP RFRP RTOP RFS STC SUB ZRRD ZRWR ZRRDB ZRWRB BMOVR BXCHR FLOAT DFLOAT DOUT DSET DRST OUT T RCL RCR ROL ROR DRCL DRCR DROL DROR DRST SUM DSUM SADD SMOV ASC SCMP SER LEAD LEDB Counter Current value updating and contact Differences in timer and counter processing systems Since the timer and counter processing systems are different between the A AnS and Q mode CPUs note the following when utilizing a program Instruction Processing Timer Current value updating and contact ON OFF which were performed at END _ processing are executed when OUT T instruction is executed ON OFF which were performed at END processing are executed when OUT C instruction is executed E Instructions for intelligent function modules special function modules When using an AnS series program after conversion into a Q mode program the following should be noted if the conversion source A series program includes special function module dedicated instructions When continuously using AnS se
263. earance QJ71LP21 RUN MNG T PASS D LINK SD RD LED ERR LERR 9 62 2 y 3N N ooj ge a U ia N acC N epou 0 NdoZoO Led ZO ION NO S O J x G Station No setting switches E MELSECNET 10 mode system Choose the MELSECNET 10 mode when connecting the Q mode PLC to the existing MELSECNET 10 network system configured with the ACPU QnACPU etc The QCPU A mode can also be connected to the MELSECNET 10 network O is m Mode setting switch Q Si C O I Optical cable connectors Led 1 ZPO Led ILZPSIV LS NdOHSNZY Led ILZPSIV NdOSVZO Led IOLZPSLV Optical loop module QJ71BR11 RUN MNG wS B lt tep MELSEC 10 H Dedicated Instructions For the QJ71LP21 and QU71BR11 the MELSECNET 10 H dedicated instructions listed below can be used to create programs for data transfer other Station No setting switches than cyclic communication Instruction Description Target Station Mode setting switches SEND Writes data to target station Q mode network module QnA Q2AS RECV Reads data written by SEND RECVS instruction from network module RECVS is executed in interrupt Coaxial cable connector program READ Writes data to target station CPU SREAD module WRITE Reads data from target station SWRITE CPU module REQ Performs remote operation for Coaxial bus module target station CPU ZNRD Reads data from target st
264. ect screen switching hide a display partially protect input operation and protect screen data uploading E Energy saving mode using human sensor A985GOT The human sensor detects a person within the sensor detection area to automatically turn the backlight on off reducing unnecessary power consumption Time can be set by the user E Multi language The adoption of the uni code ISO IEC10646 compliant globally compatible character system makes the GOT compatible as standard with about 26 000 characters in all countries of the world including Japanese Korean Chinese English German and French By adoption of the high level uni code fonts the GOT can display 32x32 or larger beautiful characters and support highlighted and shaded characters To use foreign language fonts Windows which can support and enter those fonts is required For example Windows for Korean language is needed to enter Korean fonts W Fast data transfer using PC card Using a PC card you can write the OS and screen data from a personal computer to the GOT A900 at high speed Conventional data transfer using RS 232C can also be made To use the PC card on the A951_GOT the memory card interface module A1SD59J MIF is required E Recipe function The GOT A900 supports the recipe function which holds machining conditions initial values and other machine data device values within the GOT A900 as recipe data and exchanges necessary
265. ector for 32 32pt X Fea atl No high leakage current sensor sink source 24VDC 64 input points connector 64 64pt X 0 16 eo No sink source 2 7 MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List E When using QA1S6 B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to the next section System Configuration Number of Points Current Product Type Description Occupied Consumption A Restrictions Contact output module 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 output points No terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 output points No terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 12 output points No terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 independent No contact output points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 output points No terminal block Triac output module No points independent Cre points independent Transistor output module 12 24VDC 0 1A 16 output points 16 16pt Y No terminal block with fuse sink A1SY41 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 output points 32 32pt Y 0 500 0 008 No terminal block with fuse sink Gia ea A1SY42 12 24VDC 0 1A 64 output points 64 64pt Y No ees terminal block with fuse sink 12 24VDC dynamic 64 output points 64 64pt Y No connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 5A 16 output points 16 16pt Y No terminal block with fuse sink 24VDC 2A 16 output points terminal 16 16pt Y No block with fuse sink 5 12 24VDC 2A 16 output points 16 16pt Y No terminal block with fuse sink
266. ed to refresh link relays LB in an MELSECNET 10 network module to the CPU module or to refresh the CPU module data to the link relays LB in the network module Use the refresh parameters in the network parameters to set the refresh ranges of LB and B QnCPU MELSECNET 10 network module Link relays Link relays Bo LBO Link refresh Link refresh setting range Link special relays SB Link special relays are internal relays which indicate the communication states fault detections of MELSECNET 10 network modules Step relays S Step relays are devices for SFC Timers T Timers are up timing type they start timing when its coil turns on and times out with its contact turned on when its current value reaches or exceeds its set value There are low speed high speed low speed retentive and high speed timers which are different in specifying method A retentive timer is designed to hold its current value if its coil turns off and resumes timing from the held current value when the coil turns on again A timer turns on off its coil updates its current value and turns on off its contact when the OUT T or OUTHT _ instruction is executed Current value updating and contact on off are not executed in END processing Instructions for use of timers 1 Do not describe the same timer in multiple OUT T or OUTH T instructions during one scan 2
267. eet Insulation resistance 10MQ or more by insulation resistance tester 60Hz noise frequency External wiring connector block conversion module consumption A TN For the setting method refer to the SW5D5C GPPW E Operating Manual Note that OFF ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately Internal 2 89 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX42 DC input module positive common type DC Input Module Positive Common Type Specifications Qx42 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 OX42 34567 01234567 89 ABCDEF Input resistance Approx 5 6k Q Approx 5 6k OFF gt ON 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms ON OFF 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms x Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1s noise width and 25 to Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV 32 points common common terminal 1B01 1B02 2B01 2B02 ON indication LED 32 point switch over using switch 40 pin connector 0 3mm A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 optional block conversion module consumption A We
268. eet QC100B 10m cable 32 79 feet O A9GT QC200BS 20m cable 65 57 feet A9GT QC300BS 30m cable 98 56 feet T A9GT QC350BS 35m cable 114 75 feet 3 Overall distance 37m 121 31 feet note that this overall distance is from main base and includes inter base cable S distances Max number of GOTs connected 5 Number of I O points occupied 16 points handled as intelligent function module Bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB Note 1 When there are extension bases connect the GOT A900 after the extension bases Extension bases cannot be connected after the GOT A900 Note 2 If the first GOT cannot be connected within 13 2m 43 28feet of the last base the bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB must be connected between the extension cable connector of the base and the cable Note 3 Connection of the GOT A900 occupies one extension stage 5 7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION System Configuration E CPU direct connection ios A985GOT A97LIGOT B le GOT A Desle GOT A900 A960GOT A953GOT Necessary interface AQGT RS2 module Connection RS 232C ieee QC30R2 cable length 3m 9 84 feet cable cable Max cable length 15m 49 18 feet The A953GOT contains the RS 232C communication interface and does not need the interface module The communication speed that can be used by the A9GT RS2 is up to 38 4kbps E Serial communication module connection A985GOT A97LI
269. egister RWw indicates numerical data word the link scan time At communication speed of 10Mbps Remote Network Remote I O Network i Number of Stations Mode Mode data output from master station to remote station and is Normal Mode represented by RWw for convenience 16 1 57ms Note 4 Remote register RWr indicates numerical data word 32 2 32ms data input from remote station to master station and is 64 3 81ms represented by RWr for convenience E Multi vendor E Transient communication We have gone into partnerships with many Japanese and In addition to cyclic communication where data are foreign equipment manufacturers to connect a wide transmitted periodically and automatically CC Link can variety of field equipment directly to CC Link in order to use the transient communication system where data are help reduce wiring transferred irregularly Transient communication can be We realized an open network where you can use the made by the master local and intelligent device stations optimum field equipment worry free from among many and can perform the following processes choices 1 A PLC reads writes device data etc from to another Refer to the CC Link Catalog L NA 74108143 for the PLC partner maker products and remote I O remote device 2 The master PLC transfers data to from an intelligent and intelligent device stations that may be connected to device station CC Link 2 57 MODEL SELECTION N
270. en DC power is established RA2 goes ON supply are both AC 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 1 Switch power ON 100 The TM set value should be the period of time 2 Set CPU to RUN from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 3 Turn ON the start switch DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 4 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the seconds Pa output equipment is powered and driven by the 5 Turn ON the start switch ke program 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the D When PLC power supply is AC and output power output equipment is powered and driven by the Q supply is DC program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer Q TM is required in the program N 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN LOADING AND INSTALLATION Loading and Installation E System design circuit example 2 when using ERRcontact of Q61P A1 Q61P A2 power supply module POWER SUPPLY For AC DC 200 lad Se TRANSFORMER Input switched 0000 when power supply Ul FUSE FUSE established _ CPU_ _ _ Lo SM52 1 o H D RUN STOP circuit 0 interlocked with a y FUSE RA1 yo oF Set time for TM DC power H eee NO tuto established START N PROGRAM sw T lo T a J MC STOP RA1 tF sw INPUT MODULE A RA2 Voltage relay is recommended Low battery alarm D 4 De Lamp or buzzer P
271. ephone line modem compatible function which initializes the modems used and performs connection processing with devices to allow communications with remote devices and modems through a telephone line After the line has been connected data communications can be made by full duplex communication in the MC protocol no protocol bidirectional protocol 2 78 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71024 QU71024 R2 Instructions Dedicated to Serial Communication Modules The following serial communication dedicated instructions can be used to program the QJ71C24 and QJ71C24 R2 Station demand function mental OUTPUT Transmission of specified data N a Read of receive data BIDOUT BIDIN Data receiving Read of receive data BUFRCVS Receiving of data in interrupt i Appli program cation Read of receive data PRR Data sending in user registered frame using transmission schedule table SPBUSY Read of data sending receiving M N bi status using each dedicated instruction PUTE Registration write of user registered frame to flash ROM GETE Read of user registered frame M N bi registered on flash ROM CSET Setting of PLC CPU monitoring M N registration deregistration and of the unit word byte of the number of transferred data The following protocol symbols indicate usable protocols M MC protocol N No protocol bi bidirectional protocol Fundamental in the Remarks fiel
272. equence Programs Logic symbolic language 0 LD X0 1 1 AND X1 ee2 2 LD X2 3 wn 3 AND X3ee 4 Execution of step 4 ORB eeseee 5 0 to END instruction 5 OR X4 6 in order 6 AND X5 e7 7 AND X6 8 8 AND X7 e 9 9 OUT Y10 10 V 10 END eoeeee 11 t Step number SFC Programming In addition to programming in the ladder and list languages the Q mode PLC allows programming in the SFC Sequential Function Chart language SFC is a language suitable to structure and standardize programs and enhances ease of understanding since the operation sequence of the object to be controlled is represented as is in program form The features of the SFC as compared to those of the ladder are described below E Features of SFC Complicated interlocks in the ladder Processing in ladder programs uses the scanning system which repeats all steps from the first to the last in a program corresponding to all operation processes of equipment to be controlled Namely whichever process the equipment is operating in this system manipulates the steps of the pre and post processes concurrently Hence a program is designed to include many interlock signals to prevent the pre and post process steps from being manipulated To define interlocks you must fully understand what devices are used in the pre and post processes If you do not understand or examine them sufficiently meaningless or duplex interlock signals may be de
273. er Precautions for Replacing AnS with A Mode Item Compatibility Peripheral device You can continue to use the A series peripheral devices However you cannot load and use a portable peripheral device e g ASUPU on a CPU module It should be used via cable connection The RS 422 232 conversion cable is needed when a device for connection with a CPU by the RS422 interface e g AGGPP AGPHP A7PHP A7HGP A8PUS or A8UPU is connected to the CPU You cannot use the RS 232 422 conversion cable that is usable for connection of a personal computer to the A series PLC Confirm the details in the section of peripheral devices Though the RS 232 422 conversion cable was conventionally needed for connection of a general purpose personal computer e g DOS V or PC98 series to the CPU the QC30R2 RS 232 cable can be used for connection to the A mode CPU GOT display You can continue to use the GOT A900 800 series display However it cannot be connected to the PLC of the GOT in a bus connection system When you selected the CPU RS 422 connection system conventionally you either need to 1 change the A8GT RS4 A9GT RS4 for the A8GT RS2 A9GT RS2 or 2 use the RS 422 232 conversion cable to connect the A8GT RS4 A9GT RS4 to the CPU Simulation module The A6SIM X64Y64 cannot be used System configuration example Power supply I O special and mode CEU network modules are al
274. er of device points Extended comment points STOP gt RUN output mode switching Self diagnostic function Operation mode at the time of error Latch power failure compensation range Remote RUN PAUSE contact Print title registration Keyword registration I O assignment Step run Interrupt processing Constant scan ms Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A Repeated operation using stored program Refresh mode partial refresh possible using program Language dedicated to sequence control ladder list SFC 79 ns step 34 ns step 144k byte built in RAM 144k byte standard ROM built in 28k steps 30k steps No 30k steps 8192 X Y0O to 1FFF total number of points usable in program including remote I O 4096 points number of points controllable on main and extension bases 7144 MO to M999 M2048 to M8191 Total of 8192 when M L and 1048 L1000 to L2047 S are shared 0 no initial status 8192 BO to B1FFF 2048 default 256 points e 100ms timer TO to T199 M e 10ms timer T200 to T255 Setting time 0 01 to 327 67S 100ms retentive timer no initial Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7S e 100ms timer T256 to T2047 Count value setting by word device D W R e ms timer no initial 0 Setting time 0 001 to 32 767S Latter half of retentive timers can be used by ZHTIME instruction Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7S 1024 default 256 points e Normal counters C
275. eration error and special function module access error in error time operation mode are invalid e Fault history and low speed program running time are invalid Type switch setting and detail setting of I O assignment are invalid Basic setting base power supply module extension cable is invalid Latch range is invalid Comment of file using method setting is invalid I O refresh setting is invalid All invalid All invalid All invalid 2 163 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS Sequence Program Simulation 13 The following SM devices are supported by LLT The unsupported SM devices not given below can be accessed since their device areas are secured but they do not have inherent SM functions In addition the unsupported SM devices have the initial values of OFF 7 7 7 Devi Device Remarks Device Remarks Devico Remarks SMES Remarks Name Nam Name Name N SM409 SMO Diagnostic error 0 01 sec clock SM434 User clock No 9 SM1021 User clock No 1 M41 Low SM1 Self diagnostic error 7 0 1 sec clock sMsio oN speed program SM1022 User clock No 2 E Card B use fla SM5 ee S 0 2 sec clock SM620 AS eee SM1023 User clock No 3 information normally OFF indivi B fl SM16 Error ingividual MRE ll detock SM621 CAI protect ag SM1024 User clock No 4 information 3 normally OFF Dri fl ll SM50 Error reset nies 2 sec cloc
276. eries CPU module for the A mode CPU H Increased processing speeds The instruction processing times have been improved significantly as compared to the AnS series CPU Processing speed comparison CPU LD MOV PC MIX Value Q02HCPU A 34ns 204ns 5 3 QO6HCPU A Q02CPU A 79ns 474ns 2 2 A2USHCPU 90ns 540ns 2 2 S1 A2ASCPU S1 200ns 1 200ns 0 9 A2ASCPU A2SHCPU 250ns 9 100ns 0 61 A1SHCPU 330ns 11 800ns 0 46 A1SJHCPU The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions such as the basic and data processing instructions executable in 1 us A larger value indicates a higher processing speed E Increased program capacities Using the A mode CPU can increase the program capacities Program capacity comparison CPU Program Capacity QO6HCPU A 30k step x 2 QO2HCPU A 28k step QO02CPU A A2USHCPU S1 30k step A2ASCPU S1 14k step A2ASCPU A2SHCPU 14k step A1SHCPU 8k step A1SJHCPU E Increased number of I O points Using the A mode CPU you can increase the number of I O points up to 4096 points 8192 points when used with a remote I O network 1 0 point comparison CPU 1O Points Note1 aS alae Note2 Q02CPU A 4096 8192 QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A A2USHGPU S1 1024 8192 A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU 512 8192 A2SHCPU 512 2048 A1SHGPU 256 2048 A1SJHCPU Note 1 Number of CPU I O points controlled on the main and extension bases Note 2 Total number of CPU I O points controlled on the main and extension ba
277. erminal block with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 points connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 1A 64 points connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 1A dynamic 64 points connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 5A 16 points terminal block with fuse sink 24VDC 2A 16 points terminal block with fuse sink 5 12 24 48VDC 2A 8 points terminal block all points independent 5 12VDC 32 points transistor 16mA connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 8A 16 points terminal block with fuse source 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 points connector with fuse Source 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 points short circuit protection source 12 24VDC 0 1A 64 points connector with fuse 5 12 24VDC 2A 16 points terminal block with fuse Source 12 24VDC 32 input points 32 output points 0 1A connector with fuse Source 24VDC 32 high speed input points 32 output points 0 1A connector with fuse 24VDC 8 input points transistor 0 5A 8 output points terminal block 24VDC 8 input points 2A contact 8 output points terminal block Note 1 Compatible mode Usable A Usable with restriction X Unusable External accessory Compatible Mode O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJOJO lO gt O JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOIOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJ OJOJOJOJOJO JOJO 6 15 gt xe O D Q O D 12 MODEL LIST Product
278. es CSV file TXT file data conversion CD ROM license product for 10 licenses CNVW Operating Manual packed with product Analog to digital converter module utility CD ROM Note 2 Digital to analog converter module utility CD ROM Note 2 Serial communication module utility CD ROM Note 2 High speed counter module utility CD ROM Note 2 Basic communication support software tool FD Basic communication support software tool FD license product for 5 licenses Basic communication support software tool FD license product for 10 licenses Basic communication support software tool FD license product for 20 licenses CSKP Operating Manual packed with product CSKP Programming Manual packed with product EXCEL communication support software tool FD CSKP EXCEL communication support software tool set product FD EXCEL communication support software tool FD license product for 5 licenses EXCEL communication support software tool FD license product for 10 licenses OLEX Operating Manual packed with product Monitoring OCX software tool FD CSKP monitoring OCX software tool set product FD Monitoring OCX software tool FD license product for 5 licenses Monitoring OCX software tool FD license product for 10 licenses XMOP Operating Manual packed with product Graphic data package Note 1 Manual in PDF format is included in corresponding software Note 2 Operation manual
279. essing of the original program file and simultaneously writes a new program file to the free area Note 1 of the memory On completion of new program write the CPU suspends the processing of the original program and starts the processing of the new program To perform the above processing the memory must have the free space where the new program file can be written Note 1 You can use the free area of the program memory drive 0 RAM card drive 1 or ROM card drive 2 only the ATA card may be used as a ROM card Memory Memory Deleted Running program On completion of new program write ___ new program processing New program is starts run New program file is written to free area of memory IO New program In this system you can exchange not only program files but also device comment files or file register files Note 2 When a device comment file or file register file is stored in the RAM card drive 1 or ROM card drive 2 it must not be accessed by a program to perform online file write Note 3 Performing online write or online file write causes a delay in program scan time Depending on the program file size to be online written a significant delay may take place so fully ensure safety when performing this operation Remote Operation Remote operation is executed from GPPW to the CPU module to perform RUN STOP PAUSE reset or latch clear of the CPU module without operating the RUN
280. evice ON OFF state and value monitoring like the device batch monitoring and buffer memory batch monitoring functions of GPPW In addition the monitoring and testing functions of the ladder logic test tool include a function to display ON OFF states and values in a timing chart format It enables time series operation to be acquired Timing Chart Mim El File Device Monitor Status Device Entry Range of Chart Display Monitoring C Auto Manual x1 x2 Cx5 C x0 C X20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 gt cane came Cams camb Gimb 4 D1 88 CD CD CD D32 T EDE DoT IT EE E E A a l a E T K ca Tool Function The tool function is designed to temporarily save the data of the virtual CPU device memory and special function module buffer memory and read and use the saved data when resuming debugging work 2 162 Sequence Program Simulation Error Detail Display Function Error detail explanation appears when an operation or similar error occurs during simulation made LLT This function saves time and trouble to refer to the manuals etc and facilitates finding the error occurrence cause ERROR DETAILS Error and Cause Corrective Action 1 Check the error step a and correct the content of the FROM TO instruction 2 Correct the 1 0 unit gt allocation parameter There is no special function module in the area specified by the FROM TO
281. fined causing a program to be more difficult to understand As opposed to this SFC processes only the program step corresponding to the present operation process of the equipment and does not execute the steps of the pre and post processes Therefore only interlock signals in the currently executed process are needed simplifying program description Operation sequence cannot be represented by ladder A ladder is basically represented by combinations of contacts and coils and its program does not have representations corresponding to the operation sequence of the equipment For example if the equipment has stopped due to some fault the whole program must be examined to find where the step corresponding to the process at a stop is described In contrast an SFC chart is represented in a flowchart format and basically matches the operation processes of the equipment Hence if an aforementioned fault has occurred once the process which stopped is found you will know where in the program the corresponding step is described High freedom of design in the ladder A ladder is designed in accordance with the rule that a closed contact turns on a coil In other words it is extremely high in program design freedom and a single operation process of equipment may be programmed in multiple ways This enables different programs to be written by different engineers making it difficult to standardize programs It also hinders other persons
282. for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution level 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications E Performance specifications of A985 A975 970 960GOT Item 4 lt mo oO Display Resolution pixels section Display size mm inch Display color colors Backlight Number of touch keys points Tougn Key size pang pixels Repeat function Memory Application Capacity Communication board slot Communication module interface Option module interface PC card interface Memory board slot RS 232C interface CRT interface Printer interface Voice output terminal Buzzer output Display section h Life Backlight h Specifications A975GOT TBAk1 AS70GOT IBAH A970GOT A970GOT A975GOT TBD 1 A970GOT TBD 1 SBA LBA ees AQ75GOT TBA Bx2 A970GOT TBA B 2 A970GOT A970GOT oe SO SIE AQ75GOT TBD Bx2 A970GOT TBD BK2 SBD LBD AESTON EED A980GOT TBA EUs1 A960GOT EBA EU A975GOT TBA A970GOT TBA EUx2 EUx2 A970GOT SBA EU A970GOT LBA EU EAs ar iy D STN Monochro x 1 Wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal color liquid me liquid High intensity EL 2 High intensity TFT color liquid crystal crystal crystal
283. g the MOV or similar instruction compare it with the set value using comparison instructions lt etc and turn on off the internal relay M etc Use RST C to reset the count value of an interrupt counter Data registers D Data registers are devices designed to handle numerical data ina CPU module One data register can store 16 bit data 32768 to 32767 or OH to FFFFH and two consecutive points e g DO and D1 can store 32 bit data 2147483648 to 2147483647 or OH to FFFFFFFFH 2 151 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Link registers W CPU module side devices for refreshing the data of link registers LW in an MELSECNET 10H network module One link register can store 16 bit data 32768 to 32767 or OH to FFFFH and two consecutive points e g WO and W1 can store 32 bit data 2147483648 to 2147483647 or OH to FFFFFFFFH i TNTs p Link registers Link refresh Link refresh setting range Link special registers SW Link special registers are designed to store the communication states and fault definitions of an MELSECNET 10H network module Function devices FX FY FD Function devices are used in a subroutine program provided with arguments As devices used in each subroutine program call source can be determined by use of the function devices you can use the same subroutine program without needing to know the other subroutine program call so
284. gaan Sam eaa J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i Program B i 1 1 1 For program B 1 EF usann eer 1 1 M7000 T Internal relay a 1 1 1 1 n 101 ON OFF data of i M7ooo ON OFF i 1 1 4 M7000 i hannan i 1 1 1 asiriene oaae Eaa 2 1 1 1 2 155 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Comparison between Q Mode and QnA Q2AS As compared to the QnA Q2AS series instructions the following instructions and others have been changed E Common instructions Added instructions The following instructions have been added to the Q mode Class Module data read Trace set Trace reset Binary data write Binary data read Program loading from RAM card Program unloading from SPM Loading and unloading High speed file register block transfer Deleted instructions Instruction Name UNIRD TRACE TRACER S FWRITE S FREAD PLOAD PUNLOAD PSWAP PBMOV The following instructions have been deleted from the Q mode Class Write to EEPROM Sampling trace set Note 1 Sampling trace reset Note 1 Status latch set Status latch reset Program trace trigger Program trace reset Program trace execution LED indication of ASCII code LED indication of comment Instruction Name EROMWR STRA STRAR SLT SLTR PTRA PTRAR PTRAEXE PTRAEXEP LED LEDC The above instructions have been deleted since the Q mode CPU does not have the corresponding functions LEDs etc Note 1 Can be replaced by TRACE and TRACER instr
285. gn Maintenance and Inspection QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual MELSAP L QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions Remarks Packed with Q3 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional B main base 2 23 MODEL SELECTION MEMORY CPU Built In Memories Memory Cards Overview This section describes the memory configuration of PLC memories which store user created data such as programs and device comment files and how to calculate necessary memory capacities Note that the Q mode is different in concept from the A mode Refer to the Chapter of the A Mode for the memory concept of the A mode Memory Makeup The Q mode uses multiple memories according to the purpose of use in the CPU These memories are identified by the drive numbers for access The memories used in the Q mode are as follows It should be noted that the Q mode CPU is equipped with only one memory card slot which accepts only one card CPU module Memory card RAM Drive number 1 Program memory Drive number 0 Memory card ROM Standard RAM Drive number 3 Drive number 2 Standard ROM Drive number 4 List of data that may be stored into
286. h as 80ws channel Also the temperature drift compensation is achieved in the processing time of all channel conversion time 160us High accuracy Conversion accuracy is as high as 0 1 operating ambient temperature 25 5 C Input range switching Input range Note 1 switching can be set easily from the GPPW Note 1 The input range indicates the offset gain setting type The types generally often used are provided as defaults and the user can use others by offset gain setting Simple setting by utility package The optional SWOD5C QADU E utility package is available The use of the utility package is not required but using the utility package allows initial setting and automatic refresh setting to be made on the screen to reduce sequence programs and facilitate the checking of the setting status and operating status Functions Averaging function This function averages analog to digital conversion data per channel in terms of count or time and outputs an average value in digital form Sequential digital output processing is called sampling Temperature drift compensation function This function automatically compensates for an error due to a change in ambient temperature of the module to improve conversion accuracy Maximum and minimum value holding function This function holds the maximum and minimum values of a digital output value within the module The maximum and minimum values can be detected wi
287. he terminal block of modules 1 67 AC80TB 8m 26 23ft for sink 1 2 the connector terminal block convertor module modules 2 64 common current not a Appearance exceeding 0 5 A AC100TB 10m 32 79ft for sink 15 modules 3 3 common current not exceeding 0 5 A ACOS5TB E 0 5m 1 64ft for source 0 17 A6TBX36 E modules 0 37 A6TBY36 E AC10TB E 1m 3 28ft for source 0 23 A6TBX54 E modules 0 51 A6TBY54 E AC20TB E 2m 6 56ft for source 0 37 A6TBX70 E modules 0 81 AC30TB E 3m 9 84ft for source 0 51 E Model list modules 1 12 ACSOTB E 5m 16 39ft for source 0 76 1 Connector terminal block convertor modules modules 1 67 Type Description Weight kg Ib ea Directions for use A6TBXY30 For positive common sink 0 4 0 88 ie NEIE A The tightening torque of the terminal screws M3 5 type screws of the terminal blocks is 78 4N cm 8kgf cm A6TBXY54 For positive common sink 0 5 1 1 i y type input modules and sink E Connection diagrams type output modules 2 wire type Refer to CHAPTER 2 Q MODE MODEL SELECTION A6TBX70 For positive common sink 0 6 1 32 type input modules 3 wire type A6TBX36 E For negative common source 0 4 0 88 type input modules standard type A6TBY36 E For source type output 0 4 0 88 modules standard type A6TBX54 E For negative common source 0 5 1 1 type input modules 2 wire type A6TBY54 E For source type output 0 5 1 1 modules 2 wire type
288. hen latch clear operation is performed Outputs Y are used to export the control results of a program Annunciators F Annunciators are internal relays convenient for equipment fault failure detection When annunciators are turned on the special relay SM62 turns on and the quantity of annunciators turned on and their numbers are stored in the special registers SD62 to SD79 Therefore using annunciators in a failure detection program allows you to check for equipment faults failures and their definitions by monitoring the special registers SD62 to SD79 after the special relay SM62 has turned on Note that turning any annunciator on lights up the USER LED SET F50 SETF25 SET F2047 SD62 0 50 50 50 SD63 0 gt gt 2 gt ES SD64 0 gt 50 50 50 SD65 0 gt ES 25 sD66j 0 O gt 2047 Up to 16 annunciator SD67 0 0 0 0 numbers can be stored SD79 0 0 0 oj Edge relays V Edge relays are devices which record operation results starting at the beginning of a ladder block and can be used as contacts only An edge relay is used to perform operation on its leading edge OFF ON in an index qualified structured program xo Xt x10 vi Edge relay Stores operation results of X0 X1 and X10 2 150 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Link relays B Link relays are CPU module side devices relays us
289. ial 75 ohm cable MELSECNET 10 module compatible with Instructions A AnS QnA Q2AS Use the QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 in the MELSECNET 10 Module 2 newly added module mode They are not compatible with the GI optical cable AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 AJ71QLP21 S A1SJ71QLP21 S For optical SI QSI cable E Connecting the existing MELSECNET 10 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 inter PLC network and new For coaxial 75 ohm cable MELSECNET 10H network Method 1 Instructions New 7 7 ee Ey Module 1 is the existing MELSECNET 10 module H QnA Q2AS enas Module 2 is a MELSECNET 10 module for A AnS QnA Q2AS Existing MELSECNET 10 E Changing the master module of the existing Module 1 Module 2 5 zzz ong n m Q Z m 4 Eest a a sain ee ce a at er eases ey sl QnA Q2AS A AnS aT e MELSECNET 10 remote I O network for the Q mode PLC Modules required for relay PLC You cannot replace the master module of the existing Module 1 MELSECNET 10 remote I O network with the Q mode QJ71LP21 For optical SI QSI cable PLC The Q mode PLC is not compatible with the QJ71BR11 For coaxial 75 ohm cable MELSECNET 10 remote I O network Module 2 ae Se Q mode PLC QJ71LP21 For optical SI QSI cable QJ71BR11 For coaxial 75 ohm cable Instructions Existing MELSECNET 10 remote I O network Use module 1 in the MELSECNET 10 mode Module 2 may also be used in the MELSECNET 10H Pe
290. ications coaxial cable Jconnector Ethernet card ooo QJ71E71 lt QJ71E71 B2 accessories gt Product Description Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Hardware lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment must be prepared separately Product Description Coaxial cable Ethernet Standard compatible product RG 58A U 50 Q Ethernet Standard compatible product Nippon AMP s 221629 4 or equivalent Ethernet Standard compatible product Hirose Electric s UG 274 U 1S or equivalent BNC type terminator T type connector lt Software gt Remarks or later For Ethernet parameter setting SW3D5F CSKP E Communication support software for personal computer Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note The software of the above products or later version are usable 2 41 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Ethernet QJU71E71 QU71E71 B2 lt Separately prepared manuals gt Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Fundamentals Specifications Pre operation settings and procedures Maintenance inspection troubleshooting Logical line connection method Communications using MC protocol Note 1 Communications using fixed buffers Communications using random accessing buffer Dedicated instructions instructions related to open processing Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Applications How to confirm exi
291. id crystal A9GT 70LTT For 10 inch wide angle vision TFT color liquid crystal A9GT 70LTS For 10 inch D STN color liquid crystal A9GT 70LTTB For 10 inch high intensity TFT color liquid crystal A9GT 50LT For 6 inch STN color monochrome liquid crystal E Protective sheet Sheet for protection of the GOT A900 screen The MITSUBISHI logo is removable To protect the screen always use the protective sheet Type Remarks A9GT 80PSC_ Protective sheet for 12 inch logo removable A9GT 70PSC_ Protective sheet for 10 inch logo removable A9GT 60PSC_ Protective sheet for 9 inch logo removable A9GT 50PSC_ Protective sheet for 6 inch logo removable System Configuration SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E PC card The PC card is used to transfer the data of the monitor screen and to store the data of the alarm history and recipe functions Commercially available PC card SRAM PCMCIA Ver 4 2 or later compliant GOT A900 or our flash PC card A985 A970 A960GOT Memory GOT card cable Memory card Commercially available PC card SRAM A950 GOT A85GT C05H interface module PCMCIA Ver 4 2 or later compliant A1SD59J MIF Type Remarks For GOT memory capacity 10M bytes Flash PC card formatted For GOT memory capacity 20M bytes Flash PC card formatted For GOT memory capacity 40M bytes Flash PC card formatted To use the PC card in the A95LIGOT the memory card interfac
292. igh function high performance Q series CPU modules Q mode only They have the world s smallest unit size to meet the Q series and are designed to be compact power saving in consideration of the environment Features E Ultracompact These I O modules are the smallest in the world for building block type units 98mm 3 86inch height x 27 4mm 1 08inch width x 90mm 3 55inch depth Note 1 The Q series I O modules are designed to be used with Q3 _ B or Q6_ B They cannot be used with QA1S3__ B or QA1S6 _ B They cannot be used with the A mode either E Multi functional 1 The DC input modules allow the input time constant to be changed 1 5 10 20 70ms The input time constant can be set from GPPW It can be decreased if fast input is needed and be increased for use in a hostile environment e g noise 2 The lineup of the DC transistor output modules have a short circuit protective function The short circuit protective function prevents transistors from being damaged by a short circuit etc i Wiring capability improvement 1 The relay output modules do not require external supply power WE Maintainability improvement 1 The modules can be loaded unloaded with a single motion screwing not needed Screwing may be needed under some operating conditions 2 For a CPU error output hold clear setting can be made per output module 3 The loaded module configuration can be
293. ight kg Ib 0 18 0 40 Jumbe Name umbe Name umbe Name umbe Name oe ee eae 1B01 COM1 1A01 nc f COM2 2A01 For the setting method refer to the SW5D5C GPPW E Operating Manual Note that OFF ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately 2 90 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX80 DC input module negative common type DC Input Module Negative Common Type Specifications Qx80 O42 34567 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 89 ABCDEF OFF ON 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 7oms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms CES gt OFF 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value CES Petcare withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Nise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1k OOOO O Oef transient oss Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1k OOOO O Oef 4 iky Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max Applicable crimping terminal R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used 5VDC internal current 50mA nl mlololoisjejlon oane oN e consumption A Weight kg lb External Connections m
294. ing utility To check the status of connection to the network you can confirm the network status and perform the test function on the personal computer screen Availability of user programming functions The functions compatible with Microsoft Visual C and Microsoft Visual Basic allow you to easily create user applications e g those for remote control of PLC and read write of data from to devices Availability of drivers according to various operating systems You can configure a system according to your environment using any of the various drivers available Workstation 4 0 Microsoft windows95 x o MicrosoftWindowso8s o Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows NT Microsoft Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Other product and company names herein are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners 4 20 NETWORK BOARDS CC Link Boards A80BDE J61BT11 ASOBDE J61BT13 Function List Name Description Data communications Cyclic transmission function transient transmission function RAS function Offline test function automatic return function self diagnostic function Performance Specifications Item Specifications Type A80BDE J61BT13 Transmission speed Can be selected from among 156kbps 625bps 2 5Mbps 5Mbps and 10Mbps Max transmission distance 1km 3278 69feet depending o
295. ink modules 2m 6 56ft for sink modules 3m 9 84ft for sink modules 5m 16 39ft for sink modules 8m 26 23ft for sink modules common current not exceeding 0 5 A 10m 32 79ft for sink modules common current not exceeding 0 5 A 0 5m 1 64ft for source modules 1m 3 28ft for source modules 2m 6 56ft for source modules 3m 9 84ft for source modules 5m 16 39ft for source modules Weight kg LB 0 17 0 37 0 23 0 51 0 37 0 81 0 51 1 12 0 76 1 67 1 2 2 64 1 5 3 3 0 17 0 37 0 23 0 51 0 37 0 81 0 51 1 12 0 76 1 67 Accessories Batteries Cables Connectors Model A6TBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 A6TBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E Applicable 1 A6TBXY36 lt When connecting an input module gt wro ooo foo gt oo 3 gt o A B B A9 B8 AB B7 AZ B6 3 gt Pora nnlo 2 A6TBXY54 lt When connecting an input module gt gt gt ooo oeo oroo oo o lo rag pie fa a ee a t fo t ot te fots fe a at et a fa lo o ro na cc NN o2 02 ko colo plop gt on no nae eo gt 09 o r Connector terminal block convertor module connection diagrams 24VDC 24VDC Lo en to w oO op
296. ints network No No Number of cyclic 32 points points per 32 points remote station Short CC Link automatic start function No Link scan time Q mode QnA Q2AS QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 Remote Network Mode QnA A mode Q2AS AnU A2AS QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11_ A1SJ61BT11 Remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station local station standby master station 0 to 7FF 2048 points 0 to 7FF 2048 points 0 to FF 256 points 0 to FF 256 points 32 points 32 points 4 points 4 points Normal Yes No Note 1 Mode Hardware test Name Description Transmission No Transmission speed speed mode Transmission speed setting switch A 156kbps B Transmission speed 625kbps c Transmission speed 2 5Mbps D Transmission speed 5Mbps E Transmission speed 10Mbps F Must not be set reserved for system Remarks 2 60 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 Continued Remote I O Network Mode Remote Network Mode Remarks PLC type Q mode QnA A mode Q mode QnA A mode Q2AS AnU Q2AS AnU A2AS A2AS CC Link module type QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11_ A1SJ61BT11 No Standby master function Yes Yes When When master station master returns to normal from station failure status it can not returns to return to network normal from failure statu
297. ion Personal Computer PLC T N 1 PE l f le T e MEE C Type Note 1 C Side Interface Cable Type Syam Remarks Ethernet General purpose Windows compatible TAJ710E71 B5 AJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QE71_ 10BASE 2 5 A1SJ71QE71 BS AnSH Res A1SJ71 E71 B5 S3 MELSECNET 10 A70BDE J71LP23 Incompatible with A70BDE J71QLP23GE 75Q coaxial MELSECNET 10H A70BDE J71QBR13 AJ71QLP21 S SI QSI 200 250 optical mode AJ71QLP21G AJ71QBR11 GI 50 125 optical 75 coaxial Q2AS A1SJ71QLP21 SI QSI 200 250 optical AnSH ie A1SJ71 BRI1 AnN AnA AnU AJ71LP21 AJ71LP21G SI QSI 200 250 optical AJ71BR11 GI 50 125 optical 75 coaxial CC Link A80BDE J61BT13 QCPU Q mode QJ61BT11 Twisted pair A80BDE J61BT11 QnA AJ61QBT11 Q2AS A1SJ61QBT11 QCPU A mode A1SJ61BT11 AnSH A2AS H AnN AnA AnU AJ61BT11 RS 232 422 Personal computer RS 232 422 cable For RS422 COM port AJ71QC24N connection AJ71QC24N R2 RS232C 422 AJ71QC24N R4 converter is A1SJ71QC24N R2 Because of QCPU A mode RS232C interface AnS A1 Asmuo __ UC24 R4 Q A mode CPU AnN AnA AnU sd A71UC24 sd does not need QCPU Q mode CPU module RS232C Rese elses QCPU A mode converter AnU AnSH A2AS H QCPU A MODE CC Link via AJ65BT G4 QnA Q2AS AnN AnA AnU AnSH A2AS H USB Personal computer QCPU Q mode CPU module USB USB cable USB port Simulation LLT Note 1 AnU includes motion controller A273U AnSH includes motion controller A171SH 172SH SOFTWARE PACKAGES Basi
298. ironment Refer to P 1 7 PC related INFORMATION CONSOLIDATION Easy network configuration and high performance networking in response to computerization of production facilities Refer to P 1 5 GOT A900 ITEP RELIABILITY Reliable products and easy troubleshooting functions for decreased CEOWNTIME ses sees rcteecesteeeteeseeeeseseseesesesteseseanenesesseneseseaneneeees Refer to P 1 4 UTILIZATION Ease of developing Q programs using the existing A QnA programs Use of the A mode facilitates enhanced performance of the AnS system Refer to P 1 9 Appendices The Q series is available in two different modes of operation the Q mode which uses the Q series inherent functions and performance capabilities and the A mode which uses the conventional AnS series programs and hardware and is significantly enhanced in CPU processing capabilities Refer to P 1 9 Unless otherwise specified this data book introduces the Q mode features which applicable may not be for A mode use l ane ON ae a N CON SPACE SAVING AND WIRING SAVING To save machinery and equipment space and to reduce costs by decreased wiring processes the Q series is smaller in its mounting area and has higher freedom of installation It also has increased affinity with CC Link for easier use Mounting Area Pare yr erect E ey grime eatery en re ly tart E T AEE E E EAE pee E EA The mounting area of the Q series is 60 sm
299. is used to check whether the specified transition condition of an SFC program is designated for forced transition or not Network number designation devices J A network number designation device is a symbol used to specify a network number in a data link instruction Macro instruction argument devices VD Macro instruction argument devices are used for macro registration Global Devices and Local Devices Among the CPU module devices local device range assignment can be made to the internal relays M edge relays V timers T retentive timers ST counters C and data registers D Note that the ranges and devices where local device assignment is not made are global devices E Global devices Global devices mean devices which can be shared by all programs when there are multiple programs Normally the ranges where local device assignment has not been made and the devices where local device assignment cannot be made are all global devices and they can be used from any program Global devices can be shared by running programs Program A Device memory Internal relay MO ON OFF ON OFF data of MO Program B ON OFF data of MO E Local devices Local devices can be used exclusively in each of multiple programs and local devices in a certain program cannot be accessed by other programs Hence using local devices allows you to do programming without being concerned with other programs Loc
300. ising device designation Connection channel designation notice execution designation connection retry count connection retry intervals initialization connection time out period initialization retry count initializing data number designation connection data number designation GPPW connection designation no communication interval time RS CS control yes no selection DR signal enable disable selection for modem initialization notice waiting time Note 1 The buffer memory is interfacing volatile memory designed to transfer data between the CPU module and QU71C24 At power off or system reset data are all erased and the initial values are set from the flash memory in the QJ71C24 To make the contents set on QSCU valid at every power on the set contents must have been registered to the nonvolatile flash memory 2 83 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Utillity Package for Serial Communication Modules SWOD5SC QSCU E Telephone number setting screen sample Data for modem connection BEE Module information Module model name 0J71C24 R2 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value Data for modem connection 1 H0bb8 Notification Other than above Pager receiver designation Telephone number O62nnnnnnn External line dialing No extemalline dialing Line types Tone Wait time for message transmission Aunits sec F Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 HO
301. ission frame generation receiving frame data extraction send receive procedure control and others must all be performed in sequence programs 2 77 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71024 QU71024 R2 E Communications with personal computer and other PLCs The bidirectional protocol can be used to communicate any data with other PLCs or the external device which can be matched in communication procedure with the PLC For example this protocol is applicable to a case where mutual communication is made between a certain PLC and another remote PLC which would be difficult to use Ethernet or MELSECNET 10 with Notification function from PLC The notification function is available to facilitate the external monitoring of PLC equipment With notification conditions preset to the QU71C24 the notification function automatically collects and sends data within the CPU to external devices when those conditions time intervals and CPU data states hold When an alarm occurs it can also transmit alarm data to external devices without sequence program If modems are connected it can notify pagers This function can be used when the MC protocol or no protocol is used E Communications using user registered frame A user registered frame is a transferred frame whose header head of the transferred frame and footer end of the transferred frame are preregistered These header and footer are added auto
302. istor output module Blank module I O module Type ocru ao2HcPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 13JL97 13JL98 13JF58 13JF60 13JF61 13JF59 13JL96 Q6BAT Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Q2MEM BAT Q35B Q38B Q312B Q65B Q68B Q612B Q6DIN1 Q6DIN2 QCO06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Q61P A1 Q61P A2 QX10 QX40 QX41 QX42 QX80 QX81 QY10 QY40P QY41P QY42P QY50 QY80 QY81P QG60 13JL99 Outline O points 4096 Program capacity 28K steps Basic instruction 79ns 1 O points 4096 Program capacity 28K steps Basic instruction 34ns I O points 4096 Program capacity 60K steps Basic instruction 34ns I O points 4096 Program capacity 124K steps Basic instruction 34ns I O points 4096 Program capacity 252K steps Basic instruction 34ns QCPU Q mode Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Manual optional QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals optional QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions optional QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC optional QCPU Q mode Programming Manual MELSAP L optional QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions optional QCPU Q mode User s Manual Hardware packed with Q3OB Replacement battery Small SRAM card Capacity 1M bytes Small linear flash memory card Capacity 2M bytes Small linear flash memory card Capacity 4M bytes Small ATA ca
303. it function Software stroke limit function Hardware stroke limit function Speed changing function Override function Positioning Module QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 Description Gives stop signal to suspend positioning processing being executed and then resumes positioning to move over remaining travel During continuous positioning processing processing of positioning data being executed when suspension command is given is suspended on completion of its processing Outputs pulses only while jog start signal is on Outputs one shot pulses for slight travel in manual operation Makes fine adjustment with jog start signal Outputs to servo amplifier the pulses commanded by manual pulse generator Makes fine adjustment etc on pulse level Executes only specified positioning data and ends positioning After executing specified positioning data makes a stop and then executes next continuous positioning data Executes specified positioning data and without deceleration to stop executes next continuous positioning data Description Makes OPR possible if axis is not returned to position before near point dog by jog operation etc After machine OPR compensates for position over specified distance from machine OPR position to use that position as OPR address Compensates for mechanical system backlash looseness Sets travel per pulse Limits command speed to within setting range of speed limi
304. ite request X0B Channel changing completion flag Channel changing request X0C to XOD YOD Max minimum value reset request XOE Analog to digital conversion completion flag Not used XOF Error occurrence flag Error clear request E Buffer memory list ddres Description Address Description Address Description enable disable setting CH 5 to CH 8 1 CH2 digital output va 36 CH 4 maximum value 2 Offset designation CH 4 minimum value 3 CH3 average time average count 38 CH 5 maximum value 4 Offset designation CH 5 minimum value 5 CH5 average time average count CH 6 maximum value 6 7 8 9 1 CH6 average time average count 30 CH 1 maximum value CH 6 minimum value CH 7 maximum value CH 7 minimum value Setting range CH 8 maximum value 0 Analog to digital conversion CH 1 to CH 4 34 CH 3 maximum value 45 CH 8 minimum value completion flag Note 1 The Q64AD having 4 channels of analog inputs does not have the areas corresponding to CH 5 to CH 8 Analog to digital conversion enable disable Averaging designation setting b15 bi4 b13 bi2 bit bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 F 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 bi3 bi2 bii bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Averaged channel designation Time count designation 0 sampling 1 averaging 0 count designation 1 time designation
305. ith Q2AS Programs upwardly compatible with Q2AS Can be used after conversion into Q program by GPPW software Compatible Note that sequence programs and other file accessing programs need corrections Compatible Compatible in LB LW LX LY SB SW assignment Compatible in MELSECNET 10 dedicated instructions Compatible in sequence programs Compatible Note that sequence programs and other file accessing programs need corrections Note If there is program compatibility some of the instructions e g special and network module dedicated instructions have been deleted in Q or changed in specifications For full information refer to the Programming section 2 3 MODEL SELECTION General Specifications General Specifications General specifications indicate the specifications of the environment where these products can be installed and operated Unless otherwise exceptional specifications are indicated the general specifications apply to all Q series products Install and operate the Q series products in the environment given in the general specifications Item Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Operating atmosphere Operating altitude Installation location Overvoltage category Note 1 Pollution level Note 2 0 to 55 C 25 to 75 C Note 5 5 to 95 RH non condensing Note 4
306. itial execution type program Program A Initial execution type program Division into initial execution gt type program and scan Program B execution type program Program run A Scan execution type every scan program WScan execution type When multiple programs have been set to the scan execution type they are run in order of lower to higher This program is run every scan after the scan where the program numbers initial execution type program has been run and END processing is performed when all scan execution exercises actual control TESA i type programs are run In the absence of the initial execution type program the scan execution type program is run when the PLC is powered on or switched from STOP to RUN STOP gt RUN Power ON gt RUN First scan Second scan Third scan Forth scan Pit gt t END processing F i i Initial execution type program Scan execution type program A Scan execution type program B Scan execution type program C Scan time 1 145 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs i Low speed execution type A low speed execution type program is run only during constant scan surplus time or preset low speed program execution time If it cannot be completed in the constant scan surplus time or low speed program execution time the program is suspended once and the remainder of that program is run at the
307. ities of 28k steps up to 252k steps You can choose the optimum CPU module for your equipment Large capacity extra memory The Q mode CPU module is equipped with a small PC card slot to accept a max 32M byte memory card A memory card can save previously used programs intact as a history as well as comment files extension file registers and other CPU module internal devices Number of control I O points Any model of the Q mode CPU can control up to 4096 points of I O Also when used with a remote I O network such as CC Link any model can control max 8192 points of I O Extensibility of up to 64 I O slots In the Q series up to seven extension bases can be connected and up to a total of 64 I O slots can be used if more I O slots are needed in addition to those of the main base max 12 I O slots Secrecy The Q mode manages sequence programs as files You can specify passwords which restricts third party access to individual files Function Explanations The Q mode CPU module functions are described below Note that the programming related functions are given in Section 3 Programming 1 0 control system The I O control system of the Q mode CPU modules is refresh mode In refresh mode acquisition of input data from an input module and output of output data to an output module are batch performed when the END instruction of a sequence program is processed When there are two or more scan execution programs
308. k with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 output points terminal 32 32pt Y block with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 1A 64 output points terminal 64 64pt Y block with fuse sink 12 24VDC dynamic 64 output points 64 64pt Y connector with fuse sink 12 24VDC 0 5A 16 output points terminal 16 16pt Y block with fuse sink 24VDC 2A 16 output points terminal 16 16pt Y block with fuse sink 5 12 24VDC 2A 16 output points terminal 16 16pt Y block with fuse sink 5 12 24 48VDC 2A 8 output points 16 16pt Y independent common terminal block 5 12 24 48VDC 2A 8 output points 32 32pt Y independent common terminal block 5 12VDC 32 output points 16mA 16 16pt Y connector with fuse 12 24VDC 0 8A 16 output points terminal 32 32pt Y block with fuse source 12 24VDC 0 1A 32 output points 32 32pt Y connector with short circuit protection 12 24VDC 32 output points connector 64 64pt Y with fuse source 12 24VDC 32 input points 0 1A 32 32 32pt Y output points connector fuse 24VDC 32 input points 0 1A 32 output 32 32pt Y points connector fuse 24VDC 8 input points transistor 0 5A 8 16 16pt Y output points terminal block 24VDC 8 input points 2A contact 8 16 16pt Y output points terminal block High speed counter 32 32pt F DC input sink output type 32 32pt F Differential input sink output type preset 32 32pt F DC input Differential input sink output typ
309. k SM622 Sar 3 flag normally 1 SM11030 0 1 sec clock M414 Drive 4 fl ll SM56 Operation error i 2n sec clock SM623 aur ag None SM1031 0 2 sec clock SM415 Z SM62 Annunciator detection 5 2n millisec clock SM640 File register use SM1032 1 sec clock SM203 STOP contact SM420 User clock No 0 SM700 Carry flag SM1033 2 sec clock SM205 STEP RUN contact SM421 User clock No 1 SM703 Sort order SM1034 2n sec clock lock SM213 oe reag SM422 User clock No 2 SM704 Block comparison SM1036 Normally ON SM400 Normally ON User clock No 3 SM715 El flag SM1037 Normally OFF BIN DBIN ot ON only 1 scan after SM401 Normally OFF User clock No 4 processing switch SM1038 RUN y over N only 1 OFF only 1 scan after sm4o2 ONonly 1 scanafter f Sm430 User clock No 5 SM1008 Self diagnostic error SM1039 y RUN RUN OFF only 1 scan after A SM403 RUN SM431 User clock No 6 SM1009 Annunciator detection SM1042 STOP contact ON only 1 scan after y SM404 RUN SM432 User clock No 7 SM1010 Operation error SM1054 STEP RUN contact FF only 1 fi SM405 ie y 1 sean ater N SM433 User clock No 8 SM1020 User clock No 0 1 Derived from the constant scan setting and scan count The time set as a constant scan is the time of 1 scan Therefore 1 scan time constant scan time 2 164 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS Sequence Program Simulation 14 The following SD devices are supported by LLT The unsupported SD devices not given below c
310. l for AnS Use QA1S30B main base 7 Personal computer Use A series compatible software on Windows personal computer eaaa A Alternatively A6GPP A8PUJ or Use extension cable other A series peripheral device is for Q series usable E A However RS422 232 conversion Use QA1S6 OB o cable is needed for use of A series extension base compatible device of RS422 specifications since peripheral port of A mode CPU is RS232C MODEL SELECTION General Specifications Item General Specifications Specifications Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Operating atmosphere Operating altitude Note 3 Installation location Overvoltage category Note 1 0 to 55 C 20 to 75 C 10 to 90 RH non condensing 10 to 90 RH non condensing Conforming to JIS Under intermittent vibration Sweep count B 3502 IEC a en Ce a 61131 2 Frequency Acceleration Amplitude 10 times each in TT TT lt sa X Y Z directions 10 to 57Hz 0 075mm for 80 min 0 003inch 57 to 150Hz 9 8m s Under continuous vibration Frequency Acceleration Amplitude 10 to 57Hz 0 035mm 0 001inch 57 to 150Hz 4 9m s Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z No corrosive gases 2000m 6557 38ft max Insi
311. later For Ethernet parameter setting SW3D5F CSKP E Communication support software for personal computer Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note The software of the above products or later version are usable E 10BASE T QJ71E71 essses Rue scoousn5 p Other end of communications a QJ71E71 lt QJ71E71 accessories gt Product Description Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Hardware Manual lt Separately prepared products gt The following separately prepared equipments are required up to hub connection Product Description Non shielded twisted Ethernet Standard compatible product pair cable Category 3 4 5 Jack Ethernet Standard compatible product RJ45 Hub Ethernet Standard compatible product For 10BASE T Note Refer to lt separately prepared manuals gt on the next page for separately prepared manuals The following product is usable as the hub for 10BASE T lt Connectable products gt Product Type Hub for 10Mbps Allied Telesys CentreCOM SB3012TR CentreCOM RH509S lt Software gt Remarks or later For Ethernet parameter setting SW3D5F CSKP E Communication support software for personal computer Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note The software of the above products or later version are usable E 10BASE 2 QJ71E71 B2 Terminator Other end of RG58 U T type munication commun
312. lative to PLC CPU Address 7 Setting Range and Read Value soe aa Access Setting TS ERAN Range from CPU OH lo 20H Preset value setting er Read write tH 3H 4H Coincidence output point aaa Read write 5H No 1 setting eH e 26H Coincidence output point i farema to 2147483647 7H No 2 setting 8H ls 28H Overflow detection 0 no detection 1 during detection oo Read only 9H 29H Counter function selection setting 0 count disable function Read write 1 latch counter function 2 sampling counter function 3 periodic pulse counter function lio AH 2AH Sampling periodic time setting 1 to 65535 increments 10ms BH Sampling periodic counter flag 0 during stop 1 during operation booo Read only Continued on next page 2 112 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D Continued Address cHi ch Setting U Hex Range 1 from CP CH Latch count value L 2147asaea o p1a7asoear Read only DH 13 2DH EH Sampling count value neg FH as 2FH 47 10H 16 Periodic pulse count last 11H value 12H Periodic pulse count E 13H present value 14H Ring counter lower limit TE 2147483648 to 2147483647 Readiwrite 15H value setting 16H Ring counter upper limit neg to 2147483647 17H 2s_ sr 55 value setting 18H 38H Reserved to to 1FH 31 a 1 Initial values set at power on or PLC CPU reset Setting Range and Read Value Initial Va
313. ld not lead to machine damage or accidents ON delay timer Internal program Yoo 11 1s SM412 OFF delay timer H Yoo TA 15 ead M9093 External load MC Y01 OF L Yoo YOF O L 0 5s 0 5s 24V O E i Oe 24VDC CPU module Output module T1 T2 x1 oac o o MO x1 YOO alternates between ON and OFF at 0 5 second intervals Use a no contact output module transistor in the example shown above PLC Generated Heat Calculation The temperature inside an enclosure containing the PLC must be kept below the operating ambient temperature given in the general specifications Hence heat in the panel must be calculated from the average power consumption of the equipment contained therein This section explains how to find the average power consumption of the Q series system Calculate an in panel temperature rise from the power consumption Loading and Installation E Calculation of average power consumption Power is consumed by the following PLC areas Oege tar E supply module 5VDC line CPU module i Intelligent Output Input i module module fee 24VDC line Relay Input current l24v Transistor lin X E AR ESA Output current In External lout XVdrop cane 24VDC lin power supply Power consumption of power supply module Approximately 70 of th
314. le module Only when using GET PUT service 5 When any of the network modules given in the following table is used to read write the PLC data from an external device the accessible device ranges are restricted Applicable network module Product Type MELSECNET II A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71 B2 B5 S3 Intelligent communication module A1SD51S A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ71ID2 R4 A1SJ71J92 S3 ID interface module module Only when using GET PUT service Accessible device ranges Device Type Range X 0 7FF Y 0 7FF M L S 0 8191 B 0 FFF Special M 9000 9255 T Contact 0 2047 Coil 0 2047 Current value 0 2047 Set value 0 2047 C Contact 0 1023 Coil 0 1023 Current value 0 1023 Set value 0 1023 D 0 6143 W 0 FFF F 0 2047 R 0 8191 Special D 9000 9255 6 Among the GOT series graphic operation terminals the GOT A900 800 series are usable Note that bus connection is not available 3 9 MODEL SELECTION CPU CPU Modules QO02CPU A QOD2HCPU A QO6HCPU A Overview The A mode CPU modules are designed to improve the processing capabilities of the AnS series system by applying the high speed high performance CPU processing technology developed for the Q series to the conventional AnS series Functions and Performance Capabilities Extended in A Mode The following functions and performance capabilities are extended by changing the AnS s
315. le power supply modules For Q series modules Q6 _ P A1 A2 for A series modules A1S6L P Ais6LIP Usable I O special E S For Q series and AnS series Note 1 For AnS series Q3LIB is used Extension cable for Q series is used System configuration example Q series compatible software is used on Windows personal computer SW4D5C GPPW E or later is usable Use QC30R2 cable As required AnS power supply I O special and network modules may be used in extension base Use QA1S6 L1B with AnS modules As a matter of course Q series modules can be added Use Q6 1B with Q series modules When Using Q Mode CPU The Q mode CPU requires Q series Q mode programs As a conversion tool is available to convert A QnA series programs into Q series Q mode programs transition to the Q series can be made easily without wasting your program assets Note 2 Note 2 Conversion into Q series programs is needed when you use the Q mode which makes the most of the Q series CPU functions A series programs can be used as is when you use the A mode Q series program _ 1 oO Usable GOT A900GOT Connection method CPU RS 232 serial A800 900GOT Connection method CPU RS 232 computer link communication module MELSECNET 10 CC Link bus module MELSECNET II 10 B CC Link bus not connectable Usable peripheral devices
316. le product Communication V 34 V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21V fc 212A 103 V 110 B channel circuit exchange D channel packet switching standard Error correction Class 4 class 10 compatible V 42 compatible Data compression Class 5 compatible V 42bis compatible Others One which can turn on only DR DSR signal independentlyShould be able to exercise flow control RS CS control x When using a cellular phone PHS it is recommended to use a modem whose error correction function supports MNP class 10 Note that communications may not be made depending on the line status 2 81 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Serial Communication Modules QJ71024 QU71024 R2 Equipment E QJ71024 RS232C cable 3 Q a Q 3 J El J 7 7 1 1 C 2 2 4 4 Termination RS422 485 cable Termination resistor resistor lt QJ71C24 accessories gt Product Description Termination resistor Manual 110 180 2 pcs each Serial Communication Module User s Manual Hardware lt Separately prepared products gt The following equipment must be prepared separately Recommended cables Produc Description RS232 7 0x127 P HRV SV 8 5mm 0 33inch or more in cable OD Oki Electric Cable make specify the number of pairs in _ QJ71C24 is equipped with D Sub 9P female connector RS422 SPEV SB MC 0 2 x 3P about 6 5mm 0 26inch in cable OD SPEV S
317. lities for data communication with network modules and programming peripheral devices The Q mode CPU modules have the following features High speed program processing The Q mode CPU modules have realized processing speed about three times greater than that of the existing models Q4ACPU Q2ASHCPU in terms of PC MIX value Use of base units adopting high speed bus system The Q series base units have significantly improved data transfer speed to and from I O intelligent function and network modules approx 4 to 8 times higher than existing models Especially they can reduce the influence of large amounts of data transfer to from network modules on the scan time Cyclic execution program In addition to normal scan execution programs you can create cyclic execution programs Repeatedly run at preset intervals of 0 5ms to 60s a cyclic execution program can achieve fast response uninfluenced by the entire program scan time Event interruption Network modules and some intelligent function modules have a function to interrupt CPU modules This function allows fast response to events which take place asynchronously with the PLC program scan e g receiving of network module data Also the scan time can be reduced because data transfer related programs can be removed from scan execution programs Large capacity programs The Q mode CPU modules are available in a total of five models having program capac
318. lue Access Equipment lt QD62 QD62E QD62D accessories gt Product Manual Description QD62 QD62E QD62D User s Manual Hardware lt Separately prepared products gt Product Description Manual QD62 QD62E QD62D User s Manual Details Connector External wiring connector A6CON1 A6CON2 AGCON3 Note 1 As the external wiring connector is not packed with the module always prepare it separately lt Software gt Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E R or later programming SW0D5C QCTU E module utility package Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note The software of the above products or later version are usable 2 113 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Utility Package for High speed Counter Modules SWOD5C QCTU E Overview SWOD5C QCTU E is a utility package designed to set initial data needed to use the QD62 QD62E or QD62D high speed counter module and to set automatic reading of count values to the CPU device memory and is used by adding it onto SW4D5C GPPW E or later When using the QD62 QD62E or QD62D the use of QCTU is not required and initial value setting and others can be made in sequence programs but using QCTU can reduce sequence programs and facilitate the checking of the setting status and operating status Initial Data Setting Initial value setting necessary to use the high speed counter module can be made on the screen The following table lists the t
319. ly power 20mA at 24VDC Max all points ON 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV 16 points common common terminal TB17 ON indication LED Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max 5VDC internal current 80mA consumption Weight kg Ib 0 17 0 37 External Connections B B5 B6 Phebebe hr heh eh FI m oO gt joo In gt no io AAARAAAAAAAAAAHAGE I nlm IJl oOlw rjioj v n oaan ajon lo Internal TB8 B9 olojojojojojojo PIJINI A Fuse TB17 Q a S I o SBc CE 2 98 MODEL SELECTION I O MODULES Output Modules E QY81P transistor output module Source type Transistor Output Module Source Type Specifications 12 24VDC 20 15 0 1VDC TYP 0 1A 0 2VDC MAX 0 1A Response time ims or less 1ms or less rated load resistive load Zener diode No External 12 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 supply power 40mA at 24VDC Max all points ON Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet 12 24VDC 0 1A J Insulation resistance 10MQ or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise
320. m 3934 43 625kbps No of connected modules 1 to 32 80m 262 3ft 40cm 15 76 inch or more No of connected modules 33 to 48 20m 65 57ft 40cm 30m 15 76 98 36ft inch to 69cm 27 19 inch gt 70cm 27 58 inch or more No of connected modules 49 to 64 gt If wiring is run at even one location within this range of the inter station cable length between remote I O or remote device station and remote I O or remote device station the max overall cable length is as indicated above 2 63 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK CC Link QJ61BT11 Continued Item Specifications Max overall cable System R z R Local station Local station length and inter configuration 2 f emote station emote station He a station cable length made up of remote Master station Remote device Remote device Intelligent device Intelligent device V O remote device station station Station Station local standby master and a 1 1 2 2 intelligent device Max overall cable length stations 1 Inter station cable length between remote I O or remote device station and remote I O or remote device station gt 2 Inter station cable length between master station and adjacent station CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable 100 Q termination resistor used 130 Q termination resistor used Inter station cable Max
321. m the program of the program file where that pointer is described Program B Program B The same pointer can be used cau Po ca Po FeND 1 fy gt Common pointers Common pointers are used in a subroutine program called from multiple programs Common pointers cannot be used to jump to other programs Program A Program C H HH ca p24 H L p2oa c l ca Po H c f H reT H P205 H lt Program B RET H H ea P25 H END r H Interrupt pointers I An interrupt pointer is a device used as a label at the beginning of an interrupt program and 256 points 10 to 1255 can be used in all programs The same interrupt pointer number cannot be used The interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors are as follows 2 153 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs No Interrupt Factor Priority No Interrupt Factor Priority 10 Interrupt by First point 237 132 Note Error General stopping error 1 A1Sl61 2 occurrence 11 Second point 238 133 interrupt Vacant 12 Third point 239 134 Note 3 UNIT VERIFY ERR 2 13 Fourth point 240 FUSE BREAK OFF 4 Fifth point 241 SP UNIT ERROR I5 Sixth point 242 135 OPERATION ERROR 3 l6 Seventh point 243 SFCP OPE ERROR 17 Eighth point 244 SFCP EXE ERROR 18 Ninth point 245 136 ICM OPE ERROR 4 19 Tenth point 246 FILE OPE ERROR 110 Eleventh point 247 137 WXTEND INS ERROR 5 114 T
322. matically when the data is sent and are automatically removed when the data is received This function is applicable to the data frames which are transferred in the no protocol mode and those sent by the on demand function and notification function in the MC protocol Normally the transmission destination and source addresses included in the headers need not be added for each transmission in sequence programs Also checksum can be calculated as required and added when data is sent and frame check can be made when data is received E Independent operation of communication ports The two channels of communication ports interfaces of the QU71C24 allow any of the different operation modes MELSEC communication protocol no protocol bidirectional protocol to be set per port for use in separate communication applications E Programming via QU71C24 You can perform PLC programming and monitoring from GPPW on a personal computer through the RS 232 serial communication line When the peripheral device connecting interface of the Q series CPU is already used programming monitoring can be made from GPPW via the QJ71C024 E Communications via multiple networks When access to the PLC is made from the GPPW installed personal computer in data communications made from the host system in the MC protocol other PLCs located beyond MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet are accessible E Remote communications using modem function The QJ71C24 has a tel
323. mation volumes the Q series network has been increased in the volume of data that can be read written by one time of communication E Number of link relays LB link registers LW points per network MELSECNET 10H 16k points each MELSECNET 10 8k points each E Number of word device points read written by one time of MELSEC communication protocol communication Q series Ethernet 960 ay points QnA series Ethernet 480 points The system bus has been increased in speed to shorten the total transmission time if communication data capacity increases The data transfer speed between CPU module and network module is about 4 to 8 times higher than that of the conventional QnA series This increased speed can minimize the influence of large capacity data communication on the CPU scan time However communication speed of Ethernet MELSECNET 10H and CC Link have not been changed to maintain communication compatibility with the conventional series Oh speed hy 1 6 TI O jab 4 wn NT Os EASE OF PLC USE Enhanced functions of PLCs tend to make them less user friendly The Q series offers easier to use PLCs with Windows comprehensive environment Added In Functions Ladder logic test tool Start Tools Help Q02 H RUN ERROR USER E SWITCH INDICATOR RESET stop RUN MESET e step aun LADDER LOGIC TEST TOOL Centering on the GPP function software the Q series
324. minal block type AJ65SBTB1 32D 32 points 24VDC 7mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms terminal block type I O composite module AJ65BTB2 16DT AJ65SBTB1 32D1 32 points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 0 2ms terminal block type AJ65SBTC1 32D Scan 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms one touch connector type plug 32 points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 0 2ms one touch connector type plug optional AJ6SSBTC4 16D 16 points 24VDC 5mA 2 3 4 wire type response time 1 5ms one touch connector type for 8 sensors Shared between sink and source selected by switch plug optional AJ65SBTCF1 32D 32 points 24VDC 5mA 1 wire type response time 1 5ms FCN connector type AJ65SBTW4 16D 16 points 24VDC 5mA response time 1 5ms waterproof 4 wire type for 8 sensors shared between sink and source selected by switch cap optional waterproof type Small output module AJ65SBTB1 8T 8 points 12 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type terminal block type AJ65SBTB1 16T 16 points 12 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type terminal block type AJ65SBTB1 32T 32 points 12 24VDC 0 5A transistor output 1 wire type terminal block type AJ65SBTCF1 32T 32 points 12 24VDC 0 1A 1 wire type transistor output FCN connector type AJ65SBTC1 32T 32 points 12 24VDC 0 1A transistor output 1 wire type one touch connector type AJ65SBTC1 32D1 Sele plug optional 16 points
325. mmon Description For power supply 5 slots For power supply 5 slots For power supply 8 slots For power supply 12 slots 3m 9 84 ft cable for extension base 5m 16 39 ft cable for extension bas 10m 32 79 ft cable for extension base Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation Power supply for Q3 B Q6 B 100 120VAC 5VDC 6A output Power supply for Q3 B Q6 B 200 240VAC 5VDC 6A output Duplex optical loop control station normal station Coaxial bus control station normal station Ethernet interface module 10BASE T 10BASE5 Analog input voltage current 4 channels Analog output 2 channels voltage current Analog output 4 channels voltage current 16 16pt X 32 32pt X 64 64pt X 16 16pt X 32 32pt X 16 16pt Y 16 16pt Y 32pt Y 64pt Y 16pt Y 16pt Y 32pt Y 16pt S 32pt F 16 32 32 lt ajola o ford ES ihe wo N 32pt F w N 32pt F 32 32 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 16 16pt F 16 16pt F 16pt F 16 16pt F w o NIN D 16pt F 16 16pt F 16pt F 16pt F 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 32pt F 16 32 w b i DO PO DP PS e2 o jojojojo e SiS e alata w 2 Qs RO jw sjo wo N input module is used by applying a negative voltage to the common terminal Current Consumption A 5VDC 24VDC 0 105 0 110 0 114 0 121 0 050
326. mo H Remote H Samog mode E Connecting the Q mode PLC to the existing E Connecting the existing MELSECNET 10 MELSECNETII or MELSECNET B network inter PC network and new MELSECNET 10 network Method 2 You cannot connect the Q mode PLC to the existing MELSECNETII or MELSECNET B network A AnS H QnA Q2AS Fag Existing MELSECNET II QnA Q2AS MELSECNET 10 Existing MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET B Ona Q2As A AnS G mode PLC Q mode PLC Module 1 Module 2 A z oO H anaa2AS A AnS AnU AnUS QnA Q2AS PLC 2 47 E Connecting the existing MELSECNET II or MELSECNET B network and new MELSECNET 10 network MODEL SELECTION NETWORK with A AnS QnA Q2AS Existing MELSECNET II MELSECNET B A AnS QnA Q2AS PLC Modules required for relay PLC MELSECNET 10 For coaxial 75 ohm cable Instructions Module 1 Module 2 MELSECNET B module A AnS QnA Q2AS Module 1 existing module Function List Data communication function RAS function 2 48 Function Cyclic communication Low speed cyclic communication Transient communication Group function Multiplex transmission function Refresh data split prevention Network debugging mode Interrupt program start Inter data link transfer Routing function Reserved station designation Control station
327. module 0 270 A1SD61 High speed counter 0 350 module A1SD75P1 S3 Positioning module 0 700 3 19 MODEL SELECTION POWER SUPPLY MODULES Power Supply Modules A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Overview The power supply module is designed to supply 5VDC to each PLC module loaded on the base unit Note that the power supply module type that may be loaded depends on the base unit Use any of the AnS series A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63PN power supply modules with the QA1S3 _ B or QA1S6 modules will be loaded Performance Specifications E Performance specifications Item A1S62PN Applicable base unit QA1S3 B QA1S6 B Input power supply 100 240VAC 10 15 Input frequency 50 60Hz 3Hz Input voltage distortion factor Within 5 Input max apparent power 105VA 20A within 8ms 5VDC 5A 3A Inrush current Rated output current feavoc fs Overcurrent 5 5A or more 3 3A or more protection ewoo o i Toome Overvoltage protection 5 5 to 6 5V Efficiency 65 or more Permissible instantaneous power Within 20ms failure time Dielectric withstand voltage Across inputs LG outputs FG 2 830VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38ft Insulation resistance 10M Q or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester Noise immunity 60Hz noise frequency Operation indication LED indication Lit at 5VDC output Fuse Built in unchangeable by user Terminal screw size M3 5 x 7 Applicable wire size 0 3
328. mory card interface module ID interface module Note 2 MELSEC I O LINK B NET module S LINK master JEMANET JPCN 1 master module Profibus DeviceNet Modbus Blank cover Symbol examples in Number of Points Occupied I O Allocation field X input Y output F special S vacant Applicable Model List Number of Points 0 1 Current Consumption A 24VDC 0 15 0 15 0 30 0 09 Remarks Yes No No Yes Yes Type Description Occupied 1 0 Allocation 5VDC A1SJ61BT11 Master station local station 32 32pt F 0 40 A1SD51S BASIC program module 32 32pt F 0 40 A1S62LS Absolute position detection by dedicated 32 32pt F 0 55 sensor A1SS91 PLC simple monitoring module 16 16pt Y 0 080 A1SD59J S2 Memory card interface module 32 32pt F 0 05 Note1 A1SJ711D1 R4 1 connectable reader writer 32 32pt F 0 25 A1SJ711D2 R4 2 connectable readers writers 32 32pt F 0 25 A1SD32D1 1 connectable reader writer 32 32pt F 0 25 A1SD32D2 2 connectable readers writers 32 32pt F 0 25 A1SJ51T64 Max 16 master stations total of 128 O 64 64pt Y 0 115 points A1SJ71B62 S3 For B NET transmission terminal control 32 32pt F 0 08 A1SJ71SL92 For control of S LINK equipment max 32 32pt F 0 20 128 control I O points A1SJ71J92 S3 JEMANET JPCN 1 interface for master 32 32pt F 0 40 station A1SJ71PB96F Profibus FMS Client Server 32 32pt F 0 56 A1SJ71PB92D Profibus DP Master 32 32pt F 0 56 A1S
329. mote I O and E Automatic CC Link start analog modules indicators and inverters In a system consisting of only the master and remote I O Specifications i 3 Da ee 7 stations simply switching power on initiates data link Max number of link Remote input RX 2048 points i points Remote output RY 2048 points automatically without setting of the network and automatic Remote register 256 points refresh parameters RWw Note 5 Data link is started on the assumption that there are 64 Remote register 256 points remote I O stations If there are less than 64 the link RWT scan time is not optimized To optimize set the network Number of link points Remote input RX 32 points gt and automatic refresh parameters per station Remote output RY 32 points A f y gt 7 Note 6 This function cannot be used if there are stations other Remote register 4 points RWw than the master and remote I O stations e g remote Remote register 4 points device intelligent device stations RW E High speed link scan Note 1 Remote input RX indicates ON OFF data bit data input from remote station to master station and is represented In a system consisting of only the master and remote I O by RX for convenience stations choosing the remote I O network mode reduces Note 2 Remote output RY indicates ON OFF data bit data output from master station to remote station and is represented by RY for convenience Note 3 Remote r
330. mp distance 9 6k 19 2k 93 75k bps 1 200m 3 937ft 9 6k 19 2k 93 75k bps 1 200m 3 937ft 187 5k bps 600m 1 969ft 187 5k bps 600m 1 969ft 500k bps 200m 656ft 500k bps 400m 1 31 2ft 1 5M bps 100m 328ft 1 5M bps 200m 656ft PO BB M 12M bps 100m 328ft No of nodes No of repeaters Max No of slave nodes 32 62 with 1 repeater 92 with 2 repeaters 122 with 3 repeaters 3 repeaters max per network Pia ce EO Transmission data size Max 241 bytes transmission Max 32 bytes transmission Current consumption 5VDC 0 56A 2 72 DeviceNet A1SJ71DN91 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Overview The A1SJ71DN91 is a DeviceNet network interface module to connect various field sensors and actuators to a MELSEC PLC Because DeviceNet is an open network senseors and actuators of various manufacturers can be connected to the network Features E System configuration Main base Q3OB A1SJ71DN91 il DeviceNet Extension base QA1S6 OB Remote O Remote O Remote 0 Remote VO AISJ71DN91 can be used with QA1S6__ B Performance Specifications Item Node type Group 2 dedicated client Station number range 0 to 63 No of slave nodes Max 63 E Network configuration software Network parameter in A1SJ71DN91 can be configured by using PLC program However the following software may be used instead Sy
331. ms Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV Common terminal arrangement 16 points common common terminal TB17 Operation indicator ON indication LED External connections 18 point terminal block M3 x 6 screws Applicable wire size Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max Applicable crimping terminal R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used nlm OO WD S oO N om oo A oo po Hl oO 5VDC internal current 50mA consumption A Weight kg Ib 0 16 0 35 Internal circuit For the setting method refer to the SW5D5C GPPW E Operating Manual Note that OFF ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately 2 88 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX41 DC input module positive common type DC Input Module Positive Common Type Specifications QX41 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 Response time 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms ON OFF 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38f
332. n Max number of stations occupied for local stations Transient transmission Link scan time at 10Mbps Communication speed Communication system Synchronous system Encryption system Transmission path form Transmission format Error control system Number of modules connected Remote station number CC Link QJ61BT11 Specifications Remote I O RX RY 2048 points each Remote register RWw 256 points master remote local stations Remote register RWr 256 points remote local stations master Remote I O RX RY 32 points each 30 points for local stations Remote register RWw 4 points master remote local stations Remote register RWr 4 points remote local stations master 4 stations max number of I O points 128 points link register 32 points Max 1024 bytes station 3 3ms remote I O 2048 points in remote I O network mode normal value 4 4ms remote I O 2048 points remote register 512 points in remote network mode normal value 10M 5M 2 5M 625k 156kbps Polling Frame synchronization system NRZI system Bus RS 485 HDLC conformance CRC X X 4X 1 64 modules Note that the following conditions must be satisfied 1xa 2xb 3xc 4xd lt 64 a Number of 1 station occupying modules b Number of 2 station occupying modules c Number of 3 station occupying modules d Number of 4 station occupying modules 16xA 54xB 88xC 4xd lt 2304 A Number of remote I O
333. n 31 normal station Max number of modules loaded per CPU 4 modules Overall distance 30km 98360 66ft inter station distance SI 500m 1639 34ft 5C 2V 300m 983 61 ft 8C 500m 1639 34ft QSI 1km 3278 69ft 2V Distance extension repeater Up to 2 5km 8196 72ft by connection of max four repeaters Number of I O points occupied 32 points I O assignment 32 intelligent points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 55A 0 75A Weight kg Ib 0 11 0 24 Cyclic Communications Time The following calculation expressions are used to find the normal values of cyclic communications time transmission delay time in the MELSECNET 10H mode and MELSECNET 10 mode Since they are not the worst values the time taken may become longer than the values given depending on the timing MELSECNET 10 Mode TD1 ST T LSx2 SRx2 R MELSECNET 10H Mode Transmission delay time TD1 ST T LSx1 SRx2 R TD1 ST Sending side sequence program scan time SR Receiving side sequence program scan time amp T Sending side link refresh time R Receiving side link refresh time LS _ Link scan time 2 49 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 Max link refresh time T a amp R ms MELSECNET 10H Mode MELSECNET 10 Mode QT R KM1 KM2x LB LX LY SB LWx16 SWx16 8 number of network modules 1 LB Total number of link relay LB points refreshed by that st
334. n External wiring FG Ground Terminal Description terminals 24VDC 0 6A FAV errai Load Provided for er I A1S62PN only alh 24G Vacant for N gt A1S61PN and 100 120VAC Power supply A1S63P AC100 120V 200 240VAC terminals Aat FG Ground L 120 120VAC terminals 200 240VAC l FG Apply 200 240VAC L for Q61P A2 ie ES l 100 120VAC Power supply O 24VAC terminals i L S 120 120VAC 24VAC Apply 24VDC for 2 A1S63P 2 127 MODEL SELECTION POWER SUPPLY MODULE Power Supply Modules Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P E Instructions 1 Always earth the LG and FG ground terminals to the protective earth conductor 2 Wire the power supply module properly after checking the rated voltage and terminal layout of the product 3 Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque 4 The fuse cannot be changed by the user Consult your sales representative 5 The sum of the 5VDC current consumption values of the modules loaded in the base unit should not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module 6 Use the ERR contact as required It need not be wired if the external output of ERR is unnecessary 7 The ERR contact is valid for only the power supply module on the main base unit The ERR contact of the power supply module on the extension base is always OFF 8 Do not apply 200 240VAC to the Q61P A1 and 100 120VAC to the Q61P A2 2 128 MODEL SELECTION
335. n Q Mode and A Mode CPU type Q Mode QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Available functions modules etc Program Function I O special modules Base unit Extension cable Power supply module Connectable networks Ethernet MELSECNET 10H Inter PC network MELSECNET 10 Inter PC network MELSECNET 10 Remote I O network MELSECNET II MELSECNET B CC Link MELSECNET MINI S3 RS 232 422 485 Other networks Inherits the basic programming and instruction representing methods of MELSEC However because of different internal codes A AnS QnA Q2AS programs must be used after conversion into Q mode Functions given in the Features Chapter of this data book are usable For Q series and AnS series A6SIM X64Y64 cannot be used For loading Q series modules Q3 B Q6 B For loading AnS series modules QA1S6 _ B QC B For loading into Q series base unit Q6 P A1 A2 For loading into AnS series base unit A1S6 C P Allowed Allowed Allowed Disallowed Disallowed Allowed with automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed without automatic refresh parameter setting Allowed Same as the networks compatible with AnS series Usable peripheral devices and software Windows personal computer DOS V DOS A6GPP HGP PHP Allowed SW4D5C GPPW E or later Disallowed Disallowed Usable GOTs and connection method Usable GOT Software Bus connection CPU RS 232 port connection
336. n Yes Insulation system Across I O terminals and PLC power supply Photocoupler insulation Across output channels No insulation Across external supply power and analog output No insulation Number of points occupied 16 points Connection terminal 18 point terminal block Applicable wire size Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 1 1inch max Applicable crimping terminal R1 25 3 sleeved crimping terminal cannot be used External supply power 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p max 180mA Internal current consumption 345mA 5VDC Weight kg Ib 0 19 0 42 External Wiring Q62DA Q64DA Terminal Signal Name Number Q64DA For voltage input 1 CH1 CH1 V Motor drive unit etc 2 COM A 3 l 4 Vacant 5 CH2 CH2 V 6 COM 7 l 8 Vacant 9 CH3 V 10 COM 11 l 12 Vacant 13 CH4 V 14 COM 15 l 16 24V 17 24G 18 FG 2 105 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Digital to Analog Conversion Modules Q62DA Q64DA I O and Buffer Memory Lists H O list Device No Signal Name X00 Vacant X01 to X08 Not used CH 1 output enable disable flag Y02 CH 2 output enable disable flag Y03 CH 3 output enable disable flag Y04 CH 4 output enable disable flag Not used X09 Operating condition setting request XOA User range write request X0B Channel changing completion flag Channel changing request X0C Set value changing completion flag Set value changing request XOD Synchronous output mode statu
337. n be executed E Memory card RAM Drive number 1 Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU where the SRAM card can be used Number of Files Stored Memory Capacity Bytes 1011k The above capacity is achieved after formatting The program stored in the RAM memory card is transferred to the program memory at power on of the system and executed in the program memory When boot operation setting has been made Q2MEM 1MBS E Memory card ROM Drive number 2 Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU where the flash card or ATA card can be used Memory Capacity Number of Files Type Bytes Stored Q2MEM 2MBF 2032k 256 Q2MEM 4MBF 4080k 288 Q2MEM 8MBA 7972k 512 15964k 512 31918k 512 The above capacity is achieved after formatting The program stored in the ROM memory card is transferred to the program memory at power on of the system and executed in the program memory When boot operation setting has been made Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA MODEL SELECTION MEMORY E Standard RAM Drive number 3 Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU Memory Capacity Type i Number of Files Stored Q02 H CPU 64k 2 Note 1 QO6HCPU 64k 2 Note 1 Q12HCPU 64k 2 Note 1 Q25HCPU 64k 2 Note 1 Note 1 One file register file and one local device file can be stored E Standard ROM Drive number 4 Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU Wee Memory Capa
338. n external safety circuit such as a fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC power supply is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in false output or malfunction When a communications fault occurs in the data link the faulty station is placed in the following states Using communications status information configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the system operates safely Not doing so could result in false output or malfunction 1 The data link data prior to the communications fault is held intact 2 All outputs turn off in the remote I O stations of MELSECNETi II B 10 and CC Link 3 In the remote I O stations of MELSECNET MINI S3 outputs are held or all outputs turn off in accordance with E C mode setting For checking a faulty communications station or the operating status at a communications fault refer to the corresponding data link manual Z CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with the main circuit and power cables or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94inch or more away from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause malfunction Hi MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Use the PLC in the environment that meets the general specifications given in this manual Using this PLC in any environment outside the range of the general specifications
339. n interrupt program is not started when the interrupt status is not enabled It can be started after interrupt is enabled by the El instruction Start delaying factors In any of the following cases the start of an interrupt program is delayed 1 During execution of any instruction 2 During processing of request for read write of data in CPU s internal memory from GPPW network module GOT etc 3 During execution of another cyclic program or interrupt program 380 165 2 17 MODEL SELECTION CPU Q Mode CPU Modules QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 4 When multiple interrupt programs are started at the same time the programs of lower priority wait until the processing of higher priority programs is complete Instructions for use of interrupt programs If the ratio of the interrupt program processing time compared to the total processing time is too high it may delay the scan execution program processing resulting in WDT error Take care when setting the interrupt factor E High speed execution of interrupt program To shorten the overhead time from when an interrupt condition holds until interrupt program processing starts you can choose the high speed execution mode for an interrupt program Selection of this mode can reduce the overhead time as follows CPU Type Starting Time us Normal mode High speed mode Q02CPU 380 230 QO2HCPU QO6HCPU 100 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU N
340. n module can be made on the screen The CH1 Digital output value 1 1 gt DO H e T CH2 Digital output value 1 1 gt D1 following table lists the types of initial values that may be ee i m CH4 Digital output value 1 1 gt D3 set CH5 Digital output value 1 1 gt D4 CHE Digital output value 1 1 gt D5 Item Description CH Digital output value T T gt De oe Pr CH8 Digital output vah 1 hi D7 Analog to digital Specifies the channel where A i i 2 conversion analog to digital conversion will be enable disable made Sampling averaging Chooses sampling or averaging Make text fie End setup Cancel Chooses time average or count average for averaging selection Specifies average count or average time Time average count average selection Time count Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to monitor the data states and operating status in the Initial value setting screen sample analog to digital conversion module to force the set Initial settin LO USAT values to be changed as required Since you can acquire Module model name Q68ADV Stat 0 No 0000 the operating status without needing to know the Bees a addresses in the analog to digital conversion module Seting tem Setting vale Fj these functions are effective for system adjustment and CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable X x Hon aS a
341. n transmission speed Max Number of stations occupied Master ele 1 or 4 stations selectable Local 1 or 4 station selectable Compatible station Master Local station Local station Number of boards loaded Max 4 Loading slot PCI bus slot Number of slots occupied 1 slot Internal current consumption A 0 4A Weight kg Ib 0 16 0 35 Operating Environment Item Description Personal computer where Pentium 133MHz or more and one or more PCI bus slot half size are Personal computer installed and Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 or Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 operates Note 3 PCI bus specifications 5VDC 32 bit bus system clock 33MHz Operating system OS Note 4 Any of Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Programming language Microsoft Visual Basic Ver 5 0 6 0 Microsoft Visual C Ver 5 0 6 0 Required memory capacity 32MB or more Hard disk free space 20MB or more Disk drive 3 5 inch 1 44MB floppy disk drive needed for driver installation Note 3 A multiprocessor compatible personal computer cannot be used as the driver is incompatible Note 4 Please use Windows NT Workstation 4 0 when using CC Link board as master station Accessories Product Description Software SWnDNF CCLINK software driver Manual CC Link Interface Board User s Manual Termination resistor 1100 and 130 2 pcs each attached to ASOBDE J61BT11 only 4 21 5 GOT A900 CONTENTS
342. n ys OUT _ OUT YO 158ns 68ns z Timer OUT TO K5 632ns 272ns p Transfer MOV DO D1 237ns 102ns Q25HCPU Fo 34 Addition DO D1 395ns 170ns Q2ASHCPU E 75 Floating point addition E 1815ns 782ns A2USHCPU S1 C 90 PC MIX value 44 10 3 0 20 40 60 80 100 LD instruction processing time ns Also the END instruction processing time has been reduced greatly by the use of a multi processor configuration which is made up of the control processor for program execution and the information processing processor for communication processing etc Note 2 Scan time varies with the program contents and system configuration The scan times given are values that can be achieved under given conditions Note 3 The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions such as the basic and data processing instructions executed in ips A larger value indicates a higher processing speed Adoption of High Speed System Bus Variable Time Constant of Input Module The Q series high speed system bus is 4 to 8 times faster than The DC input modules input response time can be changed that of the conventional series giving rapid I O refresh and The response time can be chosen from among 1 5 10 20 network data refresh Refer to P 9 and 70ms according to your application Cyclic Execution Program Event Interrupt A CPU interrupt program can be started from a network or intelligent function module Using this function fast response can be m
343. nal computer where that program was created 2 The target PLC type MELSEC A QnA FX Q motion controller of the program created is judged automatically and the corresponding virtual CPU is started 3 Simple setting allows the machine side I O to be operated simulatively Example X0 turns on 10 seconds after Y10 has turned on 4 Debugging is enabled in the stage of program design When used with the program modularization function multiple programs can be created per control purpose for operation of the Q series CPU the software permits debugging on a module basis further increasing debugging efficiency and reducing on the spot adjustment time 5 PLC basic and application instructions are supported I O System Setting Function The I O system setting function allows external input generated for the PLC output to be given simulatively by simple setting The following No 1 indicates the setting that X2 and X3 are turned on 5 seconds after X0 has turned on and X2 turned off No Condition Timer Input Simulation Device Status B00 x1Oms Pex3 C ON Enable C OFF ie 2 Y70 0FF AND 300 x1Oms 123 ON Vie Enable C OFF Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to monitor the statuses of the device memory and buffer memory in a virtual CPU and also permits forced ON OFF and current value changing as well as d
344. nary station of MELSECNET 10 Availability of drivers according to various operating system Monitoring testing utility You can configure a system according to your To check the status of connection to the network you can environment using any of the various drivers available Compatible OS Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Microsoft Windows 95 confirm the network status and perform the test function on the personal computer screen Cyclic communication and transient communication The board has two communication functions cyclic communication in which data is refreshed in accordance with the network parameters set in the control station and transient communication in which the PLC can be accessed at any timing of a personal computer program Microsoft Windows 98 Microsoft MS DOS 6 2 Note 1 Note 1 The Q mode PLC cannot be accessed by MS DOS Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows NT Microsoft Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Other product and company names herein are either registered trademarks or the trademarks of their respective owners 4 17 NETWORK BOARDS Function List Name Data communications RAS function MELSECNET 10 Boards A7OBDE J71QLP23 Description Cyclic transmission function transient transmission function Multiple transmission function for duplex loop system A70B
345. nction Combination with operation pattern Machine OPR return OPR Fast OPR Linear Linear interpolation postion ped eed A Continuous path control setting control Fixed feed disallowed interpolation Circular interpolation Only independent positionin E Speed control A only p p 9 x x xlo 8 control may be set 2 Speed position switching S control Continuous path control setting x a Position speed switching disallowed O a control ak JN Continuous path control setting Vi a disallowed changing Other NOP JUMP FOR NEXT Jog operation lolololololelofololo lo fo Man Man aching operation lololofofolo ol Jo Manual pulse generator Jolololofolel fol ol Must be combined O May be combined Restrictions on combination x Must not be combined Setting invalid 2 117 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Overview Positioning Module QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 The following QD75 dedicated instructions may be used to create sequence programs for the QD75 Dedicated Instruction Name ABRST1 ABRST2 ABRST3 ABRST4 Instruction Specifications Used to restore the absolute position of the specified axis PSTRT1 PSTRT2 PSTRT3 PSTRT4 Used to start positioning of the specified axis TEACH1 TEACH2 TEACHS TEACH4 Used to teach the specified axis PFWRT Used to w
346. ndardization in addition to ladder and list programming Automatic operation program Communication processing program Manual operation program CL O O HT HO Offline debugging simulation POUCA The LLT ladder logic test tool is a personal computer software tool designed to start a virtual PLC on a simulate PLC operations and debug sequence programs You can debug programs on a personal computer right after designing without waiting for the completion of PLC I O wiring Virtual PLC in personal computer A Monitoring Q Program i celus Online Program Correction OO Cover eseseeeoeseeresesesoeseseeoeseoce During adjustment of machinery equipment partial correction to a program may sometimes be made without stopping PLC processing The Q series enables online correction to a program write during RUN and there are no restrictions on the corrected program capacity Online rewriting of a program file is also possible exhibiting the high performance of program correction during adjustment Creation of User Defined Instructions The Q series allows a given program block to be defined and registered as a single instruction macro instruction function Definition registration of an frequently used program block as a macro instruction increases program utilization efficiency In addition viewability is improved since the program read fr
347. networks which remove the feeling of difference between network types You can send receive data remote monitor or correct change programs regardless of differences in network level and type E Ease of setting network parameters For the Ethernet MELSECNET 10H and CC Link networks for Q mode you can set the parameters and various functions required for network connection in GPPW greatly reducing programs related to network setting Also you can easily confirm the settings on screen Also a dedicated utility package is available for the RS232 422 485 serial communication module and you can set the functions and communication parameters of the module on screen 2 27 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview E Cyclic communication The basis of MELSECNET 10H or CC Link communication having close relationships with machine control is cyclic communication Since the data of the pre specified region is transferred periodically cyclically and automatically cyclic communication does not need a sequence program for data transfer The cyclic communication data of MELSECNET 10H or CC Link is sent by broadcast Broadcasting is a method in which the data sent from a given station is received by all other stations Broadcasting allows data to be transmitted to multiple stations at once and to be shared by all stations E Network modules unusable with the Q mode MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B can not be used with Q m
348. nfiguration j Main base Q3OB 2 eee A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 S2 HA Extension base QA1S6 OB AlSJ71UC24 R2 S2 and AlSJ71UC24 R4 S2 can be used with QA1S6L B E Supported Modbus functions Function 01 03 05 06 07 08 11 12 15 16 17 20 21 Description Read coil status Read holding register Present single coil Present single register Read exception status Loopback test Fetch event counter communication Fetch event communication event log Force multiple coils Force multiple registers Report slave ID Read general reference 584 only Write general reference 584 only E Restrictions on use with Q mode The ranges of devices in the PLC available to be accessed through the Modbus modules are limited as indicated below Device Type Range X 0 7FF The following Modbus functions are supported by these Y 0 7FF modules Please note that these modules support only M L S 0 8191 Modbus slave functions B Oe Ere T 0 2047 0 2047 0 2047 C 0 1023 0 1023 0 1023 D 0 6143 WwW 0 FFF F 0 2047 Performance Specifications Item A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Supported protocol Modbus ASCII and Modbus RTU Interface RS 422 485 Transmision mode Half duplex Syncronization USART Speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200bps Data format Start bit 1 Data bits 7 or 8 Parity even odd none Stop 1 or 2 Frame check LRC for ASCII CRC for RTU Dis
349. nfirm complience of the ID products to local laws and regulations for radio transmitting devices RS 232 signal conversion module combination with SW1IVW AIDP and D 422RWL 6 27 gt xe ne D Q O D 92 SERVICE NETWORK Sales Office North America USA Canada Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc Central amp South America Brazil Chile Variante Agua Santa 4211Vina Europe UK Ireland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Ireland Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Germany France 8 Rue Colonel Chambonnet F Italy Via Ferrero 10 Ang Pavia 6 l 10090 Cascine Vica Rivoli Netherlands Denmark Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Pontbeeklaan 43 1730 Zellik Belgium Sweden Krangatan 4 S 20123 Malmo Finland Elannontie Fin 01510 Vantaa Finland P O Box 59 Fin 28101 Pori G amp L Beijer Electronics A S Norway 6 28 Service Network Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc California South Office Georgia Office Ohio South Office New Jersey Office MELCO TEC Rep Com e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda Rhona S A Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V UK Office Office Office IP Systems Carpaneto amp C S p A Geveke Electronics B V Elpefa A S Getronics NV SA G amp L Beijer Electronics AB G amp L Beijer Electronics OY UTU Urho Tuominen OY 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 5665 Plaza Drive Cypress CA 90630 3100 Avalon Ri
350. ng Operation setting E mail setting Transmission mail address Notice setting Used to set notice condition etc for use of notice function Used to set communication path needed to access CPU module connected to MELSECNET 10 H via Ethernet Used to set parameters necessary to use FTP file transfer function Used to set sub net mask and router IP address for communication via Ethernet router Used to set condition for generating interrupt signal to CPU module to start interrupt program MNET 10 routing FTP parameter Routing data Event interrupt E CC Link Parameter Name Function Operation setting Used to select CC Link between high speed remote I O network mode consisting of remote I O only and ordinary mode Used to set the number of modules connected to CC Link refresh devices etc Used to set type of each remote station Network parameter Station data Initial processing setting Used to set initial processing performed for remote device stations Used to set condition for generating interrupt signal to CPU module to start interrupt program Event interrupt Network Monitoring In GPPW you can monitor the network operating status of MELSECNET 10 H and CC Link For MELSECNET 10 H you can monitor the network line status operating communication status of each station link scan time indicating communication frequencies and other data For CC Link you can monitor the link sc
351. ng error of max 1 scan time is produced since the timer times by adding the value timed every scan at each END instruction to the timer s current value at processing of the OUT instruction Instructions for use of timers Timers cannot be used in initial execution standby cyclic execution and interrupt programs E Cyclic execution program performance capabilities A cyclic program is run according to user s preset time execution cycle and its cycle time can be set from 0 5ms to 60s Starting overhead time The following overhead time is required to start a cyclic execution program CPU Type QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Start inhibiting factor A cyclic execution program is not started when the interrupt status is not enabled It can be started after interrupt is enabled by the El instruction Start delaying factors In any of the following cases the start of a cyclic execution program is delayed 1 During execution of any instruction 2 During processing of request for read write of data in CPU s internal memory from GPPW network module GOT etc 3 During execution of another cyclic program or interrupt program 4 When multiple cyclic programs are started at the same time the execution of the lower numbered program in program setting has priority and the other programs have to wait Starting Time us 380 165 5 When acyclic program and an interrupt program are started sim
352. ng terminals with insulation or mark tubes Use the insulation or mark tubes which are compatible with the crimping terminals used 2 85 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES I O Modules Input Derating Temperature Dependent The derating diagrams are provided for the modules Input ON Ratio Restriction which require derating of the input specifications Use i TA h ithin th Some input module models may require their input em iinmese ranges specifications to be derated This restriction is provided to prevent a failure due to excessive heat generated in the input section and is influenced by the ambient temperature input voltage number of input ON points and input ON time Relay Life of Relay Output Module The following chart shows the service life of a relay output module relay Applicable module QY10 200 _ O oa Oo N 10 30VDC t 0ms Switching life x 10000 times 100VAC COS 0 7 200VAC COS 0 7 100VAC COS 0 35 2 ams 200VAC COS 0 35 as ee 0 1 0 5 1 2 5 10 Switching current A t time constant COS power factor 2 86 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX10 AC input module AC Input Module Specifications QX10 100 120VAC 10 15 50 60Hz 3Hz disto
353. ng the fast communication of Ethernet E Communications via multiple networks When accessing the PLC from the host system using the MC protocol or when accessing the PLC from the GPPW installed personal computer access can be made to the PLC located beyond multiple MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet networks Ethernet Module Dedicated Instructions The following Ethernet dedicated instructions can be used to program the QU71E71 and QJ71E71 B2 Inst eee ruction Description Remarks Name Connect OPEN Opens connection Fundamental ion process ing CLOSE Closes connection Fundamental Reads data received BUFRCV by fixed butters Fundamental Reads data received oe by fixed buffers in Fundamental interrupt program Uses fixed buffers to BUFSND send data of other Fundamental end equipment MRECV Receives e mail Application MSEND Sends e mail Application Reads channel data RECVS sent to own station 1 Application scan completion Reads word device of ae READ other station Application RECV Receives message Application Comm Makes transient unication REQ request to other Application process station Ing SEND Sends message Application Reads data from word device of other ae SREAD station with Application completion device Writes data to word device of other aa iit SWRITE station with Application completion device Writes data to word WRITE device of other Application station Reads data from ZNRD word device
354. nitor applications can be updated flexibly While maintaining compatibility with the conventional data you can easily make modifications such as the addition of new functions Simple Communication Using Tags When tags having such information as the device types and device numbers are used with the controls offered by XMOP in the environment where the tag management process is running you can easily access the devices set to the tags Trend graph MELSEC FACTORY Graphic display Numeric block data display input Numeric data display input B h displ A gee TERRY Parato chart display Set tags used with custom controls Tag 1 Communication type batch or random Communication i i Network setting interval Communication status communication or no communication A D n 1000 for batch communication n 256 for random communication Channel i Device type W D X etc Data type single precision double precision character string bit Tag n n 1 to 1000 Communication path e g computer link communication Ethernet communication gs Access to PLC devices o0 mom co 90 PLC Useful Parts Collection The SWOD5C PIC B graphic data package optional includes graphic data usually used on monitor screens 4 13 SOFTWARE PACKAGES
355. no fuse breakers 5 Use wiring conduits where appropriate For installations with conduit running closer to the PLC than the clearances shown on the next page note the following 1 When used above the PLC the conduit should be less than 50mm 1 97inch deep to allow proper ventilation Leave an adequate clearance above the PLC to tighten or remove the mounting screws in the module top Module replacement cannot be made if the mounting screws cannot be accessed 2 When used below the PLC ensure that there is an adequate clearance for the 100 200VAC input cable of the power supply module and the I O and 12 24VDC cables of the I O modules 6 Equipment fitted before the PLC fitted at the back of the panel door should be installed at least 100mm 3 94 inch away from the PLC to protect it from radiated noise and heat Also any equipment on either side of the base module should be at least 50mm 1 97 inch away from the base module 6 7 gt xe O D Q O D n LOADING AND INSTALLATION Loading and Installation E Mounting 1 When using Q6 _ B extension base 2 When using QA1S6__ B extension base Indicates the panel top wiring duct or any assembly 30mm 1 18inch Main base Q3_1B L A somm 18inch Main base Q3 _ B Extension base Q6 or more 30mm 1 18inch or more 30mm 1 18inch or more EATA Extension base QA1S6
356. ntrolled by the Q mode specify which program will be run and how it will be run in the parameters E Specifying which program will be run In the Q mode every program is managed under a program name Use a program name to specify which program will be run Set a program name with 8 characters Since the program name and registration time are written when registering the program in the CPU module you will know the program contents and correction time improving maintainability E Specifying how program will be run The program execution types of the Q mode available are the initial execution type scan execution type low speed execution type cyclic execution type and standby type To determine how program will be run specify any of the above execution types in the parameters 2 143 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Program Execution Types The following five different execution types can be specified for the Q mode 1 Initial execution type 2 Scan execution type 3 Low speed execution type 4 Cyclic execution type Standby type 4 5 Se rae Pre LH Power ON STOP RUN Initial execution type program When running multiple programs on the CPU module any of these execution types must be set for each program It should be noted that at least one scan execution type program must be set When there is only one program it need not be set A program written to the CPU module is
357. nvironment required to use SW3D5F OLEX E Item Description OS Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Note 1 CPU Pentium 100MHz or more multiprocessor incompatible Display Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or more recommended 1024 x 768 pixels Required memory capacity 32MB or more Hard disk free space 40MB or more Disk drive needed for installation 3 5 inch 1 44MB floppy disk drive Corresponding application Excel 97 Required application Excel 97 SW3D5F CSKP E Note 1 Service Pack 3 or higher is required for use of Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Accessories Accessory Manual OLEX Operating Manual Description Explains how to set and use OLEX SOFTWARE PACKAGES Monitoring Tool SW3D5F XMOP E SW3D5F XMOP E Monitoring Tool The SW3D5F XMOP E monitoring tool offers a Visual Basic custom control group designed to create monitoring programs using Visual Basic You can create monitoring control programs by simply pasting input area display area check box menu and other parts and pushbuttons and other controls and setting display conditions etc in a form window in Visual Basic To use XMOP as Q series compatible SW3D5F CSKP E must have been installed beforehand MELSEC FACTORY XMOP screen User friendly Development Environment Visual Basic is a user friendly programming language designed to create Windows applications easily
358. o 90 RH Note 5 When used with the AnS series modules the Q series PLC should be stored at 20 to 75 C 2 4 Applicable Model List MODEL SELECTION Overview The following applicable model list gives models usable with the Q mode Note that the AnS series modules are also available for the Q mode but there may be functional restrictions Also among Q series network related modules there may be restrictions on the number of Whether the modules are restricted or not is indicated in the table For details of restrictions refer to the corresponding module specification explanation sections The following applicable model list provides only the modules loaded to base units Accessories and others which are not directly connected to the base units e g optional connectors are given in the model list at the end modules loaded of this manual Applicable Model List Number of Points Current Product Description Occupied Consumption A Remarks VO Allocation CPU module Q02CPU Program capacity 28k steps number fae of I O points 4096 points basic 4 el instruction processing speed 79ns Program capacity 28k steps number aa 0 64 ja of I O points 4096 points basic instruction processing speed 34ns QO6HCPU Program capacity 60k steps number 0 64 il of I O points 4096 points basic Lat Le instruction processing speed 34ns Q12HCPU Program capacity 124k steps number 0 64 al of I O points 4096 p
359. o WFFF Timer current value T TO to T255 Counter current value C CO to C255 Index register 2 Z0 to 2820 2 2 V Vo to ve vo V E Accumulator A AO to A1 Buffer memory special BMO to BMn function module BM Word of bit device Data register of GOT A900 GD Conversion of above bit device into word except timer and counter GD64 to GD1023 5 8 System Configuration SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E CC Link connection Remote O station Remote O station E GOT A900 operates as remote device or intelligent station A T A97LIGOT A960GOT Usable GOT A900 99599 A956GOT Intelligent device station Necessary interface A8GT J61BT13 module e Remote device station A8GT J61BT15 Connection cable Shielded twisted cable Max cable length Conforms to network specifications When the GOT is used as an intelligent station device comment display and T C set value monitor changing in system monitoring function are not available When the GOT is used as a remote device station the system monitoring function cannot be used Connection to A Mode CPU iene A985GOT A97LIGOT A960GOT Usable GOT A900 A953GOT Necessary interface Meares module Connection RS 232C scl QC30R2 cable length 3m 9 84feet cable cable iach ore TS aS a a a Max cable length 3m 9 84 feet x The A953GOT contains the R
360. ode Also the Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CC Link and serial communication computer link modules for AnS Q2AS series cannot be used Use the Q series modules E Other networks In addition to the Ethernet MELSECNET 10 H CC Link network and RS232C 422 485 serial communication modules developed for the Q mode the Q mode allows you to use the other network compatible modules developed for the AnS series When using those network modules use the QA1S6 series modules B extension base for AnS Since there are restrictions on use refer to the explanation sections of the corresponding modules AnS series network modules usable with the Q mode Network Name Module Type MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 VO LINK A1SJ51T64 JPCN 1 A1SJ71J92 S3 S LINK A1SJ71SL92 B NET A1SJ71B62 S3 Intelligent communication A1SD51S ID interface A1SJ71D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 A1SD32 D1 A1SD32ID2 Profibus FMS A1SJ71PB96F Profibus DP A1SJ71PB92D DeviceNet A1SJ71DN91 Modbus A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 S2 E Ranges accessible by GPPW CSKP using the routing function The ranges accessible with GPPW and CSKP using the routing function are given below Refer to the following table for the PLC types given in the description Type IV CPU Type Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q2AS S1 Q2ASH S1 A2U S1 A3U A4U Q02 A Q02H A QO6H A A2AS S1 A2USH S1 Other than above Ethernet Module Type QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 AJ71Q
361. odel list given at the end of this manual The ladder logic test tool used to simulate designed sequence programs the utility packages for setting data of various intelligent function modules such as analog to digital converter and digital to analog converter modules and other software programs can be added in additionally installed in GPPW for use GPPW is an easy to understand easy to operate software environment since various software programs can be used in the same operating environment with similar operability Function List The chief functions of GPPW are listed below Compatible series FX A QnA Q Q mode A mode series USB RS232C Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CC Link serial communication module including via modem Ladder list SFC Read write of GPPA GPPQ FXGP DOS WIN format files Editing of ladder list SFC A FX conversion A QnA conversion A Q conversion Q QnA conversion Device comment note statement editing Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CC Link parameter settings Connection method Programming language File format conversion Program editing Program conversion Comment editing Network setting Monitoring Ladder SFC monitoring program monitoring network monitoring CPU module internal device data monitoring Test Timer counter set value changing CPU module internal device data changing Help CPU module error special relay register key operation Operating Environment GPPW operate
362. of I O points controlled as remote I O by the remote I O network Note 2 Number of I O points on the main extension base directly controlled by the CPU module Note 3 In a total of two SFC files that may be created one is the program execution management SFC 2 22 Q Mode CPU Modules QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Battery Life The Q6BAT battery built in the CPU module is used to back up the programs and various data stored in the RAM memory of the CPU module during a power failure and to back up the clock element continuously during a power failure The Q6BAT is not used while 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module The battery life of the Q6BAT depends on the total power failure time when 5VDC is not supplied from the power supply module Note that the SRAM card contains a battery Q2MEM BAT in itself and is independent of the consumption of the Q6BAT Battery life Total Power Failure Backup Time after Battery Error ON Hours CPU Type value Q02CPU 13120 120 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 6435 120 4228 48 Note 1 If the total power failure time is less than the above value the battery must be changed in 10 years as a guideline Accessories Product Battery Quantity Manuals MODEL SELECTION CPU The following manuals are related to the Q mode CPU Name QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Desi
363. of transmission terminals Features E System configuration l Main base Q301B A1SJ71B62 S3 Extension base QA1S6 0B B NET Transmission terminal Transmission terminal Power distribution equipment The A1SJ71B62 S3 can be used with QA1S6__B Transmission terminal Power distribution equipment Power distribution equipment E Connectable remote modules B NET transmission terminals are connectable For details of the transmission terminal refer to the Mitsubishi B NET facility monitoring system catalog MODEL SELECTION NETWORK WE Twisted pair cable specifications Item Specifications Cable type Local pair polyethylene insulation vinyl sheathed cable with shield JCS 224B Number of pairs 1 Conductor diameter 1 2 Conductor 16 5 Q km max 20 C resistance Insulation 10 000M Q km or more resistance Withstand voltage 1000VAC 1 minute or longer E Restrictions on use with Q mode No restrictions Performance Specifications Item Specifications Max number of transmission 63 stations terminals connected Data capacity 2048 words Max transmission distance distance Transmission path Bus Communication protocol Data transfer volume Max 16 bytes Even parity sumcheck CPEV S 1 2 Twisted pair cable Error control Applicable cable Number of I O points 32 points occupied Internal current consumption 170mA 5VDC
364. ogram scan of master station CPU module Standby master function When master station is disconnected due to a fault standby master station replaces it to continue communication Interrupt program start When specified condition data is received interrupt program of CPU module is started Slave station separation function Only module that failed to make data link due to power off etc is separated and data link continues with normal modules only Automatic return function When returning to normal module disconnected from data link due to power off etc automatically takes part in data link Reserved station function By setting remote and local stations to be connected in future as reserved stations you can set them so that they will not be handled as data link error stations Error invalid station setting function You can set module that failed to make data link due to power off etc so that they will not be handled as data link error stations Temporary error invalid station setting Communications with station where communication error occurred is suspended temporarily to prevent delay function in link scan time Station number overlap checking function Checks for multiple remote stations of the same station number 2 61 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Performance Specifications Control specifications Performance Communication specifications 2 62 Item Max number of link points Number of link points per statio
365. oints basic a Le instruction processing speed 34ns Program capacity 252k steps number az 0 64 E of I O points 4096 points basic instruction processing speed 34ns Memory card os aes ee fow fos O fom O y ooa Battery Battery for program memory standard eae EA RAM E When using Q3 L B Q6 _ B base unit For details of whether there are restrictions or not refer to the next section System Configuration Number of Points Current Product Description Occupied Consumption A Restrictions VO Allocation For power supply CPU 3 slots Lam For power supply CPU 5 slots a cee ee a i For power supply CPU 8 slots S Q series module loading base Lol No For power supply CPU 12 slots 2 5 MODEL SELECTION E When using Q3 B Q6 Applicable Model List the next section System Configuration Product Extension base unit QC100B Q61P A1 Q61P A2 QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 QJ71E71 Extension cable Power supply module Input module Output module Blank module MELSECNET 10H module Ethernet module Serial communication CC Link module Analog digital conversion Q64AD module Q68ADV Q68ADI Q62DA Q64DA Digital analog conversion module High speed counter module Positioning module Note The positive common input module is used by applying a positive voltage to the common terminal and the negative co
366. oints set in PLC system setting oo oo E5 ES5 ES 5 PLC parameter Default 16 points CO zE E E Oo oo 5 A E leol Ga 32 32 32 16 16 points points points points points gt 90 BO a YFO ue Slot No of extension base unit 2 is assigned AF CF EF YFF 10F the number next to the last slot No of extension 8 slots occupied base unit 1 x 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 v v oO o o o v v gt 3s 3 ledlesle3 s a a3 fo ol s5ojso fo o Po Bol E E SEISE SE E ELE m 2 23 2 2 sS esles 2 2 2 os D 2 E5 ES EB 5 5 5 se 5 a aS oat ie ool a 32 32 16 16 16 points poi i i i gt X110 X120 130 150 170 Y190 Y1A0 Y1B0 X11F X12F 14F 16F 18F Y19F Y1AF Y1BF 6 Modules having restrictions on the number of modules loaded Module Modules Loaded MELSECNET 10H network Up to 4 module QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 Ethernet interface module Up to 4 QJ71E71 B2 CC Link interface module 4 QJ61BT11 Interrupt module A1SI61 1 MELSECNET MINI S3 data link No restriction module However automatic refresh A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 AnS series special function module Note 1 function cannot be set Up to a total of 6 Note 1 The following modules correspond to restrictions on the number of modules loaded The other modules have no restrictions on the number of modules loaded AnS modules having restrictions on the number of A1SD51 A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 modules loaded Product In
367. old cathode backlight backlight OFF screen save time can be set 300 15 rows x 20 columns Minimum 16 x 16 per key No Flash ROM For storing monitor screen data for storing OS Built in 1M bytes user area 3M bytes user area for M3 type 1 channel built in AQ956GOT SBD A956GOT SBD M3 A956GOT LBD A956GOT LBD M3 1 channel for optional module loading e A1SD59J MIF e A8GT 50KBF e A9GT 50PRF 1 channel for personal computer connection bar code reader connection Single tone sound length adjustable 50 000 initial brightness 70 operating ambient temperature 25 C 40 000 period when display brightness becomes 50 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C 1 million times or more operating force not more than 0 98N Number of write times 100 000 times Q mode SW2D5C GOTRE PACK Version C or later bus connection SW3D5C GOTRE PACK or later A mode SW1D5C GOTRE PACK Version H or later PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications Power supply section specifications of GOT A900 Specifications Item A985GOT TBD A950GOT A97_IGOT _IBD B A951GOT QI A956GOT IBD M3 A960GOT EBD A953GOT input power Suoph 100 to 240VAC 24VDC 24VDC put Power SUPP Y 10 15 25 20 10 15 Input frequency Hz 50 60Hz 3Hz 50VA max at 100VAC input 60VA for other than RS 422 Input max appa
368. om remote device station 2 Own station station 3 sending area Area for receiving data from local station 4 Remote output RX Area for receiving data from master station station 1 Area for sending i data to remote device station 2 Area for sending data to local station Area for sending data to remote device station 2 Area for sending data to local station 4 Remote register RWr Unusable station 1 Area for receiving data from remote device station 2 Area for receiving data from local station 3 uae Area for receiving data from local station 4 Transient buffer l 1 Transient buffer I l Area for receiving data from master station station 2 Area for receiving data from master station station 3 rea for receiving data from master station station 4 Remote register RWr Unusable station 1 Area for receiving data from master station Area for receiving data from master i n Area for receiving data from master station Remote register RWw Unusable station 1 Area for receiving data from remote device station 2 Own station station 3 sending area Area for receiving data from local station 4 Transient buffer Remote input RY Area for receiving data from remote I O station 1 Area for receiving data from remote device station 2 Area for receiving data from local station
369. om the PLC is displayed as in the defined macro instruction format Increased Speeds of Programming Ports ee ee ee eee Se eee cee eevee eeeeteseeeeeeeee The Q series CPU modules are standard equipped with a RS 232 port operable at max 115 2kbps and a 12Mbps USB port installed in recent personal computers QO2CPU is equipped with RS 232 only These high speed programming ports have achieved much shorter program transfer time and faster monitoring increasing the efficiency of machinery equipment adjustment E 26k step program and parameter write time s Q25HCPU USB 12 Q25HCPU RS 232 __ 30 Q3ACPU 86 A4UCPU 94 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Note The time may be longer than above depending on the performance of the personal computer and the conditions of communication with other devices Password Function Programs and data within the Q series CPU module can be protected by a password This function is effective for prevention of program damage due to accidental operation or copying of specifically developed programming techniques included in the programs and data 1 8 soinyeo4 NEO Ae RON UTILIZATION OF EXISTING ASSETS COMPATIBILITY MAINTAINED We offer the customers who already use the A QnA series PLCs with the means to utilize the assets of the A QnA series and use the excellent functions and performance capabilities of the Q series Mode Selection Q Mod
370. omputer connection both sides D sub 25 pin 3m 9 84ft cable 25 9 pin converter is needed for GOT side For personal computer connection both sides D sub 25 pin 3m 9 84ft cable 25 9 pin converter is needed for GOT side 3m 9 84ft cable For personal computer connection one side D sub 9 pin D sub 25 pin 3m 9 84ft cable For personal computer connection both sides D sub 9 pin 3m 9 84ft cable For personal computer connection both sides D sub 9 pin 3m 9 84ft cable For personal computer connection one side D sub 9 pin half pitch 3m 9 84ft cable CPU connection RS 232 cable 3m 9 84ft cable For parallel printer connection 6 26 MODEL LIST ID Systems Product Type Outline D NS series Battery less data D NSO3PS Plate type memory capacity 320k bytes compact carrier D NSO3PM Plate type memory capacity 320k bytes metal mounting D NSO3P Plate type memory capacity 320k bytes oil resistant metal mounting Reader writer D NS422RW Standard max communications distance 25mm 0 99inch D NS422RWS Compact max communications distance 15mm 0 59inch ID controller D NS232IF2 For personal computer RS 232C reader writer 2 channels D series Cable Battery built in data carrier Holder Reader writer Handy controller For general purpose personal computer Cable D NS422CAB10 D NS422CAB20 D NS422CAB40 D NS422CAB100 D 8PS D 8PX D 8P D 03P D 03CS D 03CS HLD D 422RWL D 422RW D
371. on base unit Type QA1S35B QA1S38B Number of I O modules 5 8 loaded Applicable I O modules AnS series External dimensions 315 12 41 W 420 16 55 W mm inch x130 5 12 H x130 5 12 H Weight kg Ib 0 75 1 65 1 2 2 lt QA1S65B QA1S68B accessories gt Product Description Base mounting screw M5x25 4 pcs Handling instructions 1 When mounting the base unit into a control panel etc leave a 30mm 1 18inch or more clearance between its top and the panel structure or parts to ensure ease of module replacement and reduce the influence of radiated noise or heat Also leave 20mm 0 79inch or more clearances to the left and right of the PLC 2 Mount the base unit on a flat surface to prevent possible flexing of the printed circuit boards Extension Cables An extension cable is used for connection between the main and extension base units or between the extension base units The same extension cables are used for both the Q and A modes E Appearance E Model list Type QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Cable length 0 6 1 2 3 5 10 m inch 0 02 0 05 0 12 0 20 0 39 Usable base unit Main base unit QA1S35B QA1S38B Extension base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B 0 16 0 22 0 4 0 6 1 11 0 35 0 48 0 88 1 32 2 42 Weight kg Ib H Directions for use When the above extension cables are used together the overall distance of the extension cables should be within
372. onal computer side 9 pin D Sub PLC side 6 pin Mini DIN E RS 232 cable connection example Personal PLC side computer pin number pin number 1 RD 2 SD 3 SG 4 Reserved 5 DR 6 ER Note Do not make connection to the PLC side pin number 4 E Instructions 1 The Q mode CPU can communicate at up to 115 2kbps but depending on the performance of the personal computer connected it may not be able to communicate at 115 2kbps If so choose any of 57 6k 38 4k 19 2k and 9 6kbps communication speeds 2 When using the QC30RC 3m 9 84ft cable we have confirmed that communication can be made at 115 2kbps 3 The usable communication speed and distance of the cable fabricated by the user should be checked by the user 4 When fast long distance communication is needed consider using RS 232 optical cable converters FA OPT232 USB Connection Connection configuration diagram The following diagram shows a configuration for connection with a personal computer by a USB interface oocooa QO6HCPU Cc 1 w USB interface USB cable E Usable USB cables Please choose a cable that complies with USB Standard Rev 1 1 and examine operability with the CPU module and the computer E instructions 1 The longest usable distance of USB is 5m 16 39ft 2 USB may be used with Windows 98 only Other Connection Systems When using SW5D5C GPPW E you can u
373. onally available basic communication support tool SW3D5F CSKP E allows you to create external device side communication programs without being concerned with the details of the protocol communication procedure for MC protocol E Transmission of data from PLC to personal computer Communication using MC protocol cannot transmit data at the desired timing of the PLC since it transfers all data under commands from the personal computer PLC always performs passive processing The on demand function is designed to interrupt MC protocol communications to actively send data from the PLC Using this function data can be transmitted to the external device when a machinery equipment error occurs or when a given condition holds Note 2 The on demand function is unavailable for a system which uses the communication support software package on the personal computer side Note 3 To use the on demand function to send data a sequence program is required E Communications with measuring instruments such as bar code reader The data communications function using the no protocol mode can be used to transfer data between the PLC and printer bar code reader measuring instrument etc in the communication protocol determined by the external device The no protocol mode is a function designed to communicate any data using a sequence program and can be used in accordance with the protocol of the external device Note that data generation transm
374. ontrol module D Sub 25 pin half pitch D Sub conversion adapter cable For AD75 A1SD75 A1SD75P0O Mitsubishi MR HOA connection cable 2m 6 56ft A1SD75PL Mitsubishi MR JDA connection cable 2m 6 56 ft A1SD75PL1 Mitsubishi MR J2D A connection cable 2m 6 56 ft A1SD75PL Mitsubishi MR CDA connection cable 2m 6 56 ft Master module for optical twisted pair cables Master module for twisted pair cables only For master local SI QSI optical cable duplex loop For master local coaxial 75 Q cable duplex loop For master local module twisted pair Remote I O module twisted pair Note 1 Compatible mode Usable A Usable with restriction X Unusable External accessory 6 16 Compatible Mode OJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJO OO OJO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOIOJOJOJO O O gt OJOJOJOJOJ O OJO X x x OJOJO OJO ClO OO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOjO oO KIXIX XIDID MODEL LIST Q A Mode Common Model List Product MELSECNET 10 Ethernet module CC Link module I O Link master module JEMANET B NET module S LINK master module Intelligent communication module Modbus Profibus DeviceNet Position detection module PLC simple monitoring module Memory card interface module ID interface module Note 2 Blank cover AnS conversion adapter Type A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ72QLP25 A1SJ72QBR15 A6BR10 A6BR10 DC A6RCON R75 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3
375. orce not more than 0 98N Built in extra Number of write times 100 000 times memory Weight kg Ib Compatible software package TBA 2 35 5 17 SBAILBA 1 78 8 92 TBD 2 30 5 06 1 70 3 74 SBD LBD 1 80 3 96 SBA EU 1 78 3 92 Q mode SW2D5C GOTRE PACK Version C or later bus connection SW3D5C GOTRE PACK or later A mode SWOD5C GOTRE PACK Version A or later A985GOT TB _ SW1D5C GOTR PACK C version or later A970GOT LBI_ SW1D5C GOTR PACK J version or later 5 13 Q O A gt ro PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications E Performance specifications of A950 A951 A953 956GOT Item Resolution Display pixels section Display size mm inch Display color colors Backlight Number of touch keys Touch points oi pixels RS 232C interface RS 422 interface Bus interface Communication module interface Optional module interface RS 232C interface Buzzer output Display section h Backlight h Life Touch key Built in extra memory Compatible software package Specifications A950GOT SBD A951GOT QSBD A953GOT SBD A950GOT SBD M3 A951GOT QSBD M3 A953GOT SBD M3 A950GOT LBD A951GOT QLBD A953GOT LBD A950GOT LBD M3 A951GOT QLBD V3 A953GOT LBD M3 Q SBD M3 STN color liquid crystal Q LBD M3 Monochrome liquid crystal 320 x 240 115 x 86 4 58 x 3 3 Q SBD M3 8 Q LBD M3 2 monochrome C
376. ores the operating status error codes and others to the internal device memory of the CPU module With this function you need not create sequence programs for reading Automatically refreshed data are various error codes LED ON states modem connection status PLC CPU monitoring function RS 232 signal status mode setting status transmission control setting states etc Automatic refresh cannot be set for the transfer of data communicated in the No protocol bidirectional protocol etc which occurs irregularly Automatic refresh setting screen sample Auto refresh setting 5 r Module information Module model name QJ71024 R2 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Module side Module side PLC side LA Setting item Buffer size Transfer word Device count Flash ROM access register read delete 1 1 result CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt D1000 status CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 7 gt D1001 status Switch setting error mode switching error T 1 gt status Number of registered user frame 1 1 gt Flash ROM system parameters write result T 1 gt Modem function error code it 1 gt D1002 Modem function sequence status 1 1 gt D1003 gt Make text file End setup Cancel 2 84 I O Modules MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Overview The Q series I O modules are compatible with the bus of the h
377. ossible o A A A A Note 1 Depending on the software version there are restrictions on the program capacities CPU internal device capacities etc For details refer to Programming A MODE Note 2 The above table gives general usability and connectability for comparison of the Q mode and A mode Since there may be restrictions on usable connectable products always check details in the applicable model list and corresponding model explanation sections OVERVIEW Compatibility of Q Mode PLC with AnS Q2AS Compatibility of Q Mode PLC with AnS Q2AS The following table indicates the compatibility between Q mode PLC programs and AnS Q2AS series programs Note that the following table gives general information only and details should be checked in the corresponding module explanation sections Item General program Ethernet Host system side program MELSECNET 10 CC Link Serial Host communic system ation side program PLC side Incompatible Compatible Compatibility with AnS Programs upwardly compatible with AnS Can be used after conversion into Q program by GPPW software Compatible Note that sequence program accessing programs need corrections Incompatible Compatible in LB LW LX LY SB SW assignment Compatible in MELSECNET 10 dedicated instructions Compatible in sequence programs Compatible Note that sequence program accessing programs need corrections Compatibility w
378. ot be converted GP GP PRO PB III for Windows DOS is a trademark of Digital 5 5 Q zA gt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION System Configuration Software Packages E Operating environment Use SW _ D5C GOTRE PACK on a personal computer in the following operating environment Pentium 133MHz or more recommended Personal computer where Windows 95 Personal computer Disk drive CD ROM drive required for installation Main memory 32M bytes or more recommended 130MB or more Standard installation capacity 80MB free space of 50MB or more for execution One usable with Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or more Hard disk free space CRT Resolution Mouse keyboard Ones usable with Windows 95 printer CD ROM drive Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 E Connection with personal computer An RS 232C cable is used to download screen data from a personal computer to the GOT Data transfer can also be made using a PC card RS 232C cable Personal computer Software package W D5C GOTRE PACK CD ROM GOT j Connection Forms Available for GOT A900 Connection Form Bus connection CPU direct connection Serial communication module connection Computer link connection MELSECNET 10 connection MELSECNET II connection MELSECNET B connection CC Link connection O Usable x Unusable x Incompa
379. ote that if you select the high speed mode the following processings performed in the normal mode are not performed and care must be taken for programming Save processing of index register In the normal mode where the save return processing of the index register Z is automatically performed at a shift to an interrupt program use of the index register in the interrupt program does not corrupt the value of the index register Main program Index save Interrupt program Index return In the high speed mode however this save return processing is not performed Hence use of the index register in the interrupt program may produce an illegal index register value at a return to the main program To prevent this use the ZPUSH ZPOP instruction in the interrupt program to perform the save return processing of the index register in the user program Save processing of file register file name In the normal mode the save and return processings of the file register name being used are automatically performed at a shift to and a return from an interrupt program Hence using the QDRSET instruction in the interrupt program to change the file register file name re sets the original file register file name automatically at a return In the high speed mode this save return processing is not performed and this should be processed in the user program as required E Constant scan function In the program processing of th
380. otective circuits forward reverse or other opposed motion interlocking circuits and positioning upper and lower limits switches 2 When the PLC detects either of the following faulty conditions it may stop operation and turn off all outputs e The overcurrent protection or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated e The PLC CPU detected a fault such as the watchdog timer error with its self diagnostic function In addition all outputs may be turned on when there is a fault that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit or provide a proper mechanism outside the PLC that will make sure the machine will operate safely at such times For fail safe circuit examples refer to Loading and Installation on the next page IMPORTANT Whether outputs are turned off or not depends on the Hold Clear selection preset per output module When Hold is selected outputs are not turned off if a faulty condition is detected Therefore always make up a necessary external safety circuit 3 Outputs could be left on or off when there is a problem in the output module relay or transistor Build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any output signal that could cause serious accidents When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure a
381. ously at power on of the PLC Examples of system design circuits in the above viewpoint are given below i System design circuit example 1 when not using ERR contact of power supply module When using Q mode For AC POWER SUPPLY For AC DC POWER SUPPLY Input switched when power f supply a TRANSFORMER e TRANSFORMER established FUSE FUSE FUSE DC cre POWER SM52 SUPPLY OH Ow sm4o3 RUN STOP circuit vn interlocked with RA1 A FUSE Set time for PROGRAM DC power 2 ghee 7 supply to be established M10 eure PROG RAMI RAT MC STOP SW Low battery alarm it Voltage relay is Leo Lamp or buzzer xM recommerded Yn RA1 switched ON by SM403 run monitor relay MC OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm T 1 Y Power to output mo el eee a i equipment switched staat SM403 i OFF when the STOP meo i signal is given the case of an emergency stop or a stop caused by a limit switch OUTPUT MODULE Te Lac Power to output Interlock circuits as necessary equipment Provide external interlock switched OFF circuits for conflicting when the STOP operations such as forward signal is given rotation and reverse rotation In the case of and for parts that could nine Sa damage the machine or AA Ci AR if no interlock by a limit switch When PLC power supply and output power 3 Wh
382. put enable disable flag Digital value check code Error code Error occurrence flag Error clear request Digital to analog conversion enable disable setting Output range setting status Offset gain setting Error Operating condition Output range Monitoring testing screen sample Monitor AmE Module information Module model name Q64DA Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type D A Conversion Module Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 Digital value 750 750 CH2 Digital value 880 880 CH3 Digital value ol 0 CH4 Digital value a 0 CH1 Set value check code 0000 CH2 Set value check code 0000 CH3 Set value check code 0000 CH4 Set value check code 0000 Eror code a Setting range 0000 XAY monitor test X Y monitor test Operating condition setting Operating setting Oifset oain setting Flash ROM setting r Details ai Curent value Monitoring module J _ display Read fr File read modul aia Make text file art monitor Stop monitor Cannot execute test Execute test Close 2 107 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES High Speed Counter Modules QD62 QD62E QD62D Overview The QD62 QD62E and QD62D are high speed counter modules designed to count high speed pulse trains They can be used with external encoders to exercise control such as positioning These three modules differ as indicated
383. quence Program Simulation SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS 4 LLT cannot simulate the functions of special function network modules However it has a buffer memory area of 64k points x 64 modules for special function network modules Data write read can be performed to from this area 5 For the timing of LLT processing time taken for one scan is calculated as 100ms default value By changing the constant scan setting you can change the time taken for one scan 6 In LLT the timing method of the timer changes with the scan time constant scan setting of the logic test function At the scan time of 100ms the current value of the 100ms timer is incremented by 1 every scan and the current value of the 10ms timer is incremented by 10 every scan At the scan time of 10ms the current value of the 100ms timer is incremented by 10 every scan and the current value of the 10ms timer is incremented by 1 every scan 7 OPERATION ERROR occurs if a device range is exceeded in indirect designation using the index register 8 In real number processing instructions the ladder logic test tool LLT checks their real number ranges strictly OPERATION ERROR occurs if any value entered cannot be evaluated as a real number 9 The following parameters are invalid if set Parameter Memory capacity setting PLC system setting PLC RAS setting I O assignment Device setting Network pa
384. r LCD RS232C interface 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD RS232C interface 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels 8 color STN color LCD external communication interface required 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply 320 x 240 pixels monochrome LCD external communication interface required 3MB built in memory 24VDC power supply A9GT QBUss__ For bus connection to Q mode PLC for connection of one A960 970 975 985GOT or for last GOT when multiple GOTs are connected A9GT QBUS2S For bus connection to Q mode PLC for connection of multiple A960 970 975 985GOTs A9GT QBUS2SU For bus connection to Q mode PLC for connection of multiple A956GOTs For bus connection to Q mode PLC needed when distance to first GOT exceeds 13 2m A951GOT QLBD M3 A953GOT SBD M3 A953GOT LBD M3 A956GOT SBD M3 A956GOT LBD M3 Bus connection board A9GT QCNB 43 28ft Serial communication For CPU direct connection computer link connection microcomputer connection and RS 422 A9GT RS4 board connection For CPU direct connection computer link connection microcomputer connection and RS 232 A9GT RS2 A connection A9GT RS2T Clock function built in serial communication board Network connection A7GT J71LP23 MELSECNET 10 inter PLC optical loop module A7GT J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 inter PLC coaxial bus Data link connection A7GT J71AP23 MELSECNET II optical loop module A7GT J71AR23 MELSECNET II coaxial loop
385. r connected to GOT is written to PLC CPU Operation panel is used to perform write to devices e g touch input numerical input and screen switching from outside GOT Monitors tests PLC CPU devices and special function module buffer memory e Screen level security Can protect screen switching hide display partially and protect input operation Can also protect switching to optional functions such as system monitor function e System level security Protects switching to system screen utility function such as setup screen e Project level security Protects uploading of screen data Performs print out of alarm history output of daily monthly report report function color hard copy of display screen etc EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS External Dimensions E A985 A97_VA960 A95_ GOT Product mounting clearances E Us MMMM MMA Y V Z eh lls p Sales Y Y Wii gt s Plate thickness within UM He 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16 inch A area dimensions Since the connection cable of the GOT A900 is pulled out in a downward direction the following space is required in consideration of its flexing radius Type A Type E A985GOT Paes 227 4 or more A985GOT 312 301 43 9 ae 12 29 11 86 9 38 10 91 1 58 1 93 AQ7ZLIGOT
386. rameters Setting Item Items except sequence and file register in program capacity are invalid Items other than STOP RUN time output mode are invalid e Annunciator display mode is invalid e Items other than operation error and special function module access error in error time operation mode are invalid All valid Latch range is invalid All invalid 10 For the A mode CPU function the following special relays are supported by LLT Number M9008 M9009 M9010 M9011 M9012 M9020 M9021 M9022 M9023 M9024 M9028 M9030 Note 1 M9031 Note 1 M9032 Note 1 M9033 Note 1 M9034 Note 1 M9036 M9037 M9038 M9039 M9042 M9051 M9054 M9091 Name Description Self diagnostic OFF No error error ON Error Annunciator OFF No detection detection ON Detection Operation error OFF No error ON Error Operation error OFF No error w Q flag ON Error Carry flag OFF Carry OFF ON Carry ON User timing clock No 0 User timing clock No 1 n2 n2 T Scan Scan User timing e a clock No 2 nt User timing Scan clock No 3 User timing clock No 4 Clock data read OFF No operation ON Read request CELE Bslepes coek 0 05sec 0 05sec 0 2 sec clock 0 1sec 0 1sec 1 clock 1sec 1sec Normally ON ON OFF Normally OFF ON OFF ON only 1 scan ON k Piscan after RUN OFF RUN flag OFF ON m only 1 scan after ke
387. rams and facilitate the checking of the setting status and operating status Initial Data Setting Initial value setting necessary to use the digital to analog conversion module can be made on the screen The following table lists the types of initial values that may be set Description Specifies the channel where digital to analog conversion will be made Digital to analog conversion enable disable Initial value setting screen sample Initial setting Bee m Module information Module model name Q64DA Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type D A Conversion Module Setting item Setting value Z CHT D A conversion enable disable setting Enable CH2 D A conversion enable disable setting Enable CH3 D A conversion enable disable setting Disable lt CH4 D A conversion enable disable setting Disable vie Details Select input Make text file End setup Cancel Automatic Refresh Setting By making automatic refresh setting you can automatically write digital to analog converted data etc from the CPU to the digital to analog conversion module reducing programs In automatic refresh setting assignment is made to set the CPU device data which will be written to the digital to analog conversion module and the CPU devices to which the digital to analog conversion module data will be read The following data can be refreshed automatically Digital to analog converted value of each channel
388. rd Capacity 8M bytes Small ATA card Capacity 16M bytes Small ATA card Capacity 32M bytes Replacement battery for Q2MEM 1MBS Power supply CPU 5 slots for Q series I O Power supply CPU 8 slots for Q series I O Power supply CPU 12 slots for Q series I O Power supply 5 I O slots for Q series module loading Power supply 8 I O slots for Q series module loading Power supply 12 I O slots for Q series module loading DIN rail mounting adapter for Q38B Q312B Q68B Q612B DIN rail mounting adapter for Q35B Q65B 0 6m 19 69ft cable for Q65B Q68B Q612B connection 1 2m 3 98ft cable for Q65B Q68B Q612B connection 3m 9 84ft cable for Q65B Q68B Q612B connection 5m 16 4ft cable for Q65B Q68B Q612B connection 10m 32 81ft cable for Q65B Q68B Q612B connection 100 120VAC input 5VDC 6A output 200 240VAC input 5VDC 6A output 100 120VAC input 16 points input time constant 20ms terminal block 24VDC positive common input 16 points input time constant 1 5 10 20 70ms terminal block 24VDC positive common input 32 points input time constant 1 5 10 20 70ms connector 24VDC positive common input 64 points input time constant 1 5 10 20 70ms connector 24VDC negative common input 16 points input time constant 1 5 10 20 70ms terminal block 24VDC negative common input 32 points input time constant 1 5 10 20 70ms connector 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 points without fuse terminal block 12 24VDC 0 1A sink 16 points with shor
389. register points that can be secured in the built in RAM changes with the program size etc Check the number of file register points that can be secured in the section of CPU Built In Memories Memory Cards Appearance The appearances and part names of the CPUs will be described E Q02CPU A E Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A l MODE CI l MODE O on ERA F ERA E USER EI USER CI Boor Ed Boor EI Di On PULL PULL L USB 7 il I O y il RS 232 D A RS 232 U v a A v Th 5 Note 1 In the A mode CPU module the USB port cannot be used MODEL SELECTION CPU CPU Modules Performance Specifications Item Control system 1 0 control method Programming language Processing speed LD instruction Memory capacity Main Program program capacit paciy Subprogram Number of I O device points Number of I O points Internal relay M points Latch relay L points Step relay S points Link relay B points Timer T points Counter C points Data register D points Link register W points Annunciator F points File register R points Accumulator A points Index register Z points Pointer P points Interrupt pointer I points Special relay M points Special register D points Comment points Numb
390. related products which may be used with the Q series PLCs What Tools Can Do E Creation of monitoring screen MELSEC FACTORY XMOP screen E Easy setting of communication system Zi Computer link utility Target Communication Diagnostic Version Baud rate 9600 iy k TCPAP Target Communication Diagnosis Version Channef 41 PLC COM por COM1 UDPAP Connect CPU Name OnACPU Z Relay CPU Name anacru aA F Logican Staion Nof0 4 Network MELSECNETA0 PLC No 5 1 0 address er Net No 5 aud W Link with applications such as Excel 4 ALETE WN Secohl J Rean Sheett Sheet Shot es il Reay i I Feten T E Creation of daily and monthly reports in combination with database Executed at specified intervals g Automatic saving sdl Automatic printing Logging SYSTEM CONFIGURATION System Required for Use of Personal Computer Related Products System Configuration OS Windows 95 Windows 98 i Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SW3D5F CSKP E basic communication support tool S
391. rent power dane bus connection 63VA max at 200VAC input 75VA for other than RS 422 RS 232C bus connection 40Ap max 61Ap max 40Ap max 26 4VDC max Inrush urrent 264VAC max load 30VDC max load CAp max 20 4VDC max load Permissible instantaneous ome 100VAC or more 1ms 19 2VDC or more 1ms 20 4VDC or more power failure time By noise simulator of 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1us noise with and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency 1500VAC for 1 minute Dielectric withstand voltage nee AG external 500VAC for 1 minute across DC external terminals earth terminals earth EU 3600VAC for 1 second Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 14s noise with and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Insulation resistance 10M Q or more by insulation resistance tester External output Transistor output 2 points RUN OUTPUT Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Rated load voltage 12V 24VDC Operating load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC peak voltage 30V range Max load current 0 1A point 0 2A common Max inrush current 0 4A within 10ms OFF time leakage current ON time max voltage drop 0 1mA max 1 0VDC TYP 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX 0 1A Response OFFtoON 10ms max resistive load time ONtoOFF 10ms max resistive load Q A gt Surge suppressor Zener diode Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable crimping terminal Applicable tightening torque RAV1 25
392. rial communication computer link module 1 Request o source CPU port serial communication module GPPW CSKP Network 2 to 7 Connected PLC Network 1 Relay station i Network 8 Relay station Target station 7 1 Target station CC Link Ga Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Request source Type of connected Type of networks 1 Type of relay Type of target Access Range PLC to 8 stations 1 to 7 station 1 GPPW MELSECNET 10 lor Ill i J PLC on path up to target station 2 lor Ill Il Il or IV PLC on path up to target station 1 lor Ill ll Il or IV PLC of type II on path up to target station 1 lor Ill Il Hl or IV PLC of type III or IV on path up to target station 1 PLC of type III or IV on CSKP lor Ill Il Il or IV PLC on path up to target station 1 lor Ill Il Il or IV PLC of type II on path up to target station 1 lor Ill Il Hl or IV PLC of type III or IV on path up to target station 1 PLC of type Ill or IV on network 1 2 30 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Network Overview When connecting via CPU port or serial communication computer link module 2 Request source GPPW CSKP CPU port serial communication module Network 2 to 8 Connected PLC Network 1 CC Link Relay station 1 Relay station Target station 8 1 PLC network 1 station 1 networks 2 to 9 stations 2 to 8
393. ries special function modules network modules with Q mode The Q mode CPU is not compatible with the A AnS series special function module network module dedicated instructions Rewrite all corresponding instructions using the FROM TO instruction When changing A AnS series special function modules network modules for Q series intelligent function modules network modules Dedicated instructions may be used with some of the Q series intelligent function modules network modules Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation sections of the corresponding intelligent function modules network modules 2 157 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Online Write Online File Write Online write is a function to make partial correction or entire change to a program which is being executed by the CPU module during RUN As a program can be corrected without stopping equipment operation this function is convenient for use during equipment adjustment E Online write When partial correction is made to a program there are no restrictions on the size of the program that can be corrected by online write Online write can be performed if the program size after correction is within the program memory size that can be secured by the CPU module E Online file write This function is not used to make partial correction but allows a program to be exchanged on a file basis When performing this function the CPU continues the proc
394. rite the parameters and positioning data on the QD75 buffer memory to the flash ROM built in the QD75 PINIT Initializes the parameters and positioning data on the buffer memory and flash ROM ERRCLR Clears an error and extinguishes the ERROR LED ERRRD Read the error code Appearance Note 1 For the QD71D1 QD75D2 and QD75D4 the type name 2 118 QD75P1 PUND Daxi eer co QD75P2 RND Dae printed is different from the one in the above diagram o 1 i I 90mm 3 55inch 136mm 5 36inch 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i mia 46mm 1 81inch QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 External I O Terminals Input terminals Signal Name Near point dog signal Upper limit switch signal Lower limit switch signal Stop signal Speed position switching Common Manual pulse generator A phase Manual pulse generator B phase Drive unit ready Common Zero signal Common DOG FLS RLS STOP CHG PULSER READY w l RDY Internal Circuit Wiring wiring required wiring as required Wir ing MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT Positioning Module FUNCTION MODULES QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Output terminals QD71P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 Output terminals QD71D1
395. rk When there are multiple networks data can be transferred to from station on network where own station is not connected directly This function is used when monitoring PLC located beyond multiple networks on GPPW software When there are no stations set in network common parameters it is recognized as an error and affects link scan time Error recognition and link scan time delay are not caused if stations planned to be added in future are specified as reserved stations If control station fails to make communication due to some fault another station automatically serves as control station to continue network control preventing whole system from being faulty You can select whether faulty control station that has returned to normal will return as ordinary station or control station When station that suspended communication due to some fault returns to normal it participates in communication automatically If cable breakage occurs in duplex loop type network communication is continued as long as transmission route is established If some station is powered off in simplex bus type network it does not affect other normal stations One CPU module can each be loaded with two network modules to duplex network Network status and each station status can be monitored using GPPW software MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 Module 2 newly added module AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 AJ71QLP21 S A1SJ71QLP21 S For optical SI QSI cable AJ71BR1
396. rk modules Dedicated instructions may be used with some of the Q series intelligent function modules network modules Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation sections of the corresponding intelligent function modules network modules 2 156 Comparison between Q Mode and A AnS PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs As compared to the A AnS series instructions the following instructions and others have been changed E Common instructions Added instructions As compared to the A AnS series a large number of instructions have been added to the Q mode Use the most appropriate instructions from among the great variety of instructions available for programming Instructions to be corrected for utilization The following instructions must be corrected when a program is utilized because they are different in usage method from those of the A AnS Class Main subprogram switching Failure check Carry reset Index qualification circuit LED indication instruction Local station data read Local station data write Remote I O station data read Remote I O station data write Partial refresh Carry set Microcomputer program call Extended file register 1 word increment read Extended file register 1 word increment write Extended file register 1 byte increment read Extended file register 1 byte increment write Extended file register block transfer Extended file register block change 16 bit integer gt r
397. rogram files Number of failures stored x 54 72 Specified devices traced 20 number of word device points x 2 number of bit device points 16 x 2 x trace count device range x 12 362 Number of write points set by FWRITE instruction Local device Failure history data Debugging data General purpose file Note 2 The network parameter and intelligent parameter sizes are listed below The following table indicates the maximum capacity per corresponding module and the capacity will be less than the given size according to the setting Corresponding s Module capacity Ethernet With e mail setting 12488 bytes module Without e mail setting 2060 bytes module MELSECNET 10 H 11466 bytes module 1548 bytes CC Link 1423 bytes module 6 bytes Analog to digital 76 bytes module conversion module Digital to analog conversion module Serial communication 1000 bytes module module 24 bytes module Note 3 The maximum number of file register points that may be stored in each memory is as listed below However if other files exist in the same memory the capacity usable by file registers reduces Note that if the file registers are stored separately in different memories drives the file register file used must be selected by the QODRSET instruction In addition the file registers stored in the ROM memory card are read only and cannot be rewritten with a program Memory Type Max Number
398. rotocol In data communications using the MELSEC communication protocol hereafter referred to as the MC protocol PLC data and program file read write PLC CPU status control remote RUN STOP etc can be performed from a host system In this protocol sequence programs are not needed since the PLC sends and receives all data under the commands of the host system In communications using the MC protocol one communication allows read write of up to 960 points 960 words of word devices Note 1 Equivalent to the PLC CPU data read write communications function of the A QnA series PLC E Communication support software package When the host system is a Windows personal computer you can easily create a host system side communication program without needing to be aware of the MC protocol by use of the optionally available communication support software package SW3D5F CSKP E CSKP offers general purpose functions for Visual Basic and Visual C E Communications with personal computer and other PLCs The communications function using fixed buffers is available to transfer data between the PLC and personal computer or another PLC In fixed buffer communications the PLC can transmit data actively so it can send data to the host system when a given condition holds at the occurrence of a machinery equipment error In data communications using fixed buffers up to 1k word of data can be sent or received between PLCs or between PLC
399. rr OPERATION PANEL GOT A900 Project manager The project manager provides project information and screen information at a glance Also it is convenient to manage screen data since screen copy movement and deletion can be made easily Debugging function By connection of a personal computer and GOT A900 the personal computer acts as a PLC and screen debugging can be made in a place where there is no PLC Effective utilization of data 1 GPPW comment data When specifying the device name you can refer to the comments created on the GPPW function software package and set the monitor device on the GOT A900 This facilitates device setting reducing device address setting mistakes Sin Comet Oewce s 2 E Dace C Choate zels exo po e oe LF wee ji oO mo UNEI i po UNE pos WACTING 2 Device comments created with GPPW are listed 2 Character data on a word processor can be utilized 3 BMP file data can be read to realize a beautiful high grade screen display easily 4 Machine drawings and other data can be imported using DXF file Release 14 CAD drawing data 5 You can use the screen data of the GOT800 series 100 Also the screen data of Digital s GP GP PRO PB III for Windows DOS can be used on the GOT A900 series after conversion is made with the simple converter function Some functions cann
400. rted at which describes the transition condition from one process ae a the initial step and the SFC programs in and after to another Also a fine operation in each step and each Re N f block 1 terminate processing at the end step and transition condition are described in ladders wait to be restarted from another block Machine operation Operation output and transition condition diagram for each step flowchart SFCdiagram Workpiece START switch detection if xo Xi Conveyor START Process START an SS START L4 operationunt Initialsteo operation 1 operation unit l Initial step He Y20 gt Pallet detection oes X2 pu ben Transition _____ r condition 1 l i C Tran J Pallet cl Pallet confirmation allet clamp 1 operation unit Step1 _ lt Y21 gt clamp operation Clamp confirmation ai X3 Transition _ r condition 2 l 1H C Tran J Drill rotation Y22 Y22 PLS MO MO Drill DOWN F Hie SET 23 4 Series of machine 4 Drilling operation 1 operation unit Step2 X4 Drill DOWN endpoint operations RST Y23 K20 Ee TO gt TO Drill UP _ SET Y24 Drill UP endpoint Transition X5 r F condition 3 l i C Tran J Pallet unclamp lt Y25 gt Unclamp operation me 1 operation unit Step3 Prs M1 H workpiece unloading M1 1 RST Y24 HH X6 Unclamp confirmation Conveyor STA
401. rtion factor within 5 AKO ase Approx 8mA 100VAC 60Hz approx 7mA 100VAC 50Hz 9 ABCDEF A Approx 15k Q 60Hz approx 18k Q 50Hz Response time 15ms or less 100VAC 50Hz 60Hz 20ms or less 100VAC 50Hz 60Hz Dielectric withstand voltage 1780VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV Core 0 3 to 0 75mm OD 2 8mm 0 11inch max 5VDC internal current 50mA consumption A Won nm OO WI YS O Cf NO on A amp PO lo Weight kg Ib x07 100VAC TB18 NC Internal 2 87 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX40 DC input module positive common type DC Input Module Positive Common Type Specifications QX40 Ber Rated input voltage 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 0123 157 Rated input current Approx 4mA Input derating No ON voltage ON current 19V or higher 3mA or higher OFF voltage OFF current 11V or lower 1 7mA or lower Input resistance Approx 5 6k Q Response time OFF ON 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms x 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10
402. run as the scan execution type Executed only once at power ON or STOP to RUN END processing Cyclic execution type program Program run at specified cyclic time intervals Scan type program Wait type program Low speed execution type program Run only when execution request is given Run only when constant scan or low speed program execution time has been set 2 144 PROGRAMMING Sequence programs initial execution type When multiple programs have been set as initial ms s execution type they are run in order of lower to higher An initial execution type program is run only once when the PLC is powered on or switched from STOP to RUN A program that may be run only once to fulfill its purpose program numbers and END processing is performed when all initial execution type programs are run RT i i In initial execution type programs you cannot use e g the initial processing for an intelligent function i y t i eet instructions which specify completion devices instructions module can be set as an initial execution type Removal f which need several scans until completion of program run of a program to be run only once from scan execution Pee y e g network dedicated instructions programs reduces the processing time of the scan execution programs Control with one program Using in
403. s 2 Measurement data etc is collected from external devices e g temperature controller bar code reader 3 Messages and numerical data etc is output to an external device e g printer for printing 4 Data is transferred to from external devices and other PLCs 5 A personal computer in which the GPPW function software package SW4D5C GPPW E or later hereafter referred to as GPPW has been installed is connected to perform programming and other operations for the Q series CPU Features E Fast large capacity communication The communication port of the QU71C24 permits communication at max speed of 115 2kbps and can make max 960 words of data communications in one communication with MC protocol communications E Communications with personal computer To exercise PLC monitoring control from a personal computer the MELSEC communication protocol Note 1 can be used to perform PLC data read write etc Using this protocol PLC device data and program file read write PLC CPU status control remote RUN STOP etc can be performed from an external device e g personal computer display The PLC transfers all data under commands from the external device and does not need sequence programs Note 1 This protocol is called dedicated protocol in the A QnA series PLC and referred to as the MC protocol E Communication support software package When an external device is a Windows personal computer using the opti
404. s Buffer memory 3k words Communication port RS232C 2ch RS422 1ch Number of I O points 32 points occupied Internal current 0 4A consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib 0 3 0 66 2 75 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK ID Interfaces A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 A1SD321D1 A1SD32ID2 Overview The A1SJ711ID1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 A1SD32ID1 and A1SD32ID2 are interface modules designed to connect one or two reader writers of the Mitsubishi D series D NS series ID system Using the ID system moves information together with the object to be controlled Therefore information management can be facilitated and you can easily perform exceptional processing in production Features WE System configuration Main base Q30B A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711ID2 R4 A1SD321D1 A1SD32ID2 l l Extension base QA1S6OB Reader writer Zop Tag The A1SJ71ID1 R4 A1SJ711ID2 R4 A1SD32ID1 and A1SD32ID2 can be used with QA1S6_B Performance Specifications Item A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 A1SD321D1 Compatible D 422RW D 422RWL reader writer Number of modules connectable Connectable cable D 422CAB10 10 32 79 m feet D 422CAB30 30 98 36 D 422CAB50 50 163 93 D 422CAB100 100 327 87 Usable data carrier Number of I O points 32 points occupied Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight kg Ib 0 63 138 60 E
405. s SWOD5C QADU E Overview Automatic Refresh Setting SWOD5C QADU E is a utility package designed to set By making automatic refresh setting you can initial data needed to use the Q64AD Q68ADV or automatically read analog to digital converted data etc from the analog to digital conversion module into the CPU reducing programs In automatic refresh setting assignment is made to set the CPU devices to which the Q68ADI analog to digital conversion module and to set automatic reading of analog to digital converted data to the CPU device memory It is used by adding it onto analog to digital conversion module data will be read The SW4D5C GPPW E or later following data can be refreshed automatically When using the Q64AD Q68ADV or Q68ADI QADU is Analog to digital converted value of each channel oaks j Error code detected by the analog to digital conversion module not required as initial value setting and others can be Maximum and minimum values of the analog to digital made in sequence programs but using QADU can reduce converted value of each channel sequence programs and facilitate the checking of the Automatic refresh setting screen sample setting status and operating status Initial Data Setting resets Q6R4DV Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Initial value setting necessary to use the analog to digital ao Rea TAREE Setting item Buffer size Transfer direction Device word count conversio
406. s it can return to network Remote device station registration No Yes No function Interrupt program start Yes No Yes No Network parameter setting from Yes Yes No Yes Yes No GPPW Dedicated RLPA RRPA x x x x x O Network parameter instructions automatic refresh parameter setting compatible with A1SJH A1SH A2SH only CCL CCLEND x x x x O x Mail box registration SPCCLR x x x x O x Suspension of transfer SPCBUSY to from intelligent device station Remote station status read x x x O O O Data transfer to from target station x x x O O O Transfer to from RS232 RIRCV module with handshake x x x O O O Access to automatic updating buffer Note 1 Only remote I O stations are connectable Function List Item Outline Cyclic communication function Communication function by link device RX RY RWr RWw between master remote I O remote device intelligent device and local stations Transient communication function Communication function for data transfer by CC Link dedicated instructions or for program read write by GPPW programming software between master intelligent device and local stations Automatic CC Link start If made up of remote O stations only network can be started without parameter setting Remote device station initial setting Initial setting data to remote device stations is set in parameters for program deletion function Scan synchronization function Cyclic communication is synchronized with pr
407. s terminal block 12 24VAC 12 24VDC 16 points terminal block 12 24VDC 16 points terminal block sink 24VDC 16 points terminal block for high speed input sink 24VDC 16 points terminal block for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 32 points connector sink 24VDC 32 points connector for high speed input sink 24VDC 32 points connector for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 64 points connector sink 24VDC 64 points connector for high speed input sink 24VDC 64 points connector for high leakage current sensor sink 24VDC dynamic 64 points connector sink 5 12VDC 32 points connector sink source 12 24VDC 16 points terminal block for high speed input sink source 24VDC 16 points terminal block for high speed input sink source 24VDC 16 points terminal block for high leakage current sensor sink source 12 24VDC 32 points connector sink source 24VDC 32 points connector for high leakage current sensor sink source 24VDC 64 points connector sink source 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 16 points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 12 points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 independent contact output points terminal block 240VAC 24VDC 2A 8 points terminal block 100 240VAC 0 6A 16 points terminal block with fuse 100 240VAC 1A 8 points all points independent 100 240VAC 0 6A 8 points 4 points common 12 24VDC 0 1A 16 points t
408. s connection Q mode only e RS 232 connection to CPU module e MELSECNET connection e CC Link connection remote device station intelligent device station e Serial communication module connection E 256 color TFT high intensity 8 step brightness adjustment Capable of providing a 256 color display the A985GOT and A975GOT B can show clear and high grade photos as they are Also the high intensity TFT color liquid crystal models A985GOT A975GOT B A975GOT TBA EU A970GOT B A970GOT TBA EU have the industry s highest class brightness of 350cd m and are adjustable in eight steps of brightness Further more the 40 000 hour long life backlight makes it almost maintenance free A958GOT A975GOT B A970GOT B A95 _IGOT OPERATION PANEL GOT A900 E Voice output function A985 A975 A970 A960GOT Voice output can be provided by connecting an amplifier built in speaker to the voice output terminal standard equipped This function can be used for alarm work directive etc Specified bit device X1 turns on X1 OFF Y ON ee stopped When X1 turns on GOT recognizes it and when condition holds GOT plays specified voice file Item Specifications File format Windows WAV Data format 16 bit PCM Sampling rate 8 000kHz Channel Monaural Max playing time file 8s Max number of registrations 100 E Functions for maintenance The
409. s flag Synchronous output request X0E Not used Not used XOF Error occurrence flag Error clear request Note 1 Signals to CH 3 and CH 4 are valid for the 4 channel output Q64DA E Buffer memory list Address Address Address Description 0 Digital to analog conversion 11 CH 1 set value check code Vacant eraman ne 1 Offset gain setting mode Offset 2 designation 3 Offset gain setting mode 4 Gain designation 5 to9 Vacant 19 Offset gain adjustment value Error code 10 Setting range Ee Note 1 Data for CH3 and CH4 are valid for the 4 channel output Q64DA designation Digital to analog conversion enable disable CH_ digital value setting b15 b14 b13 b12 bii bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 1 cH cH cH cH 4 3a 2 4 0 digital to analog conversion enable 1 digital to analog conversion disable Defaults to digital to analog conversion disable of all channels CHL set value check code The range check result of the written digital value is stored OOOFH The digital value written is more than the setting range OOFOH The digital value written is less than the setting range OOFFH The digital value written is outside the setting range Offset gain setting mode designation Specify the channels where offset gain selection will be set by the user b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO PTT LLL LIL pp sz Specify the channels for offset set
410. s from a CPU module to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module loaded in a main or extension base unit Intelligent function modules loaded in remote stations of an MELSECNET 10H network system can not be the target of access Index registers Z An index register is used for index qualification indirect designation of a device used in a sequence program Index qualification uses one index register and is specified by 16 bit data 32768 to 32767 or OH to FFFFH X0 MOV K 1 ZO 1 is stored in ZO Data of D10Z0 D 10 1 D9 is stored in DO Index qualification X0 MOV D10Z0 DO File registers R File registers are devices for constant data storage application or data register expansion application and are stored in the CPU module built in standard RAM drive 3 memory card RAM drive 1 or memory card ROM drive 2 Note that the file registers stored in the memory card ROM are read only When the ATA card is used as a memory card ROM file registers cannot be stored in the memory card ROM Unlike those of the data registers D the stored values of the file registers are not cleared at power on key reset File registers can be designated by block changing or designated consecutively 2 152 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs 1 Designation by block changing The file registers used are specified by separating them in increments of 32k points RO to R32767 When more than 32k
411. s gt The following equipment manual must be prepared separately connected Voltage 100 to 240VAC 24VDC 410 15 30 35 Product Description Remarks 50 60Hz4 5 Coaxial cable 3C 2V 5C 2V JISC3501 Max 21VA conformance gt apparent Connector plug Connector plug for 3C Qa a ow AFR a Inrush 40A within 8ms 17A within 1ms Termination resist r BORG ON ASS a current Q termination resistor Efficiency 65 or more 65 or more i 2 Permissible 20ms 10ms Must be prepared A Prepared as required E instantaneous power failure time Current 0 2A 0 6A consumption Continuous alarm transmission Warning output ERR1 On when A6BR10 becomes faulty power off error occurrence ERR2 On when A6BR10 is normal Isolation Non isolated method Rated 24VDC 2A resistive load switching 240VAC 2A COS 1 voltage current Minimum 5VDC 1mA switching load Maximum 264VAC 125VDC switching load Response OFF to ON 10ms or less time ON to OFF 12ms or less Life Mec 10 million times or more han ical Elec trical Rated switching voltage current load 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1 5A 200VAC 1A COS 0 7 100 thousand times or more 200VAC 1A 200VAC 0 5A COS 0 35 100 thousand times or more 24VDC 1A 100VDC 0 1A L R 7ms 100 thousand times or more suppressor External wiring ERR1 External load z4 Q Tn gy 14 leo Desv Internal circuit External
412. s is useful to get the entire picture e g product types New products Introduces products released recently or to be released soon Standard compliant products Introduces products which comply with various standards such as explosion proof and shipborne products and with foreign standards such as UL and EN Product details Provides detailed information on individual products such as specifications functions features wiring examples and outline dimensional drawings These can be exported as images Manual guidance Offers information on the manuals packed with the products and optional manuals e g updated version and new product compatible manual lists What s New Notice of items recently added or changed Use this when you want to know only the newest information Announcement Notice of expansion plans etc from the MELFANSweb View this from time to time Contact Introduces the locations and handling models of the Japanese domestic and overseas sales sites branches etc and service sites URL http www nagoya melco co jp english MELFANSweb INTRODUCTION TO MELFANSweb gt xe 5 D 2 2 D n MODEL LIST Q Mode Model List CPU Modules Q Mode Product CPU module Battery IC memory card SRAM card battery Base Main module Extension Adapter Extension cable Power supply module AC input module DC input module Contact output module Trans
413. s on Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT Its operating environment is as follows Windows95 Windows98 WindowsNT4 0 Pentium 133MHz or more recommended 32MB or more recommended 50MB or more 50MB or more 800 x 600 pixels or more CPU Memory Hard disk free space At installation Display Programming Languages The Q mode can be programmed in the ladder list and SFC MELSAP3 languages E Ladder mode The ladder mode is a programming method based on the concept of a relay control circuit and allows programming in representations close to the sequence circuit of relay control Programming is done by placing contacts coils and other symbols and used device numbers on the screen The ladder programmed on the screen is converted into a sequence program executable in the Q mode by conversion operation Relay symbolic language Left to right a a 1 2 7 8 9 XO X1 X5 X6 X7 10 He HR 1110 3 4 X2 X3 5 Top to bottom B X4 H oO 11 10 END 1 to 11 indicate the order of sequence program operations E List mode The list mode is a programming method in which Q mode instructions are described in execution order in a list format Contacts coils and other symbols are replaced by Q mode instructions for programming The sequence program created in the list mode can be displayed in the ladder mode for confirmation 2 138 PROGRAMMING S
414. s power failure causes a watchdog timer error 2 When the instantaneous power failure is cleared operation processing resumes Instantaneous power Power restored failure occurrence END 0 d END END QnCPU suspends operation When an instantaneous power failure occurred for longer than permissible instantaneous power failure time The Q mode CPU module performs the same operation processing as performed when it is reset and powered on or when it is reset by the reset switch E Self diagnostics The Q mode CPU has a self diagnostic function to determine whether if a fault is present Self diagnostics are designed to prevent PLC malfunctions and for preventive maintenance On detection of a fault an error is displayed and the PLC operation is stopped for example The diagnostic items are listed below Diagnostic Item CPU hardware fault Description Diagnoses the hardware of the CPU module Diagnoses the execution status of the END instruction Diagnoses the memory status END instruction unexecuted RAM check Arithmetic circuit check Diagnoses the execution status of the CPU module arithmetic circuit Diagnoses the status of the output module fuse Diagnoses the interrupt input Diagnoses the statuses of the intelligent function modules Diagnoses the bus status on the base unit Diagnoses the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure Fuse blown I O interrupt error Intelligent function module
415. sCon Ver 2 0 6 2 or later including DLL file Ver 2 5 0 1 or later Please contact to the following companies for pufchase of SysCon software Sysergetic Maicro Systems Inc USA 1 630 434 1770 Hilscher Gesellschaft Germany 49 6190 9907 0 NPS Ltd Japan 81 3 3226 8110 E Restrictions on use with Q mode No restriction Specifications Data size aan communication 2048 points 256 bytes each for send receive Message communication _ communication 240 bytes each for send and receive Communication speed amp distance Truck cable max distance Drop cable Thick cable Thin cable Thick thin 3 Total cable combination 125k bps 100m See the 156m 250k bps table below 7am 500k bps Consumption on network 26 5mA Occupied I O points 32 Consumption current 5VDC 0 24A Weight 0 23kg Combined distance of thick and thin cables Communication speed 39m Max combined distance of thick and thin cables 125k bps Thick cable distance 5 x thin cable distance lt 500m 250k bps Thick cable distance 2 5 x thin cable distance lt 250m 500k bps Thick cable distance x thin cable distance lt 100m 2 73 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Modbus interface A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 Overview The A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 and A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 are Modbus interface modules These modules support slave functions of ASCII and RTU protocols to connect MELSEC PLC to SCADA system Features E System co
416. se 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree e 0 to 2147483647 pulse 0 01 to 20000000 00 mm min Speed 0 001 to 2000000 000 inch min command 0 001 to 2000000 000 degree min 1 to 1000000 pulse s Acceleration Positioning range Positioning deceleration Automatic trapezoidal acceleration deceleration automatic S pattern acceleration deceleration processing dccaeraton 18388608 me time Four patterns can be set for both acceleration and deceleration times Sudden stop deceleration 1 to 8388608 ms time 2 119 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Item Se Applicable connector Applicable wire size Max output pulse Max connection distance from servo Internal current consumption 5VDC Number of I O points occupied External dimensions mm inch Weight kg Ib Positioning Module QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 A6CON1 A6CON2 A6CON3 0 3mm For connection to differential driver 1Mbps For connection to open collector 200kbps For connection to differential driver 10m 32 79ft For connection to open collector 2m 6 56ft QD75P1 0 40A QD75P2 0 46A QD75P4 058A QD75D1 0 52A QD75D2 0 56A QD75D4 0 82A 32 points I O assignment intelligent function module 32 points QD75P_ QD75D 98 3 86 H x 27 4 1 08 W x 90 3 55 D QD75P1 P2 D1
417. se the following connection systems in addition to the RS 232 port and USB connection of the CPU module Personal Computer Side Communication Q Mode PLC Side Port System Module COM RS 232 QJ71C24 QI 02 4 RO Ethernet board Ethernet QJ71E71 71 E71 B2 A70BDE J71QLP23 GE MELSECNET 10 QJ71LP21 Note 1 QJ71BR11 A70BDE J71QBR13 Note 1 A80BDE J61BT13 CC Link QJ61BT11 A80BDE J61BT11 Note 2 Note 1 SW3DNF MNET10 driver is necessary Note 2 SW3DNF CCLINK driver is necessary 2 161 SIMULATION DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS Sequence Program Simulation Software The SW5D5C LLT E ladder logic test tool hereafter reffered to as LLT is software designed to add simulation functions onto GPPW This comprehensive software is compatible with the A series QnA series FX series and motion controller in addition to the Q series to allow GPPW created sequence programs to be simulated on a personal computer without writing them to the PLC If the intelligent function module software packages have also been added you can simulate the initial parameter setting and automatic refresh parameter setting states of intelligent function modules such as analog to digital converter module digital to analog converter module and communication module Features Program run can be checked on a personal computer making debugging efficient 1 Without connection of a PLC program run can be checked on the perso
418. ses and remote I O points controlled in the remote I O network E Fast communication with peripheral devices Though the programming interface of the conventional AnS series CPU was RS422 9 6k or 19 2kbps the A mode CPU uses RS 232 to be compatible with the maximum communication speed of 115 2kbps It facilitates connection with a personal computer already acting as a general programming device to shorten program write read time E Increased number of extension bases In the conventional AnS series the number of extension bases allowed was only 1 However the A mode CPU accepts up to seven extension bases eight bases including the main and having up to 64 I O slots You can increase the I O points of the current AnS series system Also you can increase the overall distance of extension cables up to 13 2m 43 28ft E Standard equipped flash ROM The CPU has a built in flash ROM allowing easy storage of programs in ROM MODEL SELECTION CPU CPU Modules QO02CPU A QOD2HCPU A QO6HCPU A E Standard equipped SRAM memory card E 1 ms increment timer instruction usable loading slot Sh Making setting with the new dedicated instruction Max 152k points of extended file register area can be ZHTIME makes the 1ms increment timer instruction secured in the SRAM card When it is used with the built usable in RAM of max 64k points a total of 216k points of file registers are available Note 3 The number of file
419. software CD ROM QD75P E Operating Manual packed with product RS 232 cable for personal computer CPU connection 3m 9 84ft mini DIN6P Dsub9P Adapter for standard PCMCIA slot of Q2MEM memory card Compatible Mode Com patible Note 1 Compatible mode Usable 5 Windows 95 8 Windows 98 N Windows NT 4 0 V MS DOS DOS V Note 2 Compatible OS 6 22 MODEL LIST Personal Computer Network Boards Compatible Com Product Type Outline Mode patible A Q OS MELSECNET 10 AT0BDE J71QLP23 MELSECNET 10 interface for ISA bus optical SI QSI 200 250 driver O A 5 8 N V interface board type SW3DNF MNET10 A70BDE MELSECNET 10 interface for ISA bus optical GI 500 125 driver type O A 5 8 N V J71QLP23GE _ SW3DNF MNET10 MELSECNET 10 interface for ISA bus coaxial bus driver type O A 5 8 N V A70BDE J71QBR13 SW3DNF MNET10 13JL81 MELSECNET 10 Interface Board User s Manual packed with product CC Link interface board 7 CC Link interface for PCI bus local station twisted pair driver type O O 5 8 N A80BDE J61BT13 SW3DNF CCLINK 13JL82 A80BD J61BT13 User s Manual packed with product Note 1 Compatible OS 5 Windows 95 8 Windows 98 N Windows NT 4 0 V MS DOS DOS V Note 2 MELSECNET 10 board is compatible with MELSECNET 10 mode and is not compatible with MELSECNET 10H mode Note 3 Compatible mode Usable A Usable with restriction
420. ssing 2 146 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs E PSTOP instruction Changes an initial execution type program scan execution type program or low speed execution type program into a wait type program at END processing When any program is changed into the wait type program the external output Y is held Use the POFF instruction to ensure that the external output Y is switched off at a change to wait type program E POFF instruction Turns off the output of an initial execution type program scan execution type program or low speed execution type program at END processing and changes that program into a wait type program at the END processing of the next scan This instruction is used to ensure that the external output Y is switched off at a change to wait type program PSTOP POFF Scan execution type program PLOW PSCAN v PSCAN Low speed execution type program Main Routine Program A main routine program is any of the initial execution scan wait cyclic and other programs which start at its beginning step 0 and ends at END FEND FEND is used when creating a subroutine program or interrupt program after a main program When the run condition of a program holds operation is performed from step 0 to END FEND If multiple programs have been set to the same execution type END processing is performed when the END FEND instruction of the last run program is executed 0 step lt gt
421. stence of other nodes E mail function PLC CPU s monitoring function Function to make communications via MELSECNET 10 Function to make communications by data link instructions For use of file transfer FTP server Dedicated instructions instructions related to data transfer MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Protocol specification manual that describes the functions with which the MC protocol for serial communication module Ethernet module is compatible their send and receive frames and send and receive procedures Note 1 The description of the MC protocol is not given For its description refer to the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 2 42 MELSECNET 10H QU71LP21 QU71BR11 MODEL SELECTION NETWORK Overview MELSECNET 10H is a network system which has improved performance capabilities compared to MELSECNET 10 it has the functions and performance capabilities required to exercise centralized control of manufacturing lines by connection of multiple PLCs anda personal computer MELSECNET 10H network module has the functions of both MELSECNET 10 mode designed for connection to the existing MELSECNET 10 system constructed with the A series QnA series PLCs and MELSECNET 10H mode where only the Q series PLCs are used to configure a network for higher performance You have the choice between these modes Note 1 QJ71LP21 and QJ71BR11 may be used only for inter PLC network Note that they
422. t File of device comments annotated to each device of the CPU Device initial value Initial value file required when setting given initial values to devices in the CPU at power on File register File register R ZR file Setting different file names allows multiple file register files to be stored Note that the file registers can be stored in the memory card ROM drive number 2 but not in the ATA card Q2MEM 8MBA 16MAB 32MBA The file registers stored in the flash card allow read only in the program and do not allow data changes in the program Local device Local devices are devices exclusively used with the corresponding programs in the presence of multiple programs When processing any program the corresponding local device data is transferred from the local device area to the executing device area and program processing is then performed 2 24 CPU Built In Memories Memory Cards Debugging data Trace result storage file for the trace function used for program debugging General purpose file Data file written by the FWRITE instruction Note that the general purpose file can be stored in the ATA card Q2MEM 8MBA 16MBA 32MBA only E Program memory Drive number 0 Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU The memory capacity depends on the CPU type Memory Capacity Type Me Number of Files Stored Q02 H CPU 28 QO6HCPU 60 Q12HCPU 124 Q25HCPU 252 Up to 124 program files ca
423. t Y11 gt s a H mH hy WH rer H END Interrupt Program An interrupt program is run after a temporary suspension of a main or sub routine program when an interrupt condition holds and starts at an interrupt pointer I and ends at the IRET instruction This program can respond quickly without influencing of lt the scan time of a sequence program Create an interrupt program after any of the main routine programs such as initial execution scan wait and cyclic programs after FEND or create them together as wait programs For interrupt pointers used in interrupt programs the same interrupt pointer cannot be specified in any of the initial execution scan wait cyclic and other programs An interrupt program can be run by 1 Interrupt request from interrupt module A1S161 2 Interrupt request from intelligent function or network module 3 Interrupt request by internal timer 4 Interrupt request due to error occurrence Interrupt from A1SI61 interrupt module An interrupt program is run under an external interrupt condition Only one A1SI61 module may be used with one CPU module and one module can run 16 different interrupt programs l0 to 115 Interrupt from intelligent function or network module The Q series intelligent function and network modules have predetermined interrupt channels SI and applications and parameters are used to assign interrupt programs to interrupt pointers 15
424. t value Limits servo motor generated torque to within setting range of torque limit value Note that digital to analog conversion module is also needed for torque limit Does not execute positioning to outside the setting range of upper and lower stroke limits set in parameters Makes deceleration to stop using limit switch connected to external input connector of QD75 Changes speed during positioning operation Varies speed during positioning operation at the ratio of 1 to 300 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Sub Function Acceleration deceleration function restoration function Limit function Skip function M code output function Teaching function Target position changing function Command in position function Others Acceleration deceleration processing function Multiple axis simultaneous start function Other Function Parameter initialization function Executed data backup function 1 0 logic switching function Description Changes acceleration deceleration time at speed change Changes torque limit value during control Restores absolute value of specified axis Can make a stop per automatic deceleration or positioning data Suspends decelerates to stop currently executed positioning at entry of skip signal and starts next positioning Can set number between 0 and 65535 per positioning data as M code Registers address positioned by manual control as address of positioning dat
425. t Leoma STN Monochrome liquid crystal 2 monochrome interface built in A T SBD nee 5 M3 STR COLO qU Crystal i aah Ds raed ASSEGOTLED module __ STN Monochrome liquid crystal2 2 monochrome AQ56GOT LBD M3 ee connectable A951GOT QSBD ao a STN color liquid crystal 8 tte ASSIGOT Tecoraep S PT communication A951GOT QLBD M3 STN Monochrome liquid crystal2 2 monochrome interface built in Overview and Features E Compact display The GOT A900 series models have extremely small external dimensions and depths and the A975GOT B and A970GOT B have the smallest in panel depth of 40mm 1 73inch in the industry The 12 inch large display A985GOT has the same panel cutting dimension as that of the GP70 series 10 inch color type the smallest panel cutting dimension as a 12 inch type in the industry and the 6 inch mid sized display A95_ GOT has the same panel cutting dimension as that of the GP70 series and MT260 6 inch types Designed to connect cables at its bottom the GOT needs a minimum depth for connectors and flexing of cables when mounted in a control panel etc Control panel A970GOT E Compatible with a wide variety of connection forms To say nothing of bus connection which permits fast communication the GOT A900 is compatible with various connection forms such as MELSECNET connection so you can make the best selection for your system Bus connection is not available for the A mode e Bu
426. t circuit protection function terminal block 12 24VDC 0 1A sink 32 points with short circuit protection function connector 12 24VDC 0 1A sink 64 points with short circuit protection function connector 12 24VDC 0 5A sink 16 points with fuse terminal block 12 24VDC 0 5A source 16 points with fuse terminal block 12 24VDC 0 1A source 32 points with short circuit protection function connector Q Series I O Module User s Manual optional Note 1 The purchase order number is indicated in the manual s Type field 6 12 MODEL LIST Q Mode Model List Product Type Outline Analog module Q64AD 4 channels analog to digital conversion voltage current input Q68ADV 8 channels analog to digital conversion voltage input Q68ADI 8 channels analog to digital conversion current input SWOD5C QADU E Analog to digital converter module utility software 13JR03 Q64AD Q68ADV A68ADI User s Manual Details optional Note 1 13JQ51 Q64AD Q68ADV A68ADI User s Manual Hardware packed with product Q62DA 2 channels digital to analog conversion voltage current output Q64DA 4 channels digital to analog conversion voltage current output SWOD5C QDAU E Digital to analog converter module utility software 13JR02 Q62DA Q64DA User s Manual Details optional Note 1 13JQ49 Q62DA Q64DA User s Manual Hardware packed with product High speed counter QD62 2 channels 200kpps 5 12 24VDC input sink transistor output module QD62D 2
427. t points terminal 16 16pt X kake No block DC AC input module 12 24VDC 12 24VAC 16 input points 16 16pt X E No terminal block DC input module 12 24VDC 16 input points terminal 16 16pt X E E No block sink A1SX40 S1 24VDC 16 input points terminal block 16 16pt X Bees al No emn for high speed input sink 24VDC 16 input points terminal block 16 16pt X TRA No for high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 32 input points connector 32 32pt X Balk No sink 24VDC 32 input points connector for 32 32pt X EEA No high speed input sink 24VDC 32 input points connector for 32 32pt X ae al No high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC 64 input points connector 64 64pt X epee eee No sink 24VDC 64 input points connector for 64 64pt X fered ord No high speed input sink 24VDC 64 input points connector for 64 64pt X peel eo No high leakage current sensor sink 12 24VDC dynamic 64 input points 64 64pt X al No connector sink 5 12VDC 32 input points connector 32 32pt X E al No sink 24VDC 16 input points terminal block 16 16pt X cae S No for high speed input sink source 24VDC 16 input points terminal block 16 16pt X fee qos No for high speed input sink source A1SX80 S2 24VDC 16 input points terminal block 16 16pt X 0 050 No al for high leakage current sensor eal sink source 12 24VDC 32 input points connector 32 32pt X kE No sink source 24VDC 32 input points conn
428. t up color according to value of word device Panel meter display function Shows on meter the ratio of word device value to high low value Gathers data stored in word device at specified timing shows trend graph and after showing it to the end of display range scrolls Line graph display function Batch gathers data of multiple word devices and shows line graph Graph display Bar graph display function Shows data stored in multiple word devices in bar graph funetion Collects data of multiple word devices and graphs the ratio of each word device data to the whole Part display function Drawing function Lamp display function Trend graph display function Statistic graph display function Shows in level the ratio of word device value to high low value in any closed Level display functi evel display function iafe Touch key function Touching the screen allows device change screen switching etc Data input Numeric input function Writes any value to specified word device function ASCII input function Writes any ASCII and shift JIS code to specified word device 5 17 Q A gt FUNCTION LIST Other object functions Drawing function Function List Function Report function Hardcopy function Bar code function Operation panel function Maintenance function System monitor function Security function Other functions 5 18 Printer function Ou
429. tance 500m Occupied I O points 32 Consumptiion current 0 1A 2 74 MODEL SELECTION en NETWORK Intelligent Communication A1SD51S Overview E Restrictions on use with Q mode The A1SD51S is a module equipped with two RS232C When the A1SD51S accesses the devices in the PLC ports and one RS422 port to permit creation of two BASIC their ranges are limited as indicated below language programs which operate in multitask mode Device Type Rance Communication protocols which are too complex to be X 0 7FF created in a sequence program can be created using the y 0 7FF BASIC language MIL S 0 8191 B 0 FFF Features S T 0 2047 0 2047 E System configuration PETE MA Main base Q301B 0 2047 c 0 1023 A1SD51S 1088 Extension base QA1S6 OB 0 1023 0 1023 The A1SD51S can be used with QA1S6__B D 0 6143 Ww 0 FFF E Programming software F 0 2047 The following software programs are available as a Performance Specifications console for BASIC programming and for saving created Item Specifications programs 7 Programming D51H BASIC SW11X AD51HP E language Number of tasks 2 tasks Task starting condition At power on start from PLC CPU start from other task Internal memory Program memory 64k bytes 2 tasks Common memory 8k bytes Expanded register 1024 points 2k bytes Expanded relay 1024 points I O to from PLC CPU Input 27 points output 17 point
430. telligent communication module ID interface module A1SJ71PB96F A1SJ71UC24 R2 S2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 A1SJ71J92 S3 Profibus module Modbus module JEMANET JPCN 1 master module Only when using GET PUT service Note 2 The modules given in Note 1 have also functional restrictions For details refer to the corresponding module explanation sections Modules Loaded 2 13 MODEL SELECTION Applicable Model List 7 The instructions dedicated to the following modules which existed in the QnA A series program instructions are unusable with the Q mode CPU They must be rewritten using the FROM TO instruction Product High speed counter module Type A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D S1 A1SD62E A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 AISD75P1 P2 P3 S3 A1SD75M1 M2 M3 A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711ID2 R4 MELSECNET MINI S3 Positioning module ID interface 8 Only the GOT A900 series graphic operation terminals are usable Q mode compatible system OS and communication driver must be installed Note that the Q series bus interface is required for bus connection The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT are not usable MODEL SELECTION Q Mode CPU Modules CPU QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Overview In order to build optimal high performance equipment the Q mode CPU modules have greatly improved processing performance capabilities program memory capacities etc and also improved performance capabi
431. terminal block out of the Q series 16 point I O module terminal block type Features 1 Usable with both AC and DC 16 point I O modules 2 Single wire and two wire type with common terminal per point terminal blocks are available 3 The lead out cable is printed with wire numbers for ease of wiring 4 The terminal block uses self tapping screws for ease of wiring round crimping terminals 5 Can be mounted using a DIN rail or screws Appearance FA TB161 E e easel ec OOLQOLOLO DIN rail COWOCOOOOO FA TB161ACC1 2 TB162ACC QOOPCOOQOOOOOOPPOO MNN GOOOGOSGOOOSGOOHSOOOSO T DIN rail rad FA CBL TD Type Description FA TB161AC Terminal block convertor module 1 wire type Applicable I O modules QX10 QX40 QY10 QY80 QX80 QY40P QY50 Terminal block convertor module 2 wire type Applicable I O modules QX10 QX40 QY10 QY80 Terminal block convertor module 2 wire type Applicable I O modules QX80 QY40P QY50 FA TB161ACC2 FA TB161ACC1 FA CBLO5TD Dedicated cable 0 5m 1 64ft FA CBLO7TD Dedicated cable 0 7m 2 30ft FA CBL10TD Dedicated cable 1m 3 28ft FA CBL15TD Dedicated cable 1 5m 4 92ft
432. than the designer from understanding that program Compared to this SFC creates an SFC chart which matches the operation processes of equipment Hence the freedom of program design is limited but it is limited to match the operation processes and therefore persons other than the designer can understand the program easily producing program standardizing effect Unsequential control is enabled in the ladder Since an operation sequence is not described in a ladder it may also be applied to programs designed to perform operations using external interrupt signals and to perform monitoring continuously for example Oppositely a sequence is described in an SFC chart and SFC is not appropriate for such controls that require processing independently of the sequence The Q mode PLC allows use of both the SFC and ladder programs either of which can therefore be used as necessary 2 139 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs WBasics of SFC The operation of an SFC program starts at an initial step the next step is executed every time a transition condition An SFC chart consists of a step which describes the f holds a series of operations ends at an end step and the processing of each operation process in a series of SON hi ti da t iti dition program is restarted at the initial step Note 1 machine operation processes and a transition condition ps p 7 ta Note 1 Only the SFC program in block 0 is resta
433. thout creation of sequence programs Appearance Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Q68ADV Q64ADI RUN RUN COIN D O Jo p DIN D O Jo Ph ole N ola A w ro IO NIO LO IO ALTO WIO NIO I0 SIO NIO IO AIO AIO WIO NIO I0 Equipment lt Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI accessories gt Product Description Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI User s Manual Hardware Manual lt Separately prepared products gt The following manual must be prepared separately Product Manual Description Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI User s Manual Details lt Software gt Type Description Remarks or later programming module utility package A Must be prepared A Prepared as required Note The software of the above products or later version are usable 2 100 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Analog to Digital Conversion Modules Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Performance Specifications Item wee Number of analog input points Analog input Digital output I O characteristics Max resolution Accuracy accuracy to full scale Conversion time Absolute max input Insulation system Number of points occupied Connection terminal Applicable wire size Applicable crimping terminal Internal
434. tible with MELSECNET 10H connection Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 operates Intelligent device Recommended cables for connection between personal computer and GOT Personal GOT computer AC30R2 9SS FX 232CAB 1 Mitsubishi Electric Q Mode A Mode Op O JO x X x OPO O O IO O O O O O O O O x 5 6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION System Configuration Connection to Q Mode CPU E Bus connection When first GOT A900 is 13 2m 43 28feet or more away cable length 1 stage occupied Note 3 1 stage occupied Note 3 Bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB S Within 13 2m 43 28feet Within 13 2m 43 28feet Within 37 0m 121 31feet Within 37 0m 121 31feet Max 5 units Max 5 units Usable GOT A900 A985GOT A97 GOT A960GOT A951GOT Q A956GOT Necessary A985GOT When multiple GOTs are connected A9GT QBUS22S interface A97_ GOT B When one GOT is connected or the A9GT QBUSS module A960GOT last GOT when multiple GOTs are connected A956GOT When multiple GOTs are connected A9YGT QBUS2SU A951GOT Q When one GOT is connected or the Unnecessary A951GOT Q contains bus connection interface last GOT when multiple GOTs are connected Connection cable QC06B 0 6m cable 1 97 feet QC12B 1 2m cable 3 94 feet QC30B 3m cable 9 84 feet QC50B 5m cable 16 39 f
435. ting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 LLEI Epp s Specify the channels for gain setting Write the digital value as a 16 bit signed binary value Setting range For voltage output 4096 to 4095 For current output 0 to 4095 Setting range check Area used to check the setting ranges set from GPPW b15 b14 bi3 b12 bii bi0 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 OH 4 20mA 1H 0 20mA 2H 1 5V 3H O 5V 4H 10 10V Fu user setting range Offset gain adjustment value designation To adjust the analog output value in the offset gain selection mode write a digital value of 3000 to 3000 to determine the offset or gain value Set value designation Set value changing request YOC Set value changing completion flag X0C 2 106 Utility Package for Digital to Analog Conversion SWOD5C QDAU E MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Modules Overview SWOD5C QDAU E is a utility package designed to set initial data needed to use the Q62DA or Q64DA digital to analog conversion module and to set automatic writing of digital to analog converted data from the CPU device memory to the digital to analog conversion module and is used by adding it onto SW4D5C GPPW E or later When using the Q62DA or Q64DA the use of QDAU is not required and initial value setting and others can be made in sequence programs but using QDAU can reduce their sequence prog
436. tion function of the serial communication module it is recommended to use QSCU for various data settings Main monitoring and testing data setting function list Item Outline Performs transmission control method setting and status monitoring Transmission control Performs necessary condition and MC protocol communications when on demand function is used in MC protocol communications Performs necessary condition and Monitoring and Testing Functions The monitoring and testing functions are designed to set data and conditions necessary to use various functions of the QJ71C24 and change the transmission control system on the screen and to register them in the flash memory of the QJ71C24 Also they can display the registration status of the buffer memory Note 1 or flash memory and the operating status of the module on the screen Major items that may be monitored and tested are indicated below Detailed Items DR control DC control selection DC1 DC3 code designation DC2 DC4 code designation half duplex full duplex selection CD terminal enable disable priority designation for half duplex simultaneous communication transmission method for half duplex transmission resumption no receive monitoring time response monitoring time transmission monitoring time unit selection word byte sending and receiving buffer first addresses sending and receiving buffer lengths sending and receiving transparent code designation
437. tion capability against a third party Use this method when you want to protect the required files only A password can be set with four alphanumeric characters E ROM operation Debugged parameters and programs can be stored in ROM The processing of the parameters and programs stored in ROM is started after they have been transferred to the program memory drive 0 at power on or CPU reset Boot operation setting necessary The CPU s built in standard ROM drive 4 or memory card ROM drive 2 may be used E Clock function The Q mode CPU module has an internal clock function As the clock data can be read with a sequence program it may also be used for system time management The clock data is also used for a failure history The clock function is battery backed during power off of the PLC Clock data Data Name Description Year 4 digits Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 automatic leap year judgment Hour 0 to 23 24 hour system Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Day of week o oo O Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday e Saturday Accuracy Refer to the CPU performance specifications for accuracy Timing range The clock can time between January 1 1980 to December 31 2079 2 20 MODEL SELECTION Q Mode CPU Modules CPU QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Appearance E Q02CPU E Q02CPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Performance Specifications a eect Con
438. tion monitoring Operation test Sampling monitoring Connection check Description Sets parameters of each axis Sets positioning data Monitors data of positioning being executed Performs test operation of positioning control Sets axis to address of positioning data by teaching operation Sets comment to M code Performs offline real time simulation Sets block start data Monitors point under positioning control Performs test operation of positioning control from block start point Sets start conditions of start block data Monitors running states such as feed current value axis feedrate and axis status Monitors error warning start and error time start history Monitors X Y devices external signals and status signals Monitors control status preset parameters etc Tests positioning data number specified start current value changing speed changing zeroing jog operation and manual pulse generator operation Simultaneously samples and monitors specified signals and buffer memory Initializes QD75 and displays signals from external devices Also performs initial operation test by jog operation SWOD5C QD75P E Operating Environment Item Description Peripheral device Pentium 133MHz or more recommended personal computer on which Windows operates Operating system Microsoft Windows 95 98 Microsoft software Windows NT workstation 4 0 Required memory Recommended 32MB or more Hard disk 40Mbyte
439. tion of years in and after 2000 As described above the A mode CPU has only two lower digit year data When the year data is handled ina sequence program proper processing may not be performed depending on the way of handling For example when years are compared to know whether one is greater or less than the other comparison in the two lower digits will lead to the judgment that 2000 is older than 1999 In a system where a personal computer or similar external device reads the A mode CPU devices via the computer link module MELSECNET II 10 module or the like to perform result management the data in and after 2000 will be handled as older than the data prior to 2000 if the clock data of the A mode CPU has also been rearranged into the reading time series In such a case the application program of the external device must be modified to handle the year data in four digits A general way often used to change the year data from two digits to four digits is to add 19 in front of the two lower digit year data of 50 to 99 and convert it into four digits of 19 _ or to add 20 in front of the two digit data of 00 to 49 and convert it into four digits of 20 LIE 6 10 MELFANSweb Information retrieval and communication on the Internet MITSUBISH wis Tadu manny IS All Rights Reserved Copyright C MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 1999 Product lineup Introduces the outlines of our products per series Thi
440. tline Numerical data stored in word devices or special function module buffer memory are gathered and printed per data collection trigger or comments associated with numerical data or bit device ON OFF are printed e Logging report Data are gathered and printed per data collection trigger and data to be printed next are printed subsequently without page break of printer paper e Real time report Data are gathered per data collection trigger collected data are stored into PC card and data stored in PC card are printed at printing trigger ON OFF of bit device or touching of touch key extended function causes currently displayed monitor screen of GOT to be printed or saved into PC card in BMP file format PLC CPU checks GOT operating status or transmits information on GOT900 series operating status to GOT Performs write operation to PLC CPU when specified condition holds specified bit device turns ON OFF Used to associate comments with multiple bit devices and show comments of ON bit devices in order of occurrence in right to left flow of base screen Writes reads device value to specified device of PLC CPU under specified condition device ON OFF Used to set WAV format voice file for playing voice as error warning sound message or as touch sound at touch of touch key Used to show test window during monitor screen display to change device values This function is also valid during ladder monitor function Data read by bar code reade
441. to 2mm Applicable crimping terminal RAV1 25 3 5 RAV2 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 59 to 88N cm Weight kg lb 0 60 1 32 Inputs outputs LG FG separated inputs LG FG outputs LG FG By noise simulator of 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1 4s noise width and 25 to B where the AnS series A1S63P 24VDC 30 35 41W 81A within 1ms 5A 5 5A or more Within 10ms 500VAC across primary 5VDC 5M Q or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency 0 50 1 1 3 20 Base Units Extension Cables MODEL SELECTION BASE UNITS Base Units The base unit serves to supply the CPU I O and special function modules with 5VDC generated by the power supply module It also serves to exchange signal data among the CPU I O and special function modules For combination for use of the base units refer to the section of system configuration E Model list Main base unit QA1S33B QA1S35B QA1S38B Number of I O modules loaded Applicable 1 O AnS series modules External 255 10 05 325 12 81 430 16 94 dimensions 130 5 12 mm inch Weight kg Ib 0 75 1 65 lt QA1S38B QA1S35B accessories gt 1 2 2 Product Description Dustproof cover For AnS I O module Base mounting M5x25 4 pcs screw Manual QCPU A A Mode User s Manual Hardware Extensi
442. to another PLC PLC CPU status control remote RUN STOP etc can be performed if data communication with other PLCs is made using Ethernet Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX CORP U S A E Number of simultaneously opened communication lines Up to 16 communication lines can be opened logical lines connected for concurrent data communications Two communication lines are used for sending and receiving by fixed buffer communications with the same equipment x Opening one communication line allows communications by MC protocol from host system random accessing buffer communications and fixed buffer communications from host system PLC CPU sending or receiving with protocol The communication line for fixed buffer communications sending or receiving with no protocol does not permit combined use with another data communications system such as communications using MC protocol E Ease of parameter setting programless Using the network parameter setting of GPPW you can make on screen setting of the initial processing of the QJ71E71 and logical link processing open processing with other nodes significantly simplifying sequence programs and enhancing the visual recognition of the network setting status E Programming via Ethernet PLC programming and monitoring can be performed from GPPW on a personal computer via Ethernet With this function you can perform programming monitoring at a remote location utilizi
443. treet Lower Tel 64 4 569 7350 Global FA Center North America FA Center Europe FA Center UK FA Center Korea FA Center Beijing FA Center Shanghai FA Center Taipei FA Center Asean FA Center Service Network Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Customer Technical Center Han Neung Electric Co Ltd Gangling Electronic Technology Development Beijing Co Ltd Keling Electric Shanghai Co Ltd Setsuyo Enterprise Co Ltd Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte Ltd HuttWellington 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Travellers Lane Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB 2F Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg 660 11 Deungchon dong Kangseo Ku Seoul 157 030 Korea Room 954 Office Building New Century Hotel NO 6 Southern Road Capital Gym Beijing 100044 China 2F Blockd Building Automation Instrumentation Plaza 103 Cao Bao Rd Shanghai 200233 China 6F NO 105 Wu Kung 3rd RD Wu ku Hsiang Taipei Hsine Taiwan R O C 307 Alexandra Road 05 01 02 Singapore 159943 Fax 64 4 569 3623 Tel 1 847 478 2100 Fax 1 847 478 0328 Tel 49 2102 486 0 Fax 49 2102 486 717 Tel 44 1707 276100 Fax 44 1707 278695 Tel 82 2 3663 0471 Fax 82 2 3663 0475 Tel 86 10 6849 2077 Fax 86 10 6849 2087 Tel 86 21 6484 9360 Fax 86 21 6484 9361 Tel 886 2 2298 2499 Fax 886 2 2299 2509 Tel 65 473 2308 Fa
444. trol system Repeated operation using stored program I O control method Refresh mode Direct I O possible using device name Programming language Language dedicated to sequence control Relay symbol type ladder logic symbolic language MELSAP 3 cae sequence instruction MOV ns Constant scan ms 0 5 to 2000ms can be specified in 0 5ms increments Parameter setting Program start at given time intervals Program capacity Number of steps 124k 252k Number of files Two SFC files included Note 3 Number of I O device points 8192 X YO to 1FFF Note 1 Number of I O points 4096 X Y0 to FFF Note 2 Number Internal relay M points Default 8192 MO to 8191 Each number of device of device Latch relay L points points can be changed points Link relay B points Default 8192 BO to 1FFF by parameters Note Timer T points Default 2048 TO to 2047 used as low speed or high speed timer that the overall device Switching between low speed and high speed timers is set by capacity is uniform instruction Low speed high speed timer timing increments are parameter set Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms increments default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms increments default 10ms Retentive timer ST points Default 0 STO to 2047 used as low speed or high speed timer Switching between low speed and high speed timers is set by instruction Low speed high speed timer timing increments are parameter set
445. tus when Error Occurs At start No operation Corrective Action 1 In case of positioning operation set the positioning address within the software stroke limit setting range 2 For JOG operation and manual pulse generator operation start carry out operation within the software stroke limit range Simultaneous monitoring of sequence programs When used with the GPPW function software package this software can perform efficient debugging lt Example of simultaneously starting SWD5C QD75P E and GPPW gt 2 123 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Signal 0 0 E Dever Device Enter V0 signal Status sirl X Jiem onor EERIE x0 xt x2 I Sora Edt Positioning Module Software n Onire osa s saen Qala lil eA Fx Used iy system Not use xa of Rogen H lhe a AF4 o MAILS eleli alta PARLER EOP r MIFA gja Sz o Sal of gle Ready Function List Monitoring Connection diagnostics 2 124 Function Parameter setting Positioning data setting Positioning data monitoring Positioning data test M code comment setting Block start data setting Block start data monitoring Block start data test Condition data setting Running monitoring Opera
446. uctions Instructions to be noted for utilization The following instructions must be noted when a program is utilized because there usage methods are different from those of QnA Q2AS Class Instruction Name Annunciator output set reset OUT SET RST Device comment data read COMRD ASCII code print PRC Error annunciator display reset LEDR BCD 4 digit to BIN data conversion BIN BCD 8 digit to BIN data conversion DBIN Clock data read DATERD Clock data registration DATEWR Interrupt mask IMASK Refresh COM Network refresh ZCOM Routing data read RTREAD Routing data write RTWITE PID control data setting PIDINT PID control PIDCONT 1 2 phase input up down counter UDCNT1 UDCNT2 Pulse density measurement SPD Cyclic pulse output PLSY Pulse width modulation PWM E Instructions for intelligent function modules special function modules When using a QnA series program after conversion into a Q mode program the following should be noted if the conversion source QnA series program includes special function module dedicated instructions When continuously using AnS series special function modules network modules with Q mode The Q mode CPU is not compatible with the A AnS series special function module network module dedicated instructions Rewrite all corresponding instructions using the FROM TO instruction When changing QnA Q2AS A ANS series special function modules network modules for Q series intelligent function modules netwo
447. ue to be held or cleared Setting can be made per channel Appearance Q62DA Q64DA CO CO NO TAWN J Equipment lt Q62DA Q64DA accessories gt Product Description Manual Q62DA Q64DA User s Manual Hardware lt Separately prepared products gt The following manual must be prepared separately Product Description Manual Q62DA Q64DA User s Manual Details lt Software gt Type Remarks SW4D5C GPPW E For sequence programming O or later SWOD5C QDAU E Digital to analog module utility A package Must be prepared Prepared as required Note 3 The software of the above products or later version are usable 2 104 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Digital to Analog Conversion Modules Q62DA Q64DA Performance Specifications Q64DA Item Number of analog output points 4 points 4 channels Digital input 4096 to 4095 Anelog oupi 10 to 10VDC external load resistance 1k to 1M Q 0 to 20mADC external load resistance 0 to 600 Q Pon Voltage 0 to 4000 ee eee l 4000 to 4000 10 to 10V 0 to 4000 Accuracy Ambient temperature 0 1 accuracy 25 5 C to full Ambient temperature 0 3 scale 0 to 55 C Conversion time 80 us channel Absolute max 12V output 21mA Output short circuit protectio
448. ultaneously the interrupt program has priority Instructions for setting of cycle time The execution processing time including the starting overhead time of a cyclic program must be set to less than the cycle setting time of that program Also if the ratio of the cyclic execution program processing time compared to the total processing time is too high it may delay the scan execution program processing resulting in WDT error Be careful when setting the cycle time If any of real time interrupt programs 128 to 131 is used automatic I O X Y refresh is not made at the start and end of the interrupt program As required the partial refresh instruction must be executed to perform I O refresh processing In contrast a cyclic program automatically performs input X and output Y refresh processing in the parameter preset range at the start and end of the cyclic program E Interrupt program performance capabilities Any of the following starting factors can be used to initiate interrupt programs 1 Interrupt from the A1SI61 interrupt module 2 Interrupt from the intelligent function module or network module 3 Cyclic interrupt by CPU s internal timer 0 5ms to 1000ms 4 Interrupt due to CPU error occurrence Starting overhead time The following overhead time is required to start an interrupt program CPU Type Starting Time us QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Start inhibiting factor A
449. umber of steps x 2 60k Total Microcomputer 1k bytes Set number of bytes 58k 60k MELSECNET 10 parameter Note 1 16k 1k bytes 1k 1k 1k steps Number of steps x 2 58k program Extended comment 1k bytes Set number of bytes 1k bytes 63k 64 points Extended file register built in 8k points Number of file register points x 2 128k File register 1k points Number of file register points x 2 16k Comment 1k bytes Set number of bytes 1k bytes 64k 64 points Extended file register memory card 8k points Number of file register points x 2 302k Remarks SFC only Note 3 Note 3 Remarks SFC only Note 3 Note 3 Note 1 The capacity used changes with the settings of the MELSECNET 10 network parameters The area of the network parameter capacity is secured in 2k byte increments on the basis of the total capacity of their settings The memory capacities of the network parameters are as follows Item Internal data Routing parameter Inter data link transfer parameter Common parameter Refresh parameter Station specific parameter Memory Capacity Bytes 30 390 246 2164 module Note 2 92 module 1490 module Note 2 2722 bytes for remote master station The MELSECNET 10 network parameter capacity is determined by the above calculated memory capacity total Total Capacity of Setting 30 to 2048 bytes 2049 to 4906 bytes 4097 to 6144 bytes 6145 to 8192 bytes 8193 to 10240 bytes 10241 to 12288 bytes 12289 to
450. unication QJ71C24 RS 232 1ch RS 422 485 1ch module QJ71C024 R2 RS 232 2ch SWOD5C QSCU E Serial communication module utility software 13JL86 Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic optional Note 1 13JL87 Serial Communication Module User s Manual Applications optional 13JF89 MC Protocol Reference Manual optional 13JQ31 QJ71C24 QJ71C241 R2 User s Manual Hardware packed with product Extension base module QA1S65B Power supply 5 I O slots for AnS series module loading QA1S68B Power supply 8 I O slots for AnS series module loading Extension cable QC06B 0 6m 1 97ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection QC12B 1 2m 3 93ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection QC30B 3m 9 84ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection QC50B 5m 16 39ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection QC100B 10m 32 79ft cable for QA1S65B QA1S68B connection AnS series module In addition to the above modules the AnS series modules can be loaded and used in the QA1S65B QA1S68B Refer to the AnS series module model list Note 1 User s manual includes explanations of the corresponding utility software Also the user s manual details is included the corresponding utility software in the PDF format Note 2 The purchase order number is indicated in the manual s Type field Note 3 The PDF format manual is included in the software product gt xe O D Q O D 12 6 13 MODEL LIST Product CPU module for A mode Battery IC
451. urces 1 Function inputs FX Used to pass ON OFF data to a subroutine program 2 Function output FY Used to pass the operation result ON OFF data of a subroutine program to a subroutine program call source 3 Function register FD Used to transfer data between a subroutine call source and subroutine program er Example E softs 2b pits Soe Shen ta AE ae Spee A Stites eae eee sta When FXO and FD1 are used in a subroutine program specifying the subroutine program call instructions MO and DO passes ON OFF data of MO to FDO and data of DO to FD1 Subroutine program call source Subroutine program X0 gt FX0 Hea PO MO Do Po Hov mi RO H Special relays SM Special relays store the states failure diagnoses system information etc of a CPU module Special registers SD Special registers store the states failure diagnoses system information etc of a CPU module Link direct devices J _ Link direct devices are a way to specify direct access to link devices in a network module of an MELSECNET 10H network system Link direct devices can access only one network module with a single network number When multiple network modules are loaded with the same network number the network module with the lowest first I O number is the target of access Intelligent function module devices U G Intelligent function module devices are a way to specify direct acces
452. ut the communication program of the PLC To handle the data developed in Excel worksheets you can use a wide selection of functions of Excel to print and graph them To use OLEX as Q series compatible SW3D5F CSKP E must have been installed in advance Simple communication setting z Jf z Af EREE Y saving Automatic printing Program less Ease of Setting Excellent Operability By simply connecting a personal computer with the PLC 1 Used as an add in program in the menu OLEX can be via a communication path supported by SW3D5F CSKP E you can transfer PLC data directly to from an Excel worksheet without programming used easily by those who understand Excel 2 The production command data under control of Excel can be written unchanged from the Excel screen onto the specified devices of the PLC without using a program 3 The operation results and quality data set to PLC devices can be read onto an Excel worksheet 4 The read data can be printed with the Excel function For data communication timing you can set automatic Data read from PLC is displayed E_S computer communication such as periodic communication or conditional communication X Microsoft Excel Book1 X File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window OLEX Help Communication path my B x3 c Cell
453. v X 100 W Power consumption of whole PLC system The sum of the above values is the power consumption of the entire PLC system W Wow Wsv Wav Wout Win Ws W Further calculations are necessary to work out the heat generated and a temperature rise in the panel Generally a temperature rise in the panel is expressed as follows W T yal e W_ Power consumption of the entire PLC system obtained as above A Panel inside surface area m U ifthe panel temperature is uniform 6 if the panel air is not circulated 4 If the temperature rise in the enclosure exceeds the specified range it is recommended to install a heat exchanger to lower the temperature in the panel If an ordinary fan is used it will suck not only external air but also dust etc Note that conductive dust etc may affect the PLC LOADING AND INSTALLATION Base Module Mounting E Mounting instructions Note the following when mounting the PLC in an enclosure etc 1 Leave a minimum of 30mm 1 18inch clearance above the PLC to ensure proper ventilation and ease of module replacement 2 The PLC must not be installed on its side horizontally or to a ceiling to ensure proper ventilation 3 Ensure that the surface on which the base is to be mounted is flat to prevent possible flexing of the printed circuit boards 4 Do not mount the PLC close to sources of vibration like large magnetic contactors or
454. welfth point 248 138 PRG TIME OVER 6 112 Thirteenth 249 139 CNK instruction execution 7 point Annunciator detection 113 Fourteenth 250 point 114 Fifteenth point 251 140 to 146 Vacant 115 Sixteenth point 252 116 Interrupt First module 224 147 PRASET instruction label _ 117 generated by Second 225 148 to 149 Vacant sequence start module 118 generating Third module 226 119 module Fourth module 227 150 to Intelligent Using parameter set which intelligent function 18 to 223 120 Fifth module 228 1255 function module will use 121 Sixth module 229 module 122 Seventh 230 interrupt module 123 Eighth module 231 124 Ninth module 232 125 Tenth module 234 126 Eleventh 235 module 127 Twelfth 236 module 128 Interrupt by 100ms 256 129 internal timer 40ms 255 130 Note 1 20ms 254 131 10ms 253 Note 1 The internal timer time limits indicated are default values They can be changed using the parameters between 0 5ms and 1000ms in 0 5ms increments Note 2 When a stopping error occurs the CPU module stops after performing 132 processing Note 3 Error occurrence interrupt is disabled at power on or reset When using 132 to 1255 enable interrupt with the IMASK instruction 2 154 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs SFC block devices BL An SFC block device is used to check whether the specified block of an SFC program is activated or not SFC transition devices TR An SFC transition device
455. width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Fast transient noise IEC61000 4 4 1kV Common terminal arrangement 32 points common common terminal 17 18 36 Yes thermal protection short circuit protection e Thermal protection is activated in increments of 2 points e Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point External connections 37 pin D sub connector Applicable wire size 0 3mm AAAA b OHO ope oodo o o O o a A6CON1E A6CONZE A6CONGE optional A6TBX36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBX70 E block conversion module consumption kg Ib Weight kg Ib 0 15 0 33 a e e ER 67 e 17 18 88 A 1937 I e voan pa via e ve e ve Ds em Internal 2 99 MODEL SELECTION INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Analog to Digital Conversion Modules Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Overview External analog voltage or current signals are converted into digital values and read by the CPU module With the analog data e g voltage pressure temperature current and speed of external devices such as sensors converted into digital data they can be processed by the CPU module Features Model selection according to applications 1 Q64AD 4 channels Voltage or current input can be chosen per channel 2 Q68ADV 8 channels voltage input 3 Q68ADI 8 channels current input Fast conversion processing Conversion speed is as hig
456. will cause that macro instruction to be disassembled into and displayed as individual instructions reducing the viewability of the program In the Q mode PLC this disadvantage has been corrected so that reading a program from the PLC will display a macro instruction in its original form 2 148 PROGRAMMING Sequence Programs Device Type List E Device type list The following table lists the device names usable with the Q mode and their numbers of points default values Note that the devices can be changed according to the number of points and user application Default Value Parameter Setting Number of points Range of use Range 8192 points X0 to X1FFF 8192 points YO to Y1FFF 8192 points S0 to S511 block 2048 points SBO to SB2047 8192 points MO to M8191 8192 points LO to L8191 2048 points FO to F2047 2048 points VO to V2047 8192 points BO to B8191 Changeable within 2048 points TO to T2047 28 8k words Class Type Device Name Input Output Step relay Link special relay Bit device Internal relay Latch relay Annunciator Edge relay Link relay Internal user device Timer Character string ABC 123 constant Retentive timer STO to T2047 Counter Word device Counter 024 points CO to C1023 Data register 12288 points DO to D12287 Link register 8192 points WO to W8191 Link special register 2048 points SWO to SW2147 Function input FXO to FX4 Bit device Function output FYO to FY4 Special relay
457. x 65 476 7439 In FA centers we offer the technical advice about our products and meet your demands concerned with repairs field services and training 6 30 sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100 8310 TELEX J24532 CABLE MELCO TOKYO NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan on recycled paper 0001 MEE
458. y utility package The optional utility package SWOD5C QCTU E is available The use of the utility package is not required but using the utility package allows initial setting and automatic refresh setting to be made on the screen to reduce sequence programs and facilitate the checking of the setting status and operating status Function List Name Description Linear counter function e Can count in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Detects overflow if this range is exceeded Counting alternates between the maximum and minimum values of the ring counter Coincidence output e Outputs an ON OFF signal after function comparing the preset coincidence detection point of any channel with the present value of the counter e On detection of coincidence produces a PLC CPU interrupt signal to start an interrupt program Changes the present value of the counter to any value e Preset operation can be done either by a sequence program or by an external preset input Ring counter function Preset function Counter e Stops counting pulses while the selection disable count enable command is ON function Latch e Stores the present value of the counter counter when the signal of the counter function selection start command is input Sampling e After the counter function counter selection start command is input input pulses are counted during a preset sampling period and stored in the buffer memory Periodic e While th
459. ypes of initial values that may be set 1 Preset value 2 Coincidence output point No 1 setting 3 Coincidence output point No 2 setting 4 Counter function selection setting 5 Sampling periodic time setting 6 Ring counter upper limit value 7 Ring counter lower limit value Initial value setting screen sample Channel initial setting Mi E r Module information Module model name QD62 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type High speed counter module Setting item Setting Preset value setting 0 Coincidence output point set No 1 7200 Coincidence output point set No 2 2400 Counter function selection setting Cycle PLS count lt Sampling cycle set unit 10ms 1000 Ring counter minimum value 0 Ring counter maximum value 0 p Details Decimal input Setting range 2147483648 2147483647 Make text file Cancel Automatic Refresh Setting By making automatic refresh setting you can automatically read count values etc from the high speed counter module into the CPU reducing programs The following data can be refreshed automatically 1 Present value 2 Latch count value 3 Sampling count value 4 Periodic pulse count present value 5 Periodic pulse count last value 6 Sampling periodic counter flag 7 Overflow detection Automatic refresh setting screen sample Auto refresh setting _ Oop x Module information Module model name QD62 Start 1 0 No 00
460. z NC Internal For the setting method refer to the SW5D5C GPPW E Operating Manual Note that OFF gt ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately 2 91 MODEL SELECTION O MODULES Input Modules E QX81 DC input module negative common type DC Input Module Negative Common Type Specifications ax81 24VDC 20 15 ripple ratio within 5 Response time OFF ON 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms gt ON OFF 1ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 70ms or less CPU parameter setting default value 10ms gt Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6557 38feet Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 60Hz noise frequency block conversion module consumption A Weight kg Ib 1 R00 Js xo N saoe x 13 32 14 33 15 34 16 35 37 19 0 10 20 30 40 5055 Ambient temperature C xo fJ xs xo fse x9 xoa a XI x f3 xe s xece O xo fsa xo x Je xe xo as XIE com 37 _ nco coms NC COM Internal For the setting method refer to the SW5D5C GPPW E Operating Manual Note that OFF ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately 2 92 MODEL SELECTION I O MODULES Output Modules E QY10 contact output module Contact

DATA BOOK

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents